LIST OF PRE-TENDER DOCUMENTS

VOLUME I TENDER PARTICULARS

VOLUME II BILLS OF QUANTITIES

VOLUME III ARCHITECTURAL AND CIVIL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME IV MEP SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME V DRAWINGS

VOLUME VI SOIL INVESTIGATION REPORT

 PRE-TENDER DOCUMENT
VOLUME III ARCHITECTURAL AND CIVIL SPECIFICATIONS

PROJECT : PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY

(Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension +
External shaded Storage Area)on Plot no. 5330279,
DIC, Dubai.

Tel : +971 4 2665758

email: bds@bdsmiddleeast.ae
 VOLUME III

INDEX.

Contents

1. General and Preliminaries ................................................................................................................... 3

2. Piling Works ....................................................................................................................................... 12
3. Excavation and Earthworks ............................................................................................................... 13
4. Concrete Works ................................................................................................................................. 18
5. Block Work......................................................................................................................................... 50
6. Roofing and Waterproofing ................................................................................................................ 54
7. Metal Works and Glazing................................................................................................................... 79
8. Carpentry & Joinery ........................................................................................................................... 90
9. Structural Steelworks ......................................................................................................................... 96
10. Floor, Wall and Ceiling..................................................................................................................... 106
11.6 W Wall finishes ................................................................................................................................ 196
12. Painting and Decorating .................................................................................................................. 197
13. External Works ................................................................................................................................ 204
14. Particular Specifications .................................................................................................................. 206

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 2
 VOLUME III

1. General and Preliminaries

1.1. General

The Conditions of contract, Bill of Quantities and the Drawings shall be read in conjunction with the
Specifications and matters referred to, shown or described in the former are not necessarily repeated
in the latter.

Notwithstanding the subdivision of the Specification into various headings, every part is to be deemed
supplementary to every other part and the various parts are to be read with each other, so far as it may
be practicable to do so, or when the context so permits.

1.2. Standards, materials, goods and workmanship

In various places throughout this specification and the Bills of Quantities reference is made to the
Standards, Specifications and Bye- Laws issued by the British standards Institution and other similar
organization. These references shall in every case be deemed to include the latest edition or issue of
such Standards, Specifications and By Laws including all revisions, amendments and addenda
subsequently issued. Where materials are not specified to be to a particular British Standard and a
British Standard exists in respect of such materials, then the materials shall in all respects comply with
the relevant and current British Standard. In cases where British Standards do not exist, the materials
used shall be of the best type available and shall generally be to the Engineer's satisfaction.Reference
to British Standards shall not bar the use of materials from sources where other standardsapply, but no
material shall be in any respect, inferior to those which specifically complies with the relevant British
Standard.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 3
 VOLUME III

1.3. Approved trade names/manufacturers/suppliers

(As a guide for the quality – Refer particular specification)

In these documents, Trade names or manufacturer's/supplier’s names have been provided to identify
materials, equipment and products of an acceptable standard, fabrication and finish.

1.4. Samples & Testing of materials

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

1.5. Manufacturer’s instructions

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 4
 VOLUME III

1.6. Enumerating and pricing materials

The issued along this set bills of Quantities shall not be used as a basis for measurement of the
materials and the Contractor is entirelyresponsible for assessing the quantities of materials to be priced
according to concept drawings endorsed.

1.7. Scaffolding
WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT
(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

1.8. Cutting and patching

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

1.9. Protection of the works

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT
(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

1.10. Site boarding/fencing

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

1.11. Water for the works

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 5
 VOLUME III

1.12. Electricity for the works

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

1.13. Existing site services

The Contractor shall include at his desecration sufficient provisions to follow up and obtain all the
required information related to existing site services such as telephone, electrical, water, drainage and
the like on the site before commencing excavationor piling. The Contractor will be responsible for the
protection of all existing services within the site and shall make good at his expense any damages to
existing services resulting from his carrying out of the Works to the satisfaction of the Engineer and
relevant authority. The Contractor will be responsible for giving notice to the relevant authority where
temporary or permanent re-routing or diverting of existing services if found to be necessary and shall
complete the same at his own expense to the Engineer's and respective Authorities' approval.

1.14. Pricing Instructions

The Contractor shall consider while pricing this set of document the following:
1.14.1. To allot all provisions required for complete operational facility according to design limits shown
in the concept drawings associated with this documents.
1.14.2. The produced prices will benchmark the overall cost assumed for the project and accordingly
will qualify or disqualify the contractor from the final Tender Invitation.
1.14.3. Sika and the Consultant , has issued this documents as summarized packaged where the
contractor must study furtherly and qualify all provisions as to be in the final tender process.
1.14.4. The BOQ’s are guided with general items only and assumed a L.S pricing based on areas,
type and description of the materials.
1.14.5. Steel structure and framing will requires contractors to obtain official quotations from
specialized steel structure suppliers/contractors , of which may or may not be considered or
shortlisted at the final tender announcement invitations.

1.15. Site office for engineer’s representative

The contractor shall provide, maintain and clear away on completion of the Contract the following site
office and facilities for the Engineer and his representative.

Description Unit no. Area

Offices for Engineer's representative &
(5 x 3.5 ) m for each
Client
Meeting Room 1 (8. x 3.5) m. for 10 persons
Sample Office 1 (3x3) m
Kitchen 1 (2x3) m
Toilet 1 (2x2) m

The offices shall be to the approval of the Engineer and shall be weatherproof, completed with electric
power, lighting and air conditioning. The internal walls and ceilings shall be paint finished with vinyl
tiles flooring. All windows shall be glazed with dust proof seals and insect screens and finished with
curtains and / or blinds.

The office shall be provided with efficient drainage, sanitation and sewage disposal facilities and with a
continuous piped supply of potable water.

Sanitary facilities shall be complete with double bowl double drained sink with cupboard unit under,
0.6 m3 refrigerator, electric kettle, floor and wall mounted cupboards, water heater, miscellaneous
kitchen utensils, cups, and cutlery and mineral water.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 6
 VOLUME III

The office shall be locked and the Contractor shall allow all costs in connection with guarding and daily
cleaning, all to the Engineer's approval.

The contractor shall provide three new computers with all accessories, required programs (like
AutoCAD, MS Office, etc.) laser printers, telephone and a fax machine and all office stationary for the
duration of the contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs in connection therewith and
for telephone calls within U.A.E only.

The site shall have a shaded car park reserved for at least five vehicles of consultant/Client.

The Contractor shall, within 7days of the order to commence the Works, provide the Engineer with full
details of the offices and all the furniture, fittings and equipment he proposes to provide. The offices
shall be available for use within 15 days of the issue of that written approval.

After completion of the Contract, drawing stand, cupboard, containing files shall be handed over to the
consultant whereas the office buildings and all the furniture and equipment shall revert to the
Contractor. The office shall not, however, be removed from site without the prior order from the
Engineer.

After removal of the structure including the car port, the Contractor shall remove all foundations,
services, including water pipes etc. provided for the offices, clean and level the site and restore the
ground to its original condition.

1.16 Furnishing of the office for the engineer’s representative

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

1.17 Delivery, handling and storage of materials

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 7
 VOLUME III

1.18 Control and test equipment to be provided by contractors

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

1.19 Site offices for contractor

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

1.20 Contractor’s site area

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

1.21 Site progress meetings

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

1.22 Progress photographs/progress report

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 8
 VOLUME III

1.23 Setting out

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

1.24 Signboards

The Contractor shall provide and maintain sign board of blackboard panel’s size 2.4m x 1.2 m painted
two coats with white oil paint back and front and supported 3.00 m above the ground with steel pipe
(6”) framing and struts painted matt white and let into the ground and fixed in concrete foundations.

Sign board shall be written in both Arabic and English by skilled sign writer to include:

 The Project name

 Building Permit no.
 Client’s name and address
 Consultant’s name and address
 Contractor’s name and address.
 Subcontractor’s name and address.

The location and format of the board to be agreed during construction.

A large scale layout shall be prepared and submitted for the Engineer's approval before fabrication.
No advertising material other than the above will be permitted anywhere on the site.

On completion of the works the sign board shall be removed from its location and area made good.

1.25 Defective work

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

1.26 Erection equipment or other plant

If cranes or any other type of plant which places any load on the proposed structure, all details of such
plant shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before the work is actually commenced. If
approved by the Engineer and architecturally acceptable, permission may be given for the structure to
be strengthened, in order to receive the loads, and the Contractor shall be responsible for any resulting
additional costs.

The Contractor shall be responsible for making good to the satisfaction of the Engineer any damageto
the permanent structure which may be caused by his plant and equipment.

1.27 Loading in excess of design load

No loading in excess of the design loading shall be placed on any portion of the structure without the
written permission of the Engineer.

If such permission is granted, all beams or other members of the structure which are subjected to
loading other than the designed loading shall be strengthened and supported to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, and the Contractor shall be responsible for any resulting additional costs. The Contractor
shall be responsible for making good to the satisfaction of the Engineer any damage to the permanent
structure which may be caused by such excess loading.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 9
 VOLUME III

1.28 Building permit

The Contractor shall collect the building permit from consultant office after getting the required NOCs.
The contactor shall allow for obtaining the required permits and NOCs for approvals and pay all
necessary fees in connection therewith.

1.29 Permanent drainage, water and electricity connections

The Contractor shall allow for arranging and obtaining the permanent drainage, water and electricity
and Etisalat connections to the proposed development and he shall be responsible for making all
payments in connection therewith.

1.30 Handing over

Prior to handing over the contracted works the Contractor shall gain the approvals and respective
Completion Certificates from all the local government departments, authorities and the like that the
work has been completed in accordance with their requirements. Any payments in connection
therewith shall be paid by the Contractor.

The following items shall be handed over/ arranged for prior or during handing over as applicable.

1. Two complete sets of as built drawings (Architectural, Structural and services) plus two soft
copies. As built drawings for all types of control panels, wiring diagram including filed wiring
diagram including field wiring, plus Electro-Mechanical manuals to be included.

2. Building permit drawings collected from Municipality, demarcation certificate issued by

Municipality.

3. Guarantees and warrantees submitted by the suppliers as specified with back to back
guarantees that issued by the Contractor himself on the same (e.g. Anti-termite, water proofing,
internal/external painting, aluminum, glazing A/C, etc.)

4. Contact personal and addresses/ phone numbers of materials suppliers/ sub-contractors

including for maintenance team. This includes suppliers and manufacturers recommendation
for carrying out future routine maintenance.

5. Quality control-check lists (e.g. back filling, concrete cast, painting etc.), which have been
signed during construction by both the Contractor and Consultant.

6. Mains power connection.

7. Chilled water flushing and chemical treatment of chilled water system plus air balancing.

8. Submittal of testing and commission reports including for A/C equipment & Control panels.
Testing & commissioning to be done for all E & M items conducted by a third party (if so
specified and applicable) and witnessed by the Engineer.

9. Extension of alarms including wiring from A/C equipment & control panels, fire alarm panel,
Generator / LV room to equipment room or as directed.

The contractor shall be liable for carrying out periodical maintenance for all Electro-Mechanical
installations (as recommended by the suppliers/ sub-contractors) in addition to his attendance to snags,
until the End of Maintenance certificate is issued.

1.31 Safety regulations

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

1.32 Accidents

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 10
 VOLUME III
(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

1.33 Mobilization period-contractor’s work

The Contractor shall perform the following works as described below during the mobilization period.
Permission to commence permanent works will not be given until the following is completed. The
items listed are intended to be the minimum required. The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to
carry out additional work within the mobilization period.

Submission for Approval:

1. Design calculation of structural steel for Showroom building and workshop buildings proposed
to the consultant within 2 weeks from the issuance of LOI. Subsequently and after obtaining the
consultant’s approval, drawings will be submitted to Municipality for building permit.
2. Performance bond bank guarantee
3. Insurance's including third party
4. Program of Works (To be made by using software - made available at site P.C-the file is to be
submitted)
5. Plan of Contractors temporary works
6. List of materials to be used in near future for the work
7. List of sub-contractors and suppliers.
8. No objection certificates from Client, Water, Electricity Department and Drainage Department
and relevant authorities.
9. Concrete mix design and ready mix supplier
10. Material ordering schedule giving date of ordering and expected time of delivery
11. Cash flow chart
12. Site lay out showing the site arrangements
13. List of contractor staff

Work to be performed:

1. Site Handing over

2. Site hoarding and security gate.
3. Provide temporary offices.
4. Provide temporary water, electricity and telephone.
5. Erect sign board for the project.
6. Bring to the site plant and equipment for the permanent works.
7. Acquisition of Building Permit.
8. Soil investigation.

The above works shall be performed only if approved by the Engineer.

1.34 Site staff

Site staff should have minimum experience and site supervision timing as follows:
1. Civil Works
1.1. Project Manager (15 years of experience) - Full time
1.2. Site supervisor (7 years) - Full time
1.3. Foreman, charge hand (7 years) - Full time
2. MEP works
2.1. Project coordinator (10 years of experience) - Part time.
2.2. Electrical Engr. (7 years of experience) - Part time
2.3. Mechanical Engr. (7 years of experience) - Part time
2.4. Electrical & Mechanical Foreman/ Charge hand- Full time.
3. Miscellaneous
3.1. Safety Officer (7 years of experience) - Full time.
3.2. Quality Control Officer (7 years of experience) - Part time.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 11
 VOLUME III

2. Piling Works

NOT APPLICABLE

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 12
 VOLUME III

3. Excavation and Earthworks

3.1 NATURE OF SOIL

The Contractor has to visit the Site and clear for himself , the actual average ground level comparedto
the road level & the condition of the surface of the ground and the of sub strata likely to be encountered
in the excavation of the proposed development.

The methods of excavation which the Contractor desires to use shall be at the sole discretion of the
Contractor. The explosives may be used only with the Engineers written consent.

The final 6" depth of all excavations shall be taken out by hand unless allowed by the Engineerotherwise
and the bottom levelled and rammed immediately prior to placing concrete.

3.2 ORIGINAL LEVELS

A survey of the existing site shall be made and the results marked on drawing and the same to be
submitted to the Engineer before commencement of the work.

3.3 SITE INVESTIGATION REPORT

The Contractor shall carry out his own site investigation comprising at least 3 boreholes to a depth of
15 m each to confirm the soil report result as per the instructions of the Engineer. No claim from the
Contractor shall be considered if alternative tests are required during the Contract.

3.4 EXCAVATION

The Contractor shall perform all excavation as required for all work under this contract as indicated on
the Drawing. Excavation shall be carried out in all material and by whatever means are necessary
accurately to the lines and levels shown on the Drawings, or as ordered by the Engineer.

No blasting of any kind will be permitted without the written permission of the Engineer.

Excavation shall extend a sufficient distance from walls, footings, etc. to allow space for placing and
removing shoring, form work and for performing all work. Excavation occasioned by slips falls, wash-
ins etc., shall be made good at the Contractor's expense with mass concrete or approved filling
materials as ordered by the Engineer's Representative.

3.5 FINISH OF EXCAVATION AND INSPECTION

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

3.6 REMOVAL OF WATER

The excavations shall at all times be kept free from storm water, percolating water or subsoil water by
any means necessary. The contractor shall provide, maintain and clear away on completion any
equipment necessary together with temporary drains and the like. Under no circumstances shall
concrete be poured, fill placed, pipes laid installed in excavations containing water.

3.7 SHEETING AND SHORING (IF APPLICABLE)

Sheeting and shoring shall be provided at excavations to ensure complete safety against collapse of
soil at sides of excavations, to provide protection of workmen and to prevent damage to adjacent
property, structures, paving and utilities. Alternatively 1m x 1m steps must be made on all sides.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 13
 VOLUME III

3.8 STORAGE AND DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

3.9 TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR UTILITIES.

Utilities shall generally be installed in open cut trenches except that short connections may be tunneled
if in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative, the pipe or duct can be safely and properly installed
and backfilling can be properly placed and compacted in such tunneled section.

3.10 FILLING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION

The excavated material; arising from all excavations declared by the Engineer's Representative to be
suitable for fill is to be used as filling. All other filling material shall be imported.

The imported filling material shall be sand, road base and or subkha and obtained from an approved
source in accordance with the latest instructions issued by the Department of Municipalities regarding
the mining of material for filling. Imported filing material shall contain no perishable or organic rubbish
and no particle in excess of 150mm in diameter. The maximum dry density of the material shall be
not less than 1600 kg/m3.

Filling and backfilling shall be placed in layers not exceeding 200mm thick ( after compaction). Each
layer shall be uniformly spread and shall be moistened or dried by aeration when required to ensure
the optimum water content and shall be compacted uniformly by hand or machine methods to achieve
specified density as follows:

Filling under, footings: At least 98% maximum dry density

Water & holding tanks, concrete beds,
sidewalks and other bearing situation
Fill within 300mm. measured horizontally from At least 95% maximum dry density
foundation of wall, retaining walls
edges of footings, and other below-grade
Vertical surfaces.

When machine compacted, compaction shall be done by means of a 6 ton smooth wheeled roller.

Testing to determine the density of soil shall be by means of ASSHTO Standard

Method of Test T147 or in accordance with BS1377: 1975. The number of density tests per layer
shall be as instructed by the Engineer's Representative.

Field control density tests shall be made by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer's
Representative to determine the degree of compaction being obtained by field compaction procedures
during construction. Each lift of material placed by the Contractor shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer’s Representative. No material shall be placed on prepared subgrade, without the prior
acceptance of the subgrade by the Engineer's Representative. Subgrade shall be compacted
throughout to 98% of maximum density at optimum moisture content.

Compact fill shall consist of approved materials obtained either from excavations or from other
approved sources. Compacted fill shall comprise suitable granular materials well graded and shall not
include perishable matter or an excess of fines and should give a dense fill layer. The material shall
be free of organic matter and have the following properties.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 14
 VOLUME III

 Minimum Soaked CBR of 15% when the material is compacted to 95% of the maximum dry
density.
 Insitu CBR of 10% when the compacted layer is field tested at site.
 Liquid Limit not more that 35% and plasticity index not more than 60%
 Linear Shrinkage not exceeding 3%
 Water Soluble Salts not more than 5% by weight of dry material.
 Organic Materials on organic material permissible
 Maximum Particle Size not more than 75% mm: max passing seive No.200< 30%
 Lab CBR Tests as determined by Test 16, BS 1377.
 Field Density Test as determined by Test 15B of BS 1377.
 Linear Shrinkage test as determined by AASHTO T92
 Organic Matter Test as determined by BS 1377
 Maximum Dry Density at Optimum Moisture Content as determined by Test 13,
 BS 1377.
 Liquid limit as determined by BS 1377; 1975: 2.2 (Test 2 A: Preferred method using the cone
penetrometer)
 Plasticity Index as determined by BS 1377: 1975 2.4
 Water Soluble Salt as determined by BS 812 Part 117.
 Dune sand will not be accepted as suitable material irrespective of its meeting the suitable fill
requirements. Except for use in confined areas which are to be agreed and approved by the
Engineer. Before approving the source of fill material tests will be performed to ascertain that
the material complies with the above minimum requirements. Subsequently if different
material is to be used other than the approved one, new tests shall be carried out.

Tests for Density and Compaction

The following gives the minimum testing required for fill. Additional or more frequent tests may be
required if materials vary or workmanship is consistent:

 Laboratory tests for MDD, optimum moisture contents, for each layer.
 Field density and moisture contents, insitu CBR, for each layer as required by the Engineer.
 The areas shall be rejected if the resulting test results do not satisfy specified requirements.

3.11 DISPOSITION OF EXISTING UTILITIES

Before commencing any construction work, the Contractor shall obtain from the various utilities
Departments, Companies or Employer the location of any existing utilities on the Site. Active utilities on
the Site shall be carefully protected from damage, relocated or removed as required by the work. When
an active utility line is exposed during construction, its location and elevation shall be plotted on the
Record Drawings and both the Engineer's Representative and the utility owner notified in writing.

Inactive or abandoned utilities encountered during construction operations shall be removed, plugged
or capped. The locations of such utility shall be noted on the Record Drawings and reported in writing
to the Engineer's Representative.

Active utility lines damaged during the course of construction operations shall be restored or replaced
as determined by the Engineer's Representative at the Contractor's expense. Immediately after the
active utility line is damaged the Contractor shall notify the Engineer's Representative and the utility
owners by telephone and in writing.

3.12 SAFETY OF ADJOINING EXISTING BUILDINGS/STRUCTURES

The contractor shall take all necessary precautions during the excavation for the Works, particularly
those excavation, which are adjoining existing buildings/structures and shall protect such buildings/
structures from the damage or collapse by means of temporary or permanent shoring, strutting, sheet
or excavation in short lengths and/or other methods as he deems fit. Also, he shall properly support all
foundations, trenches, walls, floors, etc. affecting the safety of the adjoining existing
buildings/structures.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 15
 VOLUME III

The Contractor shall alter, adopt and maintain all such works described above for the whole period of
the contract and shall finally clear away and make good all damages done. The Contractor shall
indemnify the Employer in respect of all claims, demands, proceedings, damages, costs, charges and
expenses whatsoever arising out of or in relation to any such matters in so far as the Contractor is
responsible under this Clause.

3.13 DEWATERING (if applicable)

Where the excavation level is below the natural water table and it is necessary to pump continuously
from the excavation or to install a specialist form of dewatering equipment around the perimeter of the
site or excavation, the Contractor will be responsible for ensuring the safety and stability of all adjoining
structures and services or utilities above or below ground level. It will also be the responsibility of the
Contractor to arrange the equipment, install and ensure that the excavation and subsequent
construction is carried out in dry conditions.

Continuous or permanent dewatering of the excavation or site may not be undertaken without the written
approval of the Engineer. The methods employed shall also comply with Codes of practice and local
authority requirements.

The water pumped from the excavations or well points shall be pumped to disposal points or sumpsas
approved by the Engineer and/ or Local Authority and if so required be passed through settling tanks
before disposal. Under no circumstances water will be disposed of in the Municipality's sewer systems.

3.14 SITE CLEARANCE

All areas of the Site specified for clearance or from which material is to be excavated or upon which
filing is to be deposited shall be cleared of all obstructions, existing structures and the like and bushes,
hedges, trees and the like. Material so cleared shall be removed from Site by the contractor.

3.15 DEMOLITIONS (EXISTING BOUNDARY WALL AND ROADS)

Demolition will be done by the contractor should include complete demolition with the removal of
foundation and the proper termination of all services as required by the Drawings including the removal
and disposal of all demolished materials, the demolition work shall be executed in a systematic manner.
Demolition operations and the removal of debris shall be carried out to ensure minimum interference
with roads, streets, footpaths and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.

Damage caused to adjacent facilities by demolishing operations shall be repaired by the Contractor at
his own expense. The Contractor shall arrange and pay for the disconnecting, removing and capping
of utility services, notify those affected including utility agency in advance and obtain written approval
before commencing work.

3.16 BLINDING

The Contractor shall lay blinding over excavated surface where as directed after inspection of the
excavations by the Engineer. Sand blinding shall be clean sand obtained form an approved source,
concrete blinding shall be as specified in "Concrete Work" Section and on the drawings.

The surface of the blinding shall be floated smooth to receive the water proofing.

3.17 POLYTHENE SHEETING

Cover the whole of the area under the blinding concrete (P.C.C) and elsewhere as shown on the
drawings and directed by the Engineer with polythene sheeting. The polythene sheet shall be of1000
gauge, with nominal weight 0.92 kg \m2 manufactured by a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.

The polythene sheet shall be taken 150 mm above the level of concrete on vertical faces.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 16
 VOLUME III

3.18 EPOXY BASE TREATMENT / PROTECTION

Unless otherwise indicated, all surfaces of block work below ground level shall be painted with 2 coats
of Epoxy base paint from Sika to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

3.19 PROTECTIVE MEMBRANE TO U/G REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES

Unless otherwise indicated, horizontal surface to receive concrete foundation are to be waterproofed
using partially bonded PVC membrane system suitable damproofing from SIKA range with fixation
details and back-up injection system as recommended by the membrane manufacturer SIKA
(Specification to be provided by SIKA)

3.20 DEPTH OF FOUNDATIONS

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 17
 VOLUME III

4. Concrete Works
4.1 SUMMARY

This section specifies all concrete batching, and delivery and includes, but is not limited to the following:

1. General Requirements
2. Submittals and samples
3. Method Statements
4. Concrete Materials, storage and testing requirements
5. Concrete grades
6. Lab trials
7. Plant trials
8. Concrete mixing
9. Routine testing frequency
10. Hot weather concreting
11. Non-compliant concrete

4.2 REFERENCES

Product manufacture, testing and installation shall comply with the following references unless
otherwise stated in the specification or otherwise approved by the Engineer.

1. ASTM C40 Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete
2. ASTM C88 Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulphate or
Magnesium Sulphate.
3. ASTM C94 Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
4. ASTM C109 Test method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
(Using 2inch or 50mm cube specimens)
5. ASTM C123 Test Method for Lightweight Pieces in Aggregate
6. ASTM C127 Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
7. ASTM C128 Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
8. ASTM C131 Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small Size Coarse Aggregate
by Abrasion and impact in the Los Angeles Machine
9. ASTM C138 Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
10. ASTM C142 Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates
11. ASTM C150 Specification for Portland Cement
12. ASTM C157 Test method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic – Cement Mortar and
Concrete
13. ASTM C191 Test Method for Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat Needle
14. ASTM C227 Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate
Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method).
15. ASTM C232 Test Methods for Bleeding of Concrete
16. ASTM C260 Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
17. ASTM C289 Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical
Method)
18. ASTM C494 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
19. ASTM C511 Specification for Moist Cabinets, Moist Rooms and Water Storage Tanks
Used in the Testing of Hydraulic Cements and Concretes
20. ASTM C1017 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete
21. ASTM C1064 Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland Cement Concrete
22. ASTM C1202 Test Method For Electrical Indication of Concrete’s Ability to Resist Chloride
Ion Penetration.
23. ASTM D512 Test Methods for Chloride in Water
24. ASTM D513 Test Methods for Total and Dissolved Carbon Dioxide in Water
25. ASTM D516 - Test Method for Sulphate Ion in Water
26. ASTM D1888 Test Method for Particulate and dissolved Matter, Solids, or Residue in Water
27. ASTM D2419 Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate.
28. ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 18
 VOLUME III

29. ACI 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 19
 VOLUME III

30. BS 12 Portland cement

31. BS 812 Testing aggregates
32. BS 882 Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
33. BS 1881 Methods of testing concrete
34. BS 3148 Water for making concrete (including notes on the suitability of the water)
35. BS 4027 Sulphate-resisting Portland cement
36. BS 4408 Recommendations for non-destructive methods of test for concrete
37. BS 4550 Methods of testing cement
38. BS 5075 Concrete admixtures
39. BS 5328 Part 1 Guide to specifying concrete
40. BS 5328 Part 2 Methods for specifying concrete mixers
41. BS 5328 Part 3 Specification for the procedures to be used in producing and transporting
concrete
42. BS 5328 Part 4 Specification for the procedures to be used in sampling, testing and assessing
compliance of concrete
43. BS 6089 Assessment of concrete strength in existing structures
44. BS 6100 Glossary of building and civil engineering terms
45. BS 6699 Ground Granulated Blast furnace Slag
46. BS 8110 Structural use of concrete
47. CSTR No. 11 Concrete Society Technical Report No. 11
48. DIN 1048 Test methods for concrete
49. ISO 9000 Quality management and quality assurance standards

4.3 DEFINITIONS

The following definitions shall pertain to words or phrases as utilized in this section.

1. “Water/Cement Ratio” shall mean the ratio between the total weight of water in the concrete
(less the water absorbed by the aggregate) and the weight of cement (or cementitious
materials), expressed as a decimal fraction.
2. “Admixtures” shall mean a material other than water, aggregate, cementitious materials or
fibre reinforcement, used as an ingredient of concrete or mortar.
3. “Hot Weather” shall mean when the shade temperature is above 400C on a rising
thermometer or 430C on a falling thermometer.
4. “Coarse Aggregate” shall be considered as that size passing a 28mm sieve and
predominately retained on a 5mm sieve.
5. “Fine Aggregate” shall be considered as that size predominately passing a 5mm sieve and
predominately retained on a 0.075mm size.
6. “OPC” shall mean ordinary Portland cement.
7. “SRC” shall mean sulphate resisting Portland cement.
8. “MSRC” shall mean moderate sulphate resisting Portland cement.
9. “MS” shall mean Microsilica.
10. “Gap-graded aggregate” shall mean graded aggregate without one or more of the
intermediate sizes.
11. “Single-size aggregate” shall mean aggregates containing a major proportion of particles of
one size.
12. “Characteristic Strength” shall mean that value of strength below which 5% of all strength
measurements are expected to fall.
13. “Target Mean Strength” shall mean the specified strength plus the margin.
14. “Margin” shall mean the difference between the specified strength and the target mean
strength.
15. “Acceptable or accepted” shall mean acceptable or accepted by the Engineer.
16. “Approval or Approved” shall mean approval from the Engineer or approved by the Engineer.
17. “All-in” aggregate shall mean the materials composed of a mixture of coarse aggregate and
fine aggregate.

4.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Concrete shall be batched only with approved materials, approved mix designs, and at
approved facilities.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 20
 VOLUME III

2. The Contractor shall define the method of design of the mix, by reference to a recognised
published design method. The design method shall be approved by the Engineer.
3. Plant trials shall be carried out for each grade and type of concrete in the contract, unless
approved otherwise by the Engineer.
4. Aggregate proportions shall be based on measured and not assumed relative densities.
5. If requested by the Engineer, concrete mix designs which include an admixture shall be
prepared and tested both with and without the admixture to give a clear indication of its
effects on the physical characteristics of the mix.
6. Results of the trial mixes must demonstrate that the proposed mix complies with the strength,
workability and durability requirements of this specification.

4.5 SUBMITTALS

1. Product Data, test results and other information as required to prove compliance with the
specification shall be submitted for approval according to Section on at least the following
products.

1.1. Cement

 Recent independent test results acceptable to the Engineer confirming

compliance with the specified requirements and referenced standards.
 Manufacturer's certificates shall also be supplied with each consignment of
cement certifying compliance with the relevant standard.

1.1. Aggregates

 Recent independent test results acceptable to the Engineer confirming

compliance with the specified requirements and referenced standards.
 Full details of the proposed sources of aggregates.

1.2. Admixtures

 Manufacturer’s technical specifications and recommendations.

 Recent trial results acceptable to the Engineer illustrating the efficiency of the
product for its particular application.

1.3. Concrete Mix design with at least the following information:

 Type of cement
 Cement content
 Max. aggregate size
 Combined grading curve
 Quantities of all individual materials
 Name of admixture
 Target slump (at discharge)
 Details to calculate W/C ratio
 Compressive strength
 Hardened density
 SO3 and Cl contents
 Slump profile
 Target unit weight
 Target temperature

2. Samples of the following shall be submitted.

2.1. Cement

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 21
 VOLUME III

 Provide cement samples from each consignment delivered to the site as required
by the Engineer for testing.
 Samples shall be taken in the presence of the Engineer’s Representative.

2.2. Aggregates

 Provide samples of both fine and coarse aggregates for testing at least three
weeks prior to beginning deliveries to the site and at regular intervals as required
by the Engineer.
 Samples shall be taken in the presence of the Engineer’s Representative.

2.3. Water

 Provide samples of water proposed for concreting works.

 Samples shall be taken in the presence of the Engineer’s Representative.

2.4. Admixture

 As requested by the Engineer.

3. Method Statements

3.1. The Contractor shall submit a method statement according to section for concrete
batching and delivery which shall include at least the following details:

 Type of plant proposed.

 Layout of concrete production facility.
 Proposed method of organisation of the concrete production facility.
 Quality control procedures for concrete and concrete materials.
 Batching and Transport of concrete.

4.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1. Delivery

1.1. Cement

 Deliver by bulk or in the original sealed containers or bags, bearing the manufacturer's
name, cement type and date of manufacture, in batches not exceeding 100 tonnes.

1.2. Ready-mixed Concrete

 Each load shall be accompanied by a computer printout listing items in paragraph.

2. Storage

2.1. Cement

 Immediately upon arrival at the Site, cement shall be stored in:

o Silos designed for this purpose, or

o Dry, weather-tight and properly ventilated structures with floors raised 450mm
above ground level with adequate provision to prevent absorption of moisture.
o Each silo shall be labelled to show the type and source of cement.
o Separate silo shall be provided for each type of cement.

 Cement delivered to the Site in drums or bags provided by the supplier or manufacturer
shall be stored in the drums or bags until used in the Works.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 22
 VOLUME III

o Any cement in drums or bags which have been opened shall be used
immediately.
o In no case shall bagged cement be stored in stacks more than eight bags high.
o A free passage of at least one meter shall be left between the cement and the
side walls of the structure.

 Where site limitations preclude the storage of cement on site, cement shall be stored
at a central location and shall be delivered daily as required to specific job sites.

 Different types of cement shall be kept in clearly marked separate storage facilities.

 The Contractor shall use the consignments in the order in which they are received.

 All storage facilities shall be subject to approval by the Engineer and shall be such as
to permit easy access for inspection and identification.

 Contractor shall provide weighing machines which shall be kept permanently in each
shed for checking the weight of the bags or barrels of cement.

 The Engineer shall have access at all times to the cement storage sheds.

 During transport and storage, the cement shall be fully protected from all adverse
weather elements.

 Do not use cement more than 4 weeks old for silo stored cement and 6 weeks for
bagged cement unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

 Any consignment of cement not used within two months from the date of manufacture
or cement which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is of doubtful quality shall not be used
in the work until it has been retested as directed by the Engineer and shown to comply
in all respects with the relevant standard of manufacture.

2.2. Aggregates

 Contractor shall provide means of storing the aggregates at each point where concrete
is made such that:

o Each nominal size of coarse aggregates and fine aggregate shall be kept
separated at all times
o Contamination of the aggregates by the ground or other foreign matter shall
be effectively prevented at all times.
o Each heap of aggregate shall be capable of draining freely.
o Storage shall be such as to minimize segregation.
o Stockpiles shall be on hard and clean surfaces with not more than 5% slope
and shall be shaded from direct sunlight.
o Each bin shall be labelled displaying the nominal size and source of
aggregate.

 Coarse aggregates shall be stockpiled in at least two of the following nominal sizes.

o 20mm, 10mm.

2.3. Admixture

 Store in an enclosed container, recommended by the manufacturer and protected from

extremes of heat by shading.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 23
 VOLUME III

 All tanks shall be fitted with a circulating pump which shall be operated daily.

 All tanks shall be indelibly marked for easy identification of its contents.

2.4. Water

 Store in clean covered tanks to prevent contamination.

 The chilled water storage tank shall be insulated.

2.5. Reinforcement

 The reinforcement should be stored and properly covered clear to the ground and
should be protected from contamination by other materials.

4.7 CONCRETE MIX

A. Concrete shall comply with the following requirements unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.

Table 1: GRADES OF CONCRETE

Concrete Nominal Size Min. Cementitious Max. W/C Cube Strength At 28 Days
Grade Of Agg. mm Content kg/m3 Ratio Target Mean Specified Compressive
Strength N/mm2 Strength N/mm2
C 50 20 400 0.38 55 50
C 40 20 375 0.38 45 40
C 20 20 220 0.50 25 30

Notes

 Where adequate workability is difficult to obtain at the maximum water/cement ratio allowed,
the use of plasticizers or water-reducing admixtures shall be utilized at no additional cost to
the Client
 Cementitious contents in excess of 450kg/m3 shall not be used, unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer.
 Concrete mix with 10mm nominal size aggregate shall be used in congested areas at the
direction of the Engineer.

Table 2: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF CONCRETE

Srl. Tests Test Method Specification Limit
1. Temperature (at placement) ASTM 1064 32°C Max.

2. Slump mm (at placement) BS 1881: Part 102 C50TB: 150 ± 25

C50: 150 ± 25
C40: 150 ± 25
C20: 125 ± 25
3. Bleeding (C40 & C50) ASTM C232 1.0% Max.

4. Bleeding (C50TB) ASTM C232 0.5% Max.

5. Unit Weight (wet) ASTM C138 ± 35 kg/m³

6. Compressive strength BS 1881: Part 116 See Table 1

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 24
 VOLUME III

Srl. Tests Test Method Specification Limit

7. Hardened Density BS 1881: Part 114 Not applicable

8. Chlorides (as Cl) by weight of BS1881: Part 124 For reinforced concrete only
cementitious material 0.30% Max.
If made with OPC/MSRC 0.15% Max.
If made with SRC
9. Sulphates (SO3) by weight of BS 1881: Part 124 4.0% Max. (All concrete)
cementitious material

Notes

 For concrete grade C20, only requirements of No. 2, 4 and 5 shall apply, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer.
 A higher slump may be permitted by the Engineer if super plasticizer is added.
 Average unit weight shall be established during plant trials.
 Values for compressive strength are at 28 days.

B. Design of Concrete Mixes

 At the commencement of the Works the Contractor shall design a mix for each grade of
concrete listed in Table 1 that is required to be built into the Works.
 Mix designs shall be proportioned according to a recognized standard as approved by the
Engineer.
 Submit full details of the mix designs to the Engineer for his approval.
 Each mix design shall be such that:

o The nominal size of aggregate shall be as specified in Table 1.

o Combined aggregate grading shall be continuous (not gap graded).
o Aggregate quantity shall be calculated by weight.
o Mixes shall be designed to produce a target mean strength of not less than that
specified in Table 1.
o The combined grading (all-in) of the aggregate shall comply with table 5 of this
Specification for 20mm and 10mm nominal size.
o All aggregates except dune sand shall be from the same source, unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.

4.8 CEMENT

A. Unless noted otherwise, OPC shall be utilized for grades C40 and C50 concrete.
Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) shall conform to BS 12 or ASTM C150 Type I.

B. Unless otherwise noted, SRC shall be utilized for grade C20 concrete.
Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement (SRC) shall conform to BS 4027 or ASTM C150 Type V.

C. If required, Moderate Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement (MSRC) shall conform to ASTM
C150 Type II.

D. Any cement which is, in the opinion of the Engineer, unsuitable for use in the Works shall be
rejected and the Contractor shall promptly remove such cement from the Site.

4.9 Ground granulated blast furnace slag

A. GGBS shall comply with BS 6699, in addition to the following requirements, unless other wise
approved by the Engineer.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 25
 VOLUME III

1. Raw material (slag) is limited to one source. Slag supplied or blended from several
different plants or steel mills will not be accepted unless approved by the engineer.
2. GGBS shall be supplied to the concrete batching plant in bulk powder form.
a. Interground slag cements shall not be used.

b. Preblended slag cements shall not be used.

4.10 Micro silica

A. Microsilica shall comply with an internationally recognized standard, in addition to the

following requirements, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

1. Raw material (Microsilica) is limited to one source. Microsilica supplied by more than
one vendor will not be accepted, unless approved by the Engineer.

2. Microsilica shall be supplied to the concrete batching plant in bulk powder form.

4.11 AGGREGATES

1. Aggregates shall meet the requirements of Table 3 along with the following general
requirements, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

 Aggregates shall consist of hard, durable, uncoated particles containing no harmful

material in quantities sufficient to adversely affect the concrete or reinforcing steel.

 The aggregates used in the permanent work shall be obtained only from the sources
approved by the Engineer.

 Aggregates shall comply with the requirements of BS 882 except as modified

hereunder and if necessary, shall be washed clean with potable water, to comply with
these requirements.

 Contractor shall provide all data as specified in Appendix A of BS 882.

 Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that the aggregates to be supplied will not give
rise to an alkali reaction with the cement.

 Samples of aggregates will be tested initially and at intervals during construction of

the works.

o The contractor shall provide the necessary equipment and labour for all
sampling.

o If required by the Engineer, any or all tests shall be carried out in an

approved independent laboratory and the contractor shall bear all the
expenses.

 Sampling of aggregates shall be carried out in accordance with the applicable

Sections of BS 812.

 Frequency of routine testing of aggregates shall be in accordance with Table 4.

 Mineralogical tests are to be carried out as and when directed by the Engineer.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 26
 VOLUME III

 Fine aggregate shall be naturally occurring uncrushed sand, crushed sand or a blend
of the two.

o The use of clean dune sand, blended with coarser sand may be permitted if it
meets the applicable specification requirements (except grading).
o Beach sand shall not be permitted for use in concrete mixes.
o Combined or individual fine aggregate gradation shall be in accordance with
Zone 1 or Zone 2 of Table 4 of this Specification.
o The fineness modulus of fine aggregate shall be 2.4 – 3.2.
o The fineness modules shall not vary by more than 0.2 from the value of the
representative sample used in the mix design.

 Coarse aggregates shall be single sized crushed limestone or single sized crushed,
with the exception of Class C50TB concrete, where the only aggregates acceptable
shall be single sized crushed.

o The grading of coarse aggregate shall be in accordance with Table 3 of this

Specification.
o Nominal sizes to be blended together shall be 20mm and 10mm, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
o In no case should the maximum size of aggregate be larger than one-fifth the
narrowest dimension between sides of the form, one-third of the thickness of
slabs or toppings or larger than three-fourths the minimum clear spacing
between reinforcing bars.
o The variation of grading on any sieves between the approved samples and
subsequent consignments of single sized aggregate shall not exceed 8% by
weight.
 If for any reason, grading is changed beyond these limits and cannot
be corrected for reasons beyond the control of the Contractor, the
Engineer may request a new concrete mix design or modification to
the approved mix proportions.

 Combined Aggregate

o Approved coarse aggregate and fine aggregate in each batch shall be

combined in proportions to meet the specified grading in Table 5 of this
Specification
o In no case shall materials passing the 0.075 mm sieve exceed 3.0% for
gravel aggregate or 7.0% for crushed rock by weight of the combined
aggregate.
o Changes from one gradation to another shall not be made during progress of
the work, unless approved by the Engineer.
o Crushed and uncrushed aggregates, except dune sand, shall be mixed only if
approved by the Engineer.
o During production the combined grading (all-in aggregates) shall not vary by
more than 3% from the approved grading.

TABLE 3: SPECIFICATION LIMIT OF COARSE AGGREGATE

Sieve Size 20mm 10mm

mm Nominal Size Nominal Size
28.0 100 --
20.0 85 – 100 --

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 27
 VOLUME III

14.0 -- 100
10.0 0 – 25 85 – 100
5.0 0–5 0 – 25
2.36 -- 0-5

TABLE 4: SPECIFICATION LIMIT OF FINE AGGREGATE

Zone 1 Zone 2
Sieve Size
(Percentage by Mass (Percentage by Mass
mm passing BS Sieve) passing BS Sieve)
10.0 100 100
5.0 90 – 100 90 – 100
2.36 60 – 100 65 – 100
1.18 30 – 90 45 – 100
0.600 15 – 54 25 – 80
0.300 5 – 40 5 – 48
0.150 0 – 15 0 - 15

TABLE 5: SPECIFICATION LIMIT OF ALL-IN AGGREGATE

20mm Nominal Size 10mm Nominal Size

Sieve Size
(Percentage by Mass (Percentage by Mass
mm passing BS Sieve) passing BS Sieve)
28.0 100 --
20.0 95 – 100 --
14.0 -- 100
10.0 -- 95 – 100
5.0 35 – 55 30 – 65
2.36 -- 20 - 50
1.18 -- 15 – 40
0.600 10 – 35 10 – 30
0.300 5 – 15
0.150 0–8* 0-8
* Increase to 10% for crushed rock fines

TABLE 6: CONCRETE AGGREGATES

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 28
 VOLUME III

Item Test Methods Permissible Limits

Requirement
No. BS 812 ASTM FINE COARSE

Table
BS 8824 of Table
BS 8823 of
1. Part 103 (wet)
Grading

Part 103 (wet)

2. Material < 0.075 mm
max. 3% max. 1%

2.1. Natural / Crushed

gravel max. 7% max. 1%

2.2. Crushed rock

D2419 min. 75%
3. Sand Equivalent Valve
C142 max. 1% max. 1%
4. Clay Lumps and
Friable Particles C123 max. 0.5% max.0.5%

5. Light Weight Pieces

C40 Refer note 1 NA

6. Organic Impurities
C128/C127 max. 2.3% max. 2%

7. Water Absorption
C128/C127 min. 2.6 min. 2.6
8. Specific Gravity (app.)
C128/C127 Min. 2.8 Min. 2.8

8.1. SG for Gabbro

Part 105.1 NA max. 25%
9. Flakiness Index
Part 105.2 NA max. 30%
10. Elongation Index
Part 117
11. Acid Soluble Chlorides max.
max. 0.03% 0.011%
Appendix C
12. Concrete with : SRC
max. 0.05% max. 0.02%

13. Other concrete

Part 118 max. 0.3% max. 0.3%

14. Acid Soluble Sulphates

C88 max. 12% max. 12%

15. Soundness (MgSo4),

after 5 cycles Part 112 NA max. 30%

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 29
 VOLUME III

16. Impact Value

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 30
 VOLUME III

Item Test Methods Permissible Limits

Requirement BS 812 ASTM FINE COARSE
No.

17. C131 NA max. 30%

Loss Angeles Abrasion
Innocuous Innocuous
Potential Reactivity :
(Refer note 2) C289
18. Of Aggregates, 6 month expansion
Chemical Method Of C227 0.10% max.
Cement-Aggregate
Combination
BS1881: Part
19. Aggregate drying 0.075%
120
shrinkage

Note 1: Colour of supernatant liquid shall be lighter than standard colour solution.

Note 2: Aggregates may initially be assessed for its reactivity in accordance with ASTM C289 and
if potential reactivity is indicated, then mortar bar tests in accordance with ASTM C227
shall be carried out.

Note 3: Properties of aggregates specified in Table 3 shall be for aggregates from individual
sources or individual stock piles.

TABLE 7: FREQUENCY OF ROUTINE TESTS ON AGGREGATES

Item
Requirement Test Method Test Frequency
No.
1. Grading BS 812 : Part 103.1 Daily

2. Material finer than 0.075 mm BS 812 : Part 103.1 Daily

3. Sand Equivalent Valve ASTM D2419 Daily

4. Clay lumps and Friable Particles ASTM C 142 Only if requested by

Engineer
5. Organic Impurities ASTM C 40 Only if requested by
Engineer
6. Water Absorption ASTM C128/C127 Monthly

7. Specific Gravity ASTM C128/C127 Monthly

8. Elongation and flakiness indices BS 812 : Part 105.1 Weekly

& 105.2
9. Acid Soluble Chlorides, (Cl) BS 812 : Part 117, Only if requested by
Quantitative (only) Appendix C Engineer
10. Acid Soluble Sulphates, S03 BS 812 : Part 118 Only if requested by
Engineer
11. Soundness (Mg S04), after 5 cycles ASTM C88 Every Three months

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 31
 VOLUME III

Item
Requirement Test Method Test Frequency
No.
12. Aggregate impact value BS 812 : Parts 111 Every Three months

13. Los Angeles Abrasion ASTM C 131 Every Three months

14. Moisture content in sand - by Moisture Twice daily

testor (speedy)
15. Potential Reactivity : At the start of the
Of aggregates ASTM C289/ project and whenever
Of cement aggregate ASTM C227 there is a change in
combination the source of supply.
16. Light weight pieces ASTM C123 Only if requested by
the Engineer.
17. Aggregate drying shrinkage BS1881: Part 120 At the start of the
project and whenever
there is a change in
the source of supply.

Note 1 The above tests shall be carried out at the specified frequency at an approved laboratory
at the contractor’s expense.

Note 2 The above frequencies may be reduced at the Engineer’s discretion.

4.12 WATER

A. Water used for concrete-mixes and washing of equipment shall be potable water and shall
comply with the requirements of BS 3148, unless otherwise stated herein or in Table 5.

B. The pH of water used in concrete work shall be in the range of 7 – 9.

C. Ice if used shall be flake ice and shall be the product of frozen water which complies with the
acceptance criteria of Table 8, unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer.

D. Every effort should be made to protect water pipes and tanks from the sun, by burying, shading,
insulation and/or painting white.

E. Contractor shall make his own arrangements and obtain approval for the supply of water.

F. Whenever required to do so by the Engineer, the Contractor shall take samples of the water
being used for mixing concrete and test them for quality as directed by the Engineer.

G. No source of water shall be used unless approved by the Engineer.

TABLE 8: CHEMICAL LIMITATIONS FOR MIXING WATER

Max. Concentration Test Method Limit, mg/l

1. Chloride (as CI) ASTM D512 250
2. Sulphates ASTM D516 350
3. Alkali carbonates and bicarbonates ASTM D513 500
4. Total dissolved ions, including 1, 2 & 3 above ASTM D1888 2000

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 32
 VOLUME III

4.13 ADMIXTURES

A. Admixtures shall comply with one of the following standards, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
 ASTM C 494, ASTM C260, ASTM C1017 or BS 5075: as applicable.
o The Contractor shall provide at least the following technical data for each type
of admixture.
 Solid content.
 Specific gravity.
 The typical dosage and the effects of under dosage and over dosage.
 The generic type(s) of the main active constituent(s) in the admixture.
 Whether or not the admixture contains chloride.
 Whether or not the admixture leads to the entrainment of air when used
at the proposed dosage.
 Where more than one admixture is used simultaneously in the same
concrete, details shall be provided on their interaction and
compatibility.

2. The methods of use and the quantities of admixture used shall be subject to the Engineer’s
approval and shall in no way limit the Contractor’s obligations under the contract to produce
concrete with the specified strength, workability and durability.

3. Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the use of any approved admixture at no additional
cost to the Client and in strict accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Admixtures shall be free of chlorides.

5. Admixture shall not impair the durability of the concrete nor combine with constituents to form
harmful compounds nor increase the risk of corrosion of reinforcement.

6. If required by the Engineer, the concrete supplier shall furnish a series of at least 10 trial mixes
which clearly indicate that the use of the admixture has consistently produced concrete of the
specified strength, durability and workability.

 If the above information is insufficient, extensive testing (including an IR scan)

conducted at the Contractor’s expense may be required by the Engineer to prove the
performance of the admixture.

7. The use of the Admixtures shall be strictly controlled to ensure that only correct dosages are
utilized as prescribed by the manufacturer and as determined by the trials.

 Admixture is to be dispensed by a transparent unit which enables the operator to see

the discharge, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

4.14 LABORATORY TRIALS

A. Upon the Engineer’s request, preliminary laboratory trials shall be carried out with the approved
materials to determine if the mixes will satisfy the specification.

 Samples shall be taken and tests shall be conducted at a laboratory approved by the
Engineer to prove conformance with all the requirements in Table 1 and 2.
 If any of the values obtained are unacceptable, the mixes shall be re-designed.
 Approval of the laboratory-mix proportions shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to produce concrete which meets the requirements of these
Specifications.
 All costs connected with the laboratory trials and the design of the proposed mixes shall be
borne by the Contractor.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 33
 VOLUME III

 Whenever a change of brand or source for any of the concrete ingredients occurs,
additional laboratory mixes may be required and the cost of these trials shall also be
borne by the Contractor.

4.15 PLANT TRIALS

A. As soon as the Engineer has approved the concrete mix proportions from the laboratory trial,
the Contractor shall conduct a plant trial in the presence of the Engineer.

 All concrete mixes shall require a plant trial, unless waived by the Engineer.
 The plant trials must prove compliance of all criteria set forth in Table 1 and 2, unless
otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
 Plant Trials shall be mixed for the same time, by the same means and with the same
equipment which the Contractor proposes to use in the Works.
 The proportions of cement, aggregate and water shall be carefully determined by
weight to correspond with the Contractor's approved mix proportions.
 Contractor shall make three separate batches for each concrete mix, unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.

o Each batch shall be not less than 3.0m3 of concrete, unless otherwise accepted
by the Engineer.
o Thirty 150 mm test cubes shall be made from each batch.
 Methods of making and curing cubes shall be in accordance with BS
1881: Part 108 and Part 111 respectively and as follows:
 Cubes shall be stored in insulated boxes until removed from
the moulds.

 The Contractor shall carryout all tests mentioned in Table 2 at a laboratory approved
by the Engineer.
 The slump and temperature of each batch during each plant trial shall be measured
and recorded, by the method described in BS 1881, immediately after mixing and
thereafter at 15 minutes intervals up to 2 hours after batching or as envisaged for
delivery and standing on site.

o Based on these trials the Engineer shall identify any adjustments required for
acceptable workability.

 Three cubes shall be tested at 3, 7, 14 and 28 days for hardened density and
compressive strength as described in BS 1881: Part 114 and Part 116 respectively.
o If the average value of the strength of three cubes tested at 28 days is less than
the target mean strength given in Table 1, the mix shall be rejected and
redesigned.
o If the difference between the greatest and the least strengths at 28 days is more
than 20% of the average strength, the Plant trial shall be repeated.

B. Re-design of the concrete mixes and the making and testing of preliminary and trial mixes of
concrete shall be repeated for each grade of concrete until all results meet the requirements of
Table 1 and 2.

C. Trial Slabs

 For grades C40, C50 and C50TB at least one reinforced horizontal slab measuring 1.0m x
1.0m x 0.2m and one reinforced wall section measuring 1.0m x 1.0m x 0.2m shall be cast
utilizing the same placement and curing methods as proposed for the works.
 Each sampling shall consist of three 100mm dia. cores of suitable length for RCP testing.

o A cover meter shall be utilized to locate the rebars to avoid rebar in the core.
o The cores will be given to the Engineer for delivery to an independent laboratory of
the Engineer’s choice.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 34
 VOLUME III

 The cores shall be promptly and the results promptly given to the Engineer.
 The average value from the cores taken from trial slabs shall not exceed 1500 coul.
 All associated costs for coring and testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

D. Contractor shall only use the approved mix of each grade of concrete in the Works

 If at any time during the construction of the Works, the source of cement, aggregate,
admixture or mix proportions are changed, the concrete shall be rejected and/or new trial
mixes shall be made, tested and approved for use.

o If any unapproved mixes or non-compliant concrete is utilized in the permanent

works, it shall be removed and replaced at the contractor’s expense, unless
otherwise agreed by the Engineer.

E. As requested by the Engineer, additional cubes may be required and trials carried out to
determine:

 Stripping times for formwork.

 Efficiency of curing.
 To check testing and sampling errors.

4.16 MEASUREMENT OF INGREDIENTS

A. All cement, aggregates and ice shall be measured by weight with a weigh batching machine,
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

 Weigh-batching
 Shall provide facilities for the accurate control and measurement of the materials
individually.
 Shall be capable of immediate adjustment by semi-skilled operators in order to permit
variations to be made to the mix.
 All weight and measuring dials shall be easily visible from the place at which filling and
emptying of the hoppers are controlled.
 Water may be measured by weight or volume.
 All measuring equipment shall be maintained in a clean and serviceable condition.

B. Concrete-mixing machine shall be fitted with a water-measuring device which shall be so

constructed that the inlet and outlet valves are interlocked so that either one of them cannot
be opened unless the other is fully closed.

 The device shall be provided with an overflow with a cross-sectional area at least four
times that of the outlet pipe and with its discharge point clear of the mixing plant.
 Entire water system shall be maintained free of leaks at all times.
 Measuring device shall be fitted with a drain pipe which allows the full quantity of water
being measured to be drained off for checking the measurement.
 The outlet arrangement of the measuring device shall be such that generally between five
and ten percent of the water should be fed first, followed by all the solid material,
preferably fed uniformly and simultaneously into the mixer. If possible the greater part of
the water should also be fed during the same time.
 Remainder of the water shall be added at a uniform rate after the solids.
 The device shall also be readily adjustable so that the quantity of water added to the
mixer may be varied, if necessary for each batch.
 Arrangements for cooling of the mixing water shall be approved by the Engineer.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 35
 VOLUME III

C. Batching plant shall be calibrated in-house each month and at least once a year by an
independent agency approved by the Engineer.

Batching accuracy shall be as shown in Table 9.

TABLE 9: BATCHING ACCURACY

Material Accuracy
Cement
a. Above 30% scale capacity + 1%

b. Below 30% scale capacity -0- +4%

Aggregates
a. Individual batches + 2%

b. Cumulative weight, % of the required cumulative

weight ± 1%
1. Above 30% capacity ± 3%
2. Below 30% scale capacity

Water
Added by weight or volume + 1%
Total water (including any wash water) ± 3%
Admixtures
± 3%
a. By weight or volume

D. Any admixtures which may be used shall be measured separately in calibrated and transparent
dispensers which are easily visible to the operator, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

 Admixture shall be added to the mixture with the water preferably in a single shot.
 Dispenser shall be capable of dispensing the agent in quantities varying by not more than
± 3 percent from the quantities required and in such a manner to ensure uniform distribution
of the agent throughout the batch during the time of mixing.

o Capability of the dispenser to achieve the required dosing and delivery

requirements shall be demonstrated to the Engineer.
o Shall be checked each day before concrete mixing commences.

E. Contractor shall provide weights, containers and equipment necessary for testing the accuracy
of the weighing system, water-measuring system and admixture dispenser.

4.17 MIXING CONCRETE

A. All concrete batching shall comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.

 All concrete shall be manufactured in a fully automated, computer controlled batching

plant.

o The plant shall be equipped with a suitable water chiller along with sufficient
insulated storage and flake ice making facility with automatic feed to ensure
concrete temperatures are maintained within specified limits.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 36
 VOLUME III

o Dry mixing or mixing in the truck drum is not allowed.

o Automatic moisture control probes set in the hoppers shall be used to
continuously determine the moisture content of any washed or sprinkled
aggregates.

 Mixing and transporting of concrete shall be in accordance with the requirements for
ready mixed concrete in BS 5328 or ASTM C94 except as modified hereunder or as
directed by the Engineer.

o Concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the point of placing as rapidly
as practicable in approved agitators.

 Concrete shall be mixed in batches with suitable equipment capable of combining the
aggregates, cement and water (including admixtures, if any) into a mixture of uniform
colour and consistency and of discharging the mixture without segregation.

 Amount of concrete mixed in any one batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the
mixer.

o Manufacture’s rated capacity shall be displayed on the mixer in terms of the

volume of mixed concrete.
o The mixing time shall not be less than that used by the mixer manufacturer in
assessing its performance or as determined by trials carried out in the
presence of Engineer.
o All materials from the previous batch shall be removed before materials for a
fresh batch enter the drum.
o If work is suspended, including any periods exceeding twenty minutes, the
mixers and all handling plant shall be washed with clean water.
o All mixing and batching equipment shall be maintained free of set concrete or
cement and shall be clean before commencing mixing.

 The natural moisture contents of the aggregates shall be determined before the
commencement of each day's concreting and at such intervals during each day as
may be necessary.

o Automatic moisture control probes set in the hoppers shall be used to

continuously determine the moisture content of any washed or sprinkled
aggregates.

o The amount of water added to each mix shall be adjusted to maintain the
approved free water/cementitious ratio of the mixed concrete.

 Limitation of water/cementitious ratio.

o No concrete shall exceed the water/cementitious ratios as given in Table 1

 Whenever required by the Engineer free water/cementitious ratio

shall be determined in an approved independent laboratory on
concrete samples cored from locations selected by Engineer. The
Contractor shall bear all the costs.

 In no circumstances shall the consistency of the concrete be such as

to permit a separation of the aggregate from the mortar during
handling.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 37
 VOLUME III

 Excess water shall not be permitted and any batch containing such
excess will be rejected.

 Manufacturing and delivery resources of the proposed supplier shall be adequate to

ensure proper and timely placement and shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.

 Each load shall be accompanied by a batch ticket containing at least the following
information.

o Name of Ready Mix Co. (Ready mix must be a SIKA approved supplier for
concrete)
o Batch Ticket No. and serial No. of computer printout.
o Location of Plant
o Name of Customer
o Date:
o Concrete Grade
o Type and Manufacturer of Cement, GGBS and Microsilica
o Quantity of Concrete in the Transit Mixer (m3)
o Total Quantity Ordered (m3)
o Truck Identification NumberSignature of Ready Mix Representative
o Tel. No. of Technical Manager
o Type of each SIKA Admixture per batch (liters) with documents of supplying
from SIKA
o Type of all Aggregates
o Enough space to write comments by the Site Staff

 Each load shall be accompanied by a computer controlled non-simulated printout

listing at least the following:

o Name of Ready Mix Co.

o Serial No. of computer printout.
o Concrete Grade
o Mix Identification Name or Number
o Confirmation of non-simulated print out
o Time (hr : min.) when water is first added to the mix
o Mixing Time (sec.)
o Target Quantities
o Individual Weight of Aggregates (per batch) in kgs.
o Cumulative quantity of each ingredient per truck (or load)
o Weight of Cement per Batch (kgs)
o Weight of Pozzolanic Materials per Batch (kgs)
o Quantity of each admixtures (per batch) in liters
o Quantity of Flake Ice per Batch (kgs)
o Moisture content of each Aggregate (%)
o Water Absorption of each Aggregate (%)
o Total Quantity of Water, added per Batch (kgs)
o Total Quantity of Moisture in each Batch
o Variation of individual Batch Quantities, of all Materials per Batch (% errors)
o Total Quantity of Water absorbed by each aggregate in a Batch
o Actual free Water / Cementitious ratio
o Total variation of accumulated individual Ingredients per Batch (% error)

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 38
 VOLUME III

 A copy of the batch ticket and computer printout shall be given to the Engineer's site
representative upon delivery for each and every truck.

o The print out and batch ticket may be combined provided the minimum
information is included.
o Loads may be rejected for insufficient information at the Engineer’s
discretion.

 Unless approved otherwise in advance of batching, all concrete of a particular mix for
any one day's pour, or for each structure shall be from the same batch plant with the
same type of materials.

o Concrete mixes containing aggregate and cement from different sources

shall not be permitted in a single structure, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.

 No water shall be added into the transit mixer during transport of concrete to the site
or at the site.

 Each mixer truck shall arrive at the job site with its water container full.

o In the event that water container is not full or field test results are outside the
acceptable limit, the load shall be rejected.

 Except for grade C20, concrete temperature in each load shall be recorded at the
point of discharge.

o Measurement of slump on 20N concrete shall be at the discretion of the

Engineer.

 Perform slump tests in accordance with BS 1881 at the site of pour for each load
delivered to site, except of grade C20 which shall be at the Engineer’s decision.

o Concrete placement shall proceed only following satisfactory verification of

slump or other specified field test results.

 The Contractor shall provide at no extra cost, all facilities and services, including
suitable transport, acceptable to the Engineer, for the sole use of Engineers staff or
persons authorized by him to monitor the concrete batching, mixing, sampling and
testing.

4.18 ROUTINE CONCRETE TESTING

 All tests to be carried out by an independent approved Lab.

 The cost of all tests required under this clause are to be paid by the Contractor. Whether the
test results show the materials to be satisfactory for the work or not.

 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer sufficient quantity of material proposed to be
used for the works, together with a list of suppliers to be employed. The Engineer's consent in
wiring shall be obtained to all such samples and source of supply before any concreting work
is put in hand no change shall subsequently be made without the Engineer's approval. The
Engineer shall have access to all sources of supply for the purpose of inspecting and taking
samples of any materials which will be later delivered to the site.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 39
 VOLUME III

A. Under the supervision and direction of the Engineer, the Contractor shall perform all tests as
shown in Table 10, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

TABLE 10: FREQUENCY OF TESTING FOR FRESH AND HARDENED CONCRETE

Minimum Frequency
Test
C20 C40 and Above
Temperature As directed by the Each load
Engineer
Concrete Slump Every 25m3 Each load
Visual Examination of Aggregates As directed by the Each load
(after washing) Engineer
Concrete density and compressive 6 cubes per 100m³ 6 cubes per 30m³
strength Min. once per day Min. once per day

Concrete unit weight (wet) Twice per day Every 50m3

Min. twice per day
SO3 and Cl contents As directed by the Every 250m3 or as directed
Engineer by the Engineer

B. Routine Test Cubes

 Test cubes shall be randomly taken from the concrete which is being used in the work
and prepared in accordance to the relevant standard and the following provisions,
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

o All cubes shall be made at the point of delivery and all cubes for each set
must be from the same load(transit mixer truck).
o Use approved cube molds of the same type and manufacture for making all
test specimens.
o All cubes shall be kept in closed insulated boxes for initial curing until
removed from the molds and placed directly in a suitable curing tank.
o Six cubes (150mm) shall be made for density and compressive strength
testing.
o Each grade of cubes shall be numbered consecutively throughout the work
and marked with the date.

 For compressive strength and density, test 3 cubes at 7 days and 3 at 28 days.

o The Mean of 3 cube strength results shall be taken as the test result.

 If an individual cube result varies by more than 10% from the mean
result, that cube value shall be discarded and the result will be the
average of the remaining cube values.

 Investigations to determine the reason for such high

variations shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer.

o No individual strength test result (average of 3 cubes) shall fall below 85% of
the specified strength.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 40
 VOLUME III

 The average of any 3 consecutive strength test results must equal or

exceed the specified strength.

o If the average 7 day strength indicates that the concrete may be defective;
the Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer and stop all concrete
activities until the reason for such low strength is determined and corrected.

o At the Contractor’s option, potentially defective concrete may be removed

and replaced without awaiting the 28 day test results.

 If the test cubes fail to meet the requirements of Table 1 and Table 2, then the
following action shall be taken by the Contractor.

o Suspend concreting operations and do not proceed further without Engineer’s

approval.
o Take test scores in accordance with BS 1881: Part 120, from suspect
concrete and test as directed by the Engineer.
o Any Re-testing shall be conducted to the Engineer’s satisfaction at the
Contractor’s expense.

C. Routine Concrete Coring and Testing

 The Contractor shall provide a covermeter to locate the rebars.

 Core locations shall be marked by the Engineer.
 The cores will be given to the Engineer for delivery to an independent laboratory of
the Engineer’s choice.
 All associated costs for coring and testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

D. The Contractor shall keep records of all specimens taken and tests made using a proforma
approved by the Engineer.

E. Submit at weekly intervals, test reports giving test results for slump, temperature, unit weight,
hardened density, strength and any other test performed during the week.

F. If high variability in slump values or wet unit weight occur, the Engineer may instruct the
Contractor to stop concreting operations, until corrective action is taken.

G. Cost of all sampling and testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

4.19 DELIVERY OF CONCRETE

A. Transportation, delivery and handling shall be in accordance with BS 5328 or ASTM C94 except
as described hereunder, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

 Each load of concrete arriving at the job site must be accompanied by all information
as listed in paragraph 3.04 of this Section.

o Loads with insufficient information may be rejected at the Engineer’s discretion.

 Contractor shall be responsible for delivering concrete in such a manner as to avoid

cold joints.

B. Frequency of sampling and testing shall be as defined in Section 3.05.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 41
 VOLUME III

C. If field tests show excessive temperature, non-compliant slump, non-compliant unit weight, or
any other discrepancy the entire load of concrete from which the sample in question was taken
will be rejected.

 The slump and temperature tests shall be carried out just prior to placement.
 Rejected concrete shall be removed from the site at the Contractor's expense

D. Use mixed concrete without delay.

 Concrete shall be placed not later than 90 minutes from the time of mixing, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.

E. Concrete must be placed and compacted up to the designated construction joints before initial
set has occurred.

 The timetable for the depositing of concrete should be so arranged that no face of
concrete shall be left exposed for more than 20 minutes before fresh concrete is
deposited against it in order to avoid cold joints.

4.20 Hot Weather Concreting

A. Follow the recommendations of ACI-305 and the following precautions during hot weather,
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

 Take all precautions necessary to prevent the temperature of concrete rising above
320C at the time of placement.
 Do not mix or place concrete when the ambient shade temperature is above 400C
on a rising thermometer or above 430 on a falling thermometer.

o Hours at which concreting will be allowed to take place will be agreed with the
Engineer.

 Cool aggregate with draughts and/or shade from direct sunlight.

 Cold water to be utilized in mixing.
 When ice is used:

o Take into account all ice when computing water/cement ratios.

o Ensure that ice is melted before the concrete leaves the mixer.

 Paint white, provide shade or insulate the rotating mixer drum to prevent overheating
of the metal and excessive heat transfer.

4.21 NON-COMPLIANT CONCRETE

A. Concrete shall be considered to be non-compliant if any of the following conditions are found
to exist.

 Compressive strength results less than those shown in Table 1.

 Unapproved mix is utilized.
 Approved mix proportions or materials have been changed.
 Sulphate or chloride contents in excess of those shown in Table 2.
 Water/cement ratio in excess of Table 1.
 Cementitious content less than those in Table 1.
 Concrete that fails to meet one or more requirements of the specification.

B. Any structures containing non-compliant concrete shall be completely broken out and
removed, unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 42
 VOLUME III

C. The Engineer’s decision shall be final in all aspects related to non-compliant concrete.

D. Any additional costs associated with non-compliant concrete shall be at the Contractor’s
expense.

4.22 REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE

Steel reinforcement shall generally be one of the following types:

 Hot rolled mild, high yield steel deformed bars complying with BS 4449 or similar approved
standard.
 Cold twisted bars complying with BS 4482 or similar approved standard.
 Steel fabric reinforcement complying with BS 4482 or similar approved standard.

In case any other type of reinforcement is required, it shall comply with the requirements of the
particular specification.

All reinforcement shall be free of loose rust and mill scale and any coating such as oil, clay , paint
etc., which might impair the bond with the concrete Steel reinforcement shall be stored in clean
conditions and shall be protected from damage at all times. It shall be clean and free of loose rust, dirt
, mud, loose mill scale, paint, oil or all other foreign substances at the time of fixing in position and
subsequent concreting.

Manufacturer's test certificates for all classes of reinforcement shall be supplied when required.
Specimens sufficient for three tensile tests and three supplied when required. Specimens sufficient
for three tensile tests and three cold bending tests per ten tones of bars or traction thereof and for
each different size of bar shall be sampled under the supervision of the Architect. Testing shall be in
accordance with BS 4449 or other approved standard and batches shall be rejected if the average
results for each batch are not in accordance with the specification.

The Contractor shall cut and bend bars to Bs 4466 and to schedule, if provided or unless otherwise
instructed by the Architect, Straight sections of bars must be kept out of winding.

The internal radius of bands shall in no case be less than two times the diameter of the bar. Great
care is to be taken to be stirrups and blinders separately and to the sizes shown.

All bars will be bent cold on approved machines, and at temperatures in the range of 5 C to 100 C.

Lengthening of bars by welding, and rebinding of incorrectly bent bars will not be permitted, except
where requested by the Engineer.

Unless otherwise allowed for in the reinforcement except where described in the Contract or where
approved by the Engineer.

Reinforcement shall be placed and maintained in the position shown in the Contract. Unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer, all bar intersections shall be tied together and the ends of the
tying wire shall be turned into the main body of the concrete. 1.2 mm diameter G.I wire shall be used
throughout.

Generally the manufacturer's test certification should be obtained with each delivery of reinforcement
but the Engineer reserves the right to request tests from an independent testing from time or from
every batch of steel delivered to site.

Concrete cover blocks required for ensuring that the reinforcement is correctly positioned, shall be as
small as possible consistent with their purpose, of a shape acceptable to the Engineer, and designed

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 43
 VOLUME III

so that they will not overturn when the concrete is placed. They shall be made of concrete with 10mm
maximum aggregate size to produce the same strength as the adjacent concrete.

4.23 CONCRETE PLACING

Before the concrete is actually placed in position the inside of the shuttering or moulds should be
inspected by the Engineer or the Engineer's representative to see that it has been properly assembled
and fixed.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a weekly and a monthly concreting program which shall
be approved before the concreting work is executed.

The Contractor shall be responsible for giving 24 hours’ notice in writing to enable the Engineer to have
a representative present during concreting. In the event of the contractor not giving such notice, the
Engineer reserves the right to cut away such concrete as he may require to expose the reinforcement
and the cost of such cutting away shall be borne by the Contractor, even is the position of the
reinforcement is found to be correct.

As soon as possible after the mixing and before the initial set has taken place, the concrete shall be
deposited directly in the work from barrows, etc. carefully trimmed into position in layers and well
rammed and vibrated. Concrete shall not be thrown or dropped form a height exceeding 2m without the
written authority of the Engineer.

The concrete shall be worked up against the face of the previously deposited concrete or against form
work or moulds with rods or long tampers. Very great impotence is attached to the depositing and
through consolidating of the concrete to ensure that it is homogenous and free from interstices and that
it is in contact throughout with the forms or moulds; all to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.

Care shall be taken not to disturb setting concrete by shocks, loading or otherwise before it has
sufficiently hardened, any concrete that it not finally placed within half an hour of mixing shall be
discarded. Any concrete which shows signs of initial setting before it is deposited in the forms or moulds shall
not be used in the work and shall be removed from the site or otherwise disposed of to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.

Care shall be taken that at no time segregation of the concrete takes place.

Where concrete is laid on hard-core or any absorbing material, the surface shall be thoroughly wetted
before the concrete is deposited.

Large areas of unsuspended floor construction shall be of alternate bay construction

Each panel cast shall be approximately square in plan and not exceeding an area of 20m2 for the un
reinforced and 50m2 for the reinforced slab.

For suspended floor construction generally the area may be increased to 100m2 and the sizes of bays
to be cast should be agreed with the Engineer. The sizes of bays may be increased at the discretion
of the Engineer depending on the conditions relating to each individual case.

The specifications for reinforced slabs may be consider to apply for reinforced wall construction
generally, but the length of panels to be cast may not exceed 8m.

The contractor shall have available sufficient mechanical vibrators of an approved pattern (having not
less than 6000 vibration per minute) to cope with the largest volume of concrete likely to be poured at
any one time.

Spare machines shall be kept available over and above those normally used in the works in case of a
breakdown.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 44
 VOLUME III

The type of vibrator should be applied in a number of places for short periods rather than in one place
for a long time. The spacing between points of application should be such that all parts of the section
are equally and fully compacted. The vibrations should be removed slowly from the compacted concrete.

The vibrations must not be used to cause the concrete to flow horizontally along the work or cause
bleeding and placing of concrete shall therefore be kept sufficiently ahead of the vibrator to prevent this.

Under no circumstances should the vibrator be attached, or allowed to rest on reinforcement not
embedded in the concrete.

Clamp on vibrators should be rigidly fixed to the form work and their spacing should be determined in
relation to the size of the section so that all parts of the concrete are vibrated equally.

Concrete shall not be subjected to vibration between 4 and 24 hours after compaction.

Accumulation of water on the surface due to any cause during compaction is to be prevented as far as
possible and any such water is to be removed before further concrete is placed.

In case bleeding tests are instructed to be carried out by the Engineer these shall be as per ASTM-C-
232.

4.24 CUTTING AWAY

The Contractor shall not cut away any concrete work without the written authority of the Engineer and
the Contractor will be held responsible for the safety of any work damaged due to unauthorized cutting
by himself or his sub- contractors.

4.25 Waterproof Concrete

Particular care shall be taken for all waterproof concrete to use an aggregate of the correct grading
and the proportion of fine and coarse aggregate are to be carefully adjusted to obtain the maximum
density.

All waterproof concrete below ground and in direct contact with water shall include an admixture as
per the approved mix design.

4.26 EXPANSION JOINT

Expansion joints to be formed in the position and details shown on drawings, and shall be filled with
approved material from SIKA such as; Sikaflex®-PRO 3. Thoroughly clean joint surfaces using cleaners
approved by sealant manufacturer whether primers are required or not. Provide joint filler material
uniformly to depth and 25 percent bigger than the joint width then fit with the suitable tool making sure
not to cause any damage to the filler material. Provide bond-breaker where indicated, adhering strictly
to the manufacturer’s installation requirements. Prime joint substrates where required. Use masking
tape where required to prevent sealant or primer contact with adjoining surfaces that would be
permanently stained or otherwise damaged by such contact or the cleaning methods required for
removal. Install sealants immediately after joint preparation to fill joints completely from the back, without
voids or entrapped air, using proven techniques, proper nozzles and sufficient force that result in
sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint surfaces. For sealant installation Comply with joint-
sealant manufacturer's instructions and with recommendation of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants
as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. The ground floor slabs shall be
generally separated from the tie beams by forming such a joint. Similar treatment shall be ensured to
separate the cement and screed from the surrounding block work concrete.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 45
 VOLUME III

4.27 FORM WORK

A. Definition
Form work is the casing into which concrete is placed and /or its supports.

B. Materials
Form work shall be constructed of timber, metal or other approved material shall be so
constructed as to prevent any loss of grout or fine materials during concreting. The materials
used shall be adequate to provide the required surface finish to the concrete after removal
and be sufficiently rigid to produce concrete surfaces true and plane as required within a
tolerance of 6mm in 4 m.

C. Design
Form work shall be so designed and constructed that concrete can be properly placed and
thoroughly compacted.

Form work shall be firmly supported and adequately strutted, braced or tied. It shall be
capable of adjustment to the lines and dimensions of the finished concrete, and it shall be
sufficiently strong to resist, without excessive distortion, the pressure of concrete during its
placing and compaction, and other loads to which it may be subjected. It shall not be liable to
suffer distortion under the influence of the weather.

When concrete is to be vibrated, special care shall be taken to ensure that the form work will
remain stable and the joints tight.

The Contractor shall, if required, supply to the Engineer drawings and calculation for the form
work he propose to use.

D. Deflection and Camber

The Contractor shall make allowance for any settlement or deflection of form work that is
likely to arise during construction so that the hardened concrete conforms accurately to the
specified line and level. The Contractor shall also make allowance in the form work for any
camber and deflection due to creep of the concrete.

E. Supports
Form work shall be constructed so that the form work to the sides of members can be
removed without disturbing the soffit form work or its supports.

Props and supports shall be designed to allow the form work to be adjusted accurately to line
and level to be erected and removed in an approved sequence without injury to the concrete.

Supports shall be carried to construction, which is sufficiently strong to afford the necessary
support without injury to any portion of the structure. This may mean in some cases that it be
carried down to the foundations or other suitable base.

Props and bracing shall be provided for the temporary support of composite construction
where separately specified.

F. Joints and Edges

All joints in form work shall be close fitting to prevent leakage of grout from the concrete. All
construction joints form work shall be tightly secured against previously cast or hardened
concrete to prevent the formation of stepping or ridges in ht concrete.
Form work shall be constructed to provide straight and true angles, arises or edges. Where
chamfers are shown on the drawings, the fillets shall be accurately cut to size to provide a
smooth and continuous chamfer.
Form work panels shall have true edges to permit accurate alignment at sides and provide a
clean line at construction joints in the concrete.
Form work panels shall be fixed with their joints either vertical or horizontal, unless otherwise
specified.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 46
 VOLUME III

G. Ties
The material and position of any ties passing through the concrete shall be to the Engineer's
approval. Except where it shall be possible to remove a tie so that no part of it remaining
imbedded in the concrete shall be nearer to the finished surface of the concrete than the
specified thickness of cover to the reinforcement. Any holes left after the removal of ties shall
be filled with concrete or mortar of approved composition.

H. Sundries
Form work shall be provided to the top surface of concrete where the slope or the nature of
the work requires it.
Provision shall be made for forming holes and chases for services and for building in pipes,
conduits and other fixings shown on the drawings.

I. Cleaning and Treatment of Form work

All rubbish, chipping, shavings, sawdust and dirt shall be removed from the interior of the form
work before concrete is placed. The form work to be in contact with the concrete shall be
cleaned and watered and treated with suitable mould-release agent which shall be an oil-
based, anti-corrosive shutter release agent when applied to wood or steel formwork it
provides clean, fast and easy striking of type Separol® FP 15 from SIKA. Care shall be taken
that oil or composition is kept from contact with the reinforcement or with concrete at any
construction joints. Retarding agents shall not be used except with the permission of the
Engineer. Form work shall be thoroughly cleaned after each use.

J. Striking or removal of Form work

All form work shall be removed without shock or vibration that might damage the concrete.
Before the soffit and props are removed the surface of the concrete shall be exposed where
necessary in order to ensure that the subjected at the time of striking.

The form work to vertical surfaces such as walls, columns and sides of beams may by
removed after 12-24 hour in normal weather condition, although care must be taken to avoid
damage to the concrete, especially to arises and features. In cold weather a longer period
may be necessary before striking and protection against frost should be afforded to exposed
surfaces.

Where the early concrete strengths are not accurately known the following minimum times (in
days) shall elapse before removal of form work.

Ordinary Portland Rapid-Hardening

cement concrete Portland cement concrete
Normal Weather Norman Weather
(about 30oC) (about 30o C)

Slab (props left under) 3 2

Beam soffits (props left under) 7 4
Props to slabs 7-10 4
props to beams 16 8

Any days during which the average temperature is bellow 2oC must be completely
disregarded in calculating the minimum time which must elapse before form work is removed.
The contractor must at such time obtain the approval of the Engineer before striking any form
work.

The times given for the removal of props are based on the assumption that the total live plus
dead weight to be supported at the time of removal is not more than one half the total design
load.

For horizontal members where the loading is a higher proportion of the total design load these

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 47
 VOLUME III

times may need to be increased.

The Contractor shall be responsible for any injury to the concrete work and for any damage
caused by or arising from the removal and striking of the forms and supports. Any advice,
permission approval given by the Engineer relative to the removal and striking of forms and
supports shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility.

K. Plastered Surfaces
Where concrete surfaces are to be plastered the Contractor shall ensure that the solution
used on form work will not in any way reduce the adhesion of the plaster to the concrete.

4.28 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

Construction joints and day work joints are to be formed in positions approved by the Engineer, and
vertical stop boards must be provided to form these joints.

Provision shall be made for the reinforcement to run continuously through the joint without being
temporarily bent up or otherwise displaced, and any concrete flowing past the joint is to be hacked off
as soon as it is set. Once concreting has started, it must be carried on to its natural completion or to
properly constructed day work joints.

Before concreting is resumed, the surface of the concrete on the first side of the joint shall be
thoroughly cleaned, and the surface roughened as to expose the aggregate.

The new concrete shall be carefully worked up against the hardened surface of the joint, where
possible, except in the case of exposed face work where colour is important, the proportions of
cement and fine aggregate to coarse aggregate shall be increased in the batches to be placed
against the joint.

The Contractor must at all times ensure that the supply of concrete is adequate for pours up to a
properly constructed day work joint.

If for any reason this is not achieved the Engineer shall be entitled to stop the work and reject the
incomplete pour and the Contractor shall at his own expense remove that concrete either wholly or
partly as directed by the Engineer and re-concrete to a re- prepared day work joint.

4.29 REMEDIAL TREATMENT OF SURFACES

Any remedial treatment of surfaces shall be approved from the Engineer following inspection
immediately after removing the form work and shall be carried out without delay. ''

Any concrete, the surface of which has been treated before being inspected by the engineer, shall be
liable to rejection.

No claim of any sort will be admissible for carrying out any such repair work.

4.30 FINISHES

All concrete surfaces which are not fair faced are to be left as struck from the mould, except that any
surfaces which are found to be honeycombed shall be made good as soon as they have been
inspected by the Engineer.

The making good shall be done with a mixture of fine aggregate and cement in similar proportions to
the concrete and as dry as possible or by approved repair Mortar.

All fair face concrete surfaces with wrought form work are to have a rubbed finish, which shall mean
the application of rubs. The first rub shall be made after the removal of the forms, the surface shall be
wetted and rubbed with a No. of 20 carborundum stone to remove all mould marks. The second rub

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 48
 VOLUME III

shall be made when finishing the concrete work when the surface shall again be wetted, and rubbed
with a No of 24 carborundum stone, excess paste being removed with the brush.

The final surface shall be free from all irregularities and discolouration and shall be an even level
surface.

If any honeycombing is found on exposed faces, the Engineer's decision as to whether the concrete
shall be cut and replaced or made good shall be final.

4.31 CURING

A. General
The concrete shall be protected during the first stage of hardening from the harmful effects of
sunshine, drying winds, cold, rain or running water. Unless the following procedures are
followed to the satisfaction of the Engineer the concrete will be considered defective and
unacceptable. All material needed for curing should be ready for use before concreting
begins. Curing material shall be applied on freshly laid concrete as a liquid curing compound
for preventing the evaporation of mixing water in concrete of type Antisol®-WB from SIKA.
Contractor has to ensure attendance for the curing before proceeding with concreting.

B. Top Surface
Immediately upon finishing, the expose surface is to be covered by polythene sheeting, the
sheeting to be in direct contact with concrete and covered with hessian to prevent air
circulation over the concrete.

As soon as the concrete has sufficiently set the sheeting is to be removed and the surface
covered with wet hessian and polythene sheeting to reduce evaporation.
Addition of water must be introduced frequently under the polythene sheeting to keep the
thoroughly & permanently wet. This process should continue without interruption for 7 days.

Alternatively and whenever possible, ponding of the exposed concrete surface may be
allowed, in such a case, care should be taken to reduce evaporation.
In areas where starter bars protrude and is not possible to pond, as much of the area as
possible is to be covered with hessian and kept continuously wet.

C. Vertical Surfaces
For the sides of columns beams and walls, form work shall be kept in position and sprayed
with water for at least 24 hours which provides the initial protection needed against
evaporation.

Immediately on removal of form work the concrete should be closely warped with wet hessian
and enclosed with polythene sheeting. The hessian should be kept wet by frequent additions
of water. The process should continue for not less than seven days.

Curing by using an approved curing compound will be allowed on surfaces which are difficult
to cure by any other method.

Traffic or loading shall not be allowed on the concrete until the concrete is sufficiently matured
and in no case shall traffic or loading be of such magnitude as to cause deflection or other
movement in the form work or cause damage to the concrete members.

4.32 WORK BELOW GROUND

All surfaces of block work below ground level shall be generally painted with three coats of Epoxy
base coating, unless otherwise specified.

All surfaces of concrete to be covered with membrane and 6mm protection sheet as specified.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 49
 VOLUME III

5. Block Work

5.1 MATERIALS

1. Cement
Ordinary Portland Cement shall be used as described under concrete work. White orcolored
cement shall comply with the physical requirements of B.S 12.

2. Lime
Lime shall be as described under concrete Works.

3. Sand
Sand shall be clean, sharp, and free from salt and organic matter. It shall comply with B.S
1200. The chloride and sulphate contents of sand shall not exceed the limits given for
aggregate in the "Concrete Specification".

4. Concrete Blocks
The blocks, hollow or solid or thermal blocks shall be strictly as manufactured to B.S 6073
Part i and II and should meet municipality requirements.

Block shall be manufactured of cement and sand 1:5 mix (300 Kg cement to one meter cube
of sand) made in vibrated pressure machines. They shall be hard, sound, square and clean
with well-defined arises and shall be 400mm (-+ 5mm) long x 200mm (-+ 5mm) high unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings.

Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings blocks shall be hollow blocks and shall be of
approved design and from approved manufacturer.

Immediately after molding, blocks shall be placed on clean, level, non-absorbent pallets.
Blocks shall not be removed from the pallets until they have been inspected and approved by
the Engineer. Block shall be steam cured.

Prior to manufacturing, the Contractor shall prepare ten nos. sample of each block for the
Engineer's approval, and the approved samples shall be clearly marked and retained until
completion of the contract.

Blocks shall be tested for compressive strength whenever required by the Engineer.

For each test twelve blocks will be selected by the Engineer. The average compressive
strength for the gross area of hollow blocks shall be not less than 25 kg/cm2 and the
minimum block shall be 10 in nos.
If a test not meet the above requirements. The batch of blocks from which the sample was
taken, will be rejected and shall be removed from the Site.

The concrete blocks shall comply with the following requirements:

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 50
 VOLUME III

Compressive Strength at Twenty Eight Days

Hollow blocks > 7.5 N/mm2 average of 10 blocks ( for Non Load Bearing Walls)
Solid blocks > 12.5N/mm2 average of 10blocks ( for Load Bearing Walls)
Hollow blocks> 6.0N/mm2 minimum for any block
Solid blocks > 10.0N/mm2 minimum for any block

Water Absorption: (To ASTM C 140/75 & ASTM C 145)

20% or less of dry weight

The design of the cavities and webs of the hollow blocks shall be submitted to the Engineer
prior to manufacture. The thickness of the face shell; and of the membrane of solid portions
shall not be less than one fourth of the width and length of the block respectively.

Blocks below damp proof course level shall be solid sulphate resisting concrete blocks, or
shall be solid blocks coated with thick black bitumen or tar composition unless otherwise
stated.

5. Insulated concrete Blocks

Insulated concrete blocks generally shall be manufactured as described in Subclause 5
above. The blocks shall measure 250x240x240 mm thick or otherwise stated with keyed
edges to ensure proper butt joints. Polystyrene board 50mm theoretical thickens, density 18
kg/m3 shall provide the insulation layer in the block.

5.2 MORTAR

Mortar shall consist 1 part cement to 3 parts of sand by volume. When block work is constructed
below ground level sulphate resisting cement shall be used depending on soil test results.

The Contractor wish to use a plasticiser with mortar, then the mortar shall consist of 1 part cement to
4 parts sand with plasticiser added and used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. The plasticiser must be approved by the Engineer before use.

Mixing shall be carried out by means of an approved mechanical batch mixer. The mortar shall be
mixed dry until a uniform mix is obtained. Sufficient water shall then be added and the mixing
continued until a homogenous mix is obtained. Excess water shall not be used in the mix.

All mortar shall be used before the initial set has taken place and on no account shall mortar which
has commenced to set be re mixed with water or new batches and used.

5.3 WORKMANSHIP

Generally in accordance to BS 8000.

Blockwork shall be set out and built to the respective dimensions, thicknesses and heights shown on
the Drawings and/ or as instructed in writing by the Engineer.

Unless otherwise ordered, hollow block shall be used in all cases+, end blocks such as at door jambs,
window openings, etc., and blocks of special lengths or size, shall be solid. The blocks shall be well
soaked before being used and the tops of walls left off shall be wetted before work is recommenced.

Blocks shall be laid in true and regular courses on a full bed of mortar of 10 mm.

Average thickness, exclusive of any key in the jointing surfaces of the blocks. Sufficient mortar shall
be used in bedding and jointing to ensure that all keys are solidly filled. Where blocks are laid against
concrete, each third course shall be tied together by means of approved galvanized steel ties.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 51
 VOLUME III

All horizontal joints shall be properly level. The Vertical joints shall be properly lined and quoins,
jambs and other angles plumbed as the work proceeds.

All walls shall be plumbed vertical.

Standard sized block shall be used wherever possible, broken blocks shall not be used except where
required for bonding purposes. Walls and partitions shall be bonded to one another at angles and
junctions.

Joints of faces of block walls which are to be rendered or plastered shall be raked out for depth of 10
mm as the junctions.

Walls shall be carried up regularly without leaving any part more than one meter lower than another
unless the permission of the Engineer is first obtained. Work which is left at different levels shall be
racked back.

The Contractor shall cut and fit block work as required, cut chases for pipes, conduits, etc. and
generally perform all cutting for all trades. Wooden plates and door and window frames shall be
bedded and exposed edges pointed in mortar.

No hollow blocks shall be allowed around any built in fixtures (doors, frames, louvers etc.)

5.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED BLOCK WORK

The Contractor shall ensure that the finished block work walling is not damaged by subsequent
operations.

The contractor is to protect newly or partially built walls against it being dried out too rapidly by the
sun's heat or from any other adverse climatic effects and is to follow the Engineer's instructions in this
matter.

The Contractor shall in all cases cover all newly erected walls with hassian or other materials
approved by the Engineer and shall keep the same wet for at least three days.

5.5 COMPRESSIBLE JOINT FILLERS

Compressible joint filers shall be used where specified at joints on drawings or requested by the
Engineer. Filler shall be cut to exact widths and shall have all edges neatly trimmed. All fixing shall be
strictly in accordance with the manufacture's printed instructions. Exposed edges of filler shall be
pointed with approved sealant.

5.6 PARTITIONS

BLOCKWORK PARTITIONS OVER 2.4 METER HIGH SHALL BE STABILIZED AS FOLLOWS:

 Provide continuous 200 x 300/200 mm reinforced concrete lintel at the door lintel level or as
required by the Engineer.
 For a partition taken between or passing in front of a reinforced concrete column provide two
round steel bars laid in the bedding mortar at 1.00 meter centres and fixed to column using
threaded bars locked into cast in "Spit Rock" dowels.
 Provide rebates, toothing and the like at all vertical intersection of walling every meter of
height.

All internal blockwalls and partitions shall extend up to the underside of the concrete slab, soffits,
beams and the like.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 52
 VOLUME III

5.7 POLYURETHANE SEALANT

Gun quality approved sealant shall be used where specified on the drawing or where requested by
the Engineer including external joinery and metal work bedded against blockwork or concrete. The
colour shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer Sealant of type Sikaflex®-PRO 3 or Sikaflex®-
Concrtuction + from SIKA shall be used as needed. The primer shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer as the sealant. The joints will first be thoroughly cleaned to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and shall be primed before sealing with sealant. Application of these materials shall be
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions instructions.

5.8 LINTELS

Prefabricated lintels shall comply with the requirements of BS 5977, Part 2. All lintels shall be bedded
in mortar and the Contractor shall allow for a minimum bearing at each end of 350 mm or depth of
lintel whichever is higher.

5.9 REINFORCEMENT

Totally embedded metal reinforcement shall be used every second course in the mortar joints. The
width of reinforcement to be such that it is 10 mm from the face for internal block work and 20 mm
from the outer face of the external block work.

5.10 SOURCE OF MATERIAL

Unless indicated otherwise, all blocks for use in the woks shall be obtained from a source approved
by the Engineer. The contractor shall not change the source without the written approval of the
Engineer.

5.11 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

Blocks shall be delivered to site stacked and stored to permit ventilation and protected from rain,
dampness and the like.

In the event that any materials for use in this section deteriorate and become unusable due to
inadequate and poor storage they shall be removed form site as instructed the Engineer and replaced
at the Contractor's expense.

5.12 BLOCKWORK BELOW GROUND LEVEL

Unless otherwise indicated, all blocks used in construction below ground level shall be solid and
manufactured using sulphate resisting cement depending on soil test results.

5.13 DAMP PROOF COURSE

Damp proof course shall be comply with B.S 6398 Type A, fibre based to be provided under every
block wall above ground slab level and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. The damp proof coarse shall be lapped at corners joints and bedded in the cement mortar
mix and pointed at both sides.

5.14 EXTERNAL POINTING - JOINERY OR METAL WORK JUNCTION WITH BLOCK WORK

Joinery or metal work Junction with Block work shall be pointed externally with approved standard Silicon
sealant to approved colour and shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufactures printed
instructions.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 53
 VOLUME III

6. Roofing and Waterproofing

6.1 GENERAL

Material shall be of the best quality and to the Engineer’s approval, all in accordance with the relevant
British Standards and Agreement Board Certificates. The contractor is required to employ specialist
to supply and apply entire water proofing i.e. roofing, substructure, wet areas etc. as indicated in the
drawing & specification.

Workmanship shall be to the highest standards and codes of practice.

SIKA waterproofing systems to be used for the project.

6.2 TESTING

The Contractor is to test, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, all areas of roofing, waterproofing, and
the like for water penetration. These tests are to be carried out after the water proofing system has
been laid.

The Contractor is to allow in his rates for such areas to be flooded with water, and left for a minimum
of 48 hours.

On completion of roofing works, Contractor is to leave the roof in a sound and watertight condition, to
the Engineer’s approval of, and in a satisfactory state for handing over.

6.3 GUARANTEE

The Contractor and sub-contractor shall provide the Employer with a written unconditional guarantee
for the roofing system for a period of 15 (fifteen) years and for toilets and wet areas installed on site
for a period of 10 (ten) years from the date of issue of the Final completion certificate. The contractor
shall bear the cost on any of the consequential damage or complete renewal as determined by the
Client during the above period as is provide for is same guarantee. The text of the guarantee shall be
to Client’s approval.

6.4 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

All surfaces shall be clear of all deleterious matter and dry, all in accordance with the manufacture's
written instructions. Prior to the application of any waterproofing/roofing material or primer the
Contractor shall grind the concrete surface using a mechanical grinder to ensure al surface
irregularities are removed and gain Engineer's written approval that he may commence the said
works, without same all works shall be rejected and replaced at the Contractor's expense.

6.5 PROTECTION

Finished and part finished surfaces shall be suitably protected to ensure no damage by other trades.
Any roofing or waterproofing so damaged due to non-protection shall be removed and replaced at the
Contractor's expense. The contractor shall submit to the engineer his proposed methods of protecting
the various surfaces and locations prior to their completion or application of finishing layers, i.e. tiling
and the like.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 54
 VOLUME III

6.6 ROOF WATERPROOFING SYSTEM -SIKA PVC Membrane Roofing System

STRUCTURAL WATERPROOFING OF ROOF AREAS USING LOOSE LAID ROOFING

MEMBRANE FOR LOOSE-LAID ROOFS OF TYPE SARNAFIL® G410 MEMBRANE, INVERTED
SYSTEM( Specification to be provided by SIKA)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Documents

A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 Summary
A. Provide an inverted roof waterproofing system with a polyvinyl-chloride membrane on
structural concrete, plywood sheathing, cover board, metal or other substrates.
1. Work includes substrate preparation.
2. Work includes bridging and sealing air leakage and water intrusion pathways and gaps
including connections of the walls to the roof air barrier, and penetrations of the building
envelope including piping, conduit, ducts and similar items.

B. This specification describes the application of a roof waterproofing membrane in

accordance with EN 13956 “Plastic and Rubber sheets for Roof Waterproofing” made of
premium-quality thermoplastic PVC membrane for concrete structures.

C. In accordance with BS 6229:2003 Flat Roofs with Continuously Supported Coverings –

Code of Practice it is recommended that roofs should have a Design Fall of 1:40 to achieve
a Minimum Finished Fall of 1:80. If a 1:80 fall cannot be achieved the degree of fall deemed
suitable in the Middle East can be reviewed by the specifier in conjunction with the
waterproofing system manufacturer.

D. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under
the designated Sections:
1. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Section 06 16 00: Sheathing.
3. Section 07 60 00: Flashing and Sheet Metal.
4. Section 07 92 13: Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
5. Section 22 14 25: Roof Drains

1.3 Standards reference:

EN 13956 Polymeric sheets for roof waterproofing with the CE-mark.

EN 1948-2 Thickness of the membrane.

1.4 Performance Requirements

A. Multi-layer, synthetic polyvinyl chloride roof waterproofing membrane system is intended to
perform as a continuous barrier against liquid water and to flash and discharge to the
exterior incidental water. It’s an inverted system with a membrane designed in accordance
with EN 13956 “Plastic and Rubber sheets for Roof Waterproofing” made of premium-
quality polyvinyl chloride PVC with an inlay of glass non-woven carrier for dimensional
stability.

B. Manufacturer shall provide all primary roofing/waterproofing materials that are physically
and chemically compatible when installed in accordance with manufacturer current
application requirements.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 55
 VOLUME III

1.5 Submittals
A. Submit two copies of manufacturer's literature including but not limited to: Product Data
Sheets (PDS), Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and appropriate Method of Statement
(MS).
B. A written confirmation from the Manufacturer that the proposed Roof Waterproofing
Subcontractor is certified and approved by the Manufacturer.

1.6 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturing qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified product shall be ISO
9001:2008 certified and have in existence a recognized ongoing quality assurance
program, independently audited on a regular basis.
B. Contractor qualifications: The PVC membrane and accessories, from the same
manufacturer to ensure compatibility, can only be applied by a Specialist Applicator,
qualified in the field of PVC membranes. The Specialist Applicator shall have a successful
track record of 5 years or more in similar applications and shall maintain qualified personnel
who have received product training by the PVC membrane manufacturer.

C. Materials should be installed in accordance with all safety and weather conditions required
by manufacturer or as modified by applicable rules and regulations of local, state and
federal authorities having jurisdiction. Consult Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for
complete handling recommendations.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. All materials must be delivered in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's
name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. Damaged material must be
removed from the site immediately.
B. Store all materials in a cool, dry, preferably air conditioned environment, off the ground and
protect from rain or excessive heat until ready for use.
C. Keep equipment that will be in contact with the product cool and away from direct sunlight.

1.8 Job Conditions

A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply material if it is raining or if such conditions appear
to be imminent.
B. Protection: Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to any surface near the work
zone.
C. Application in a controlled environment is highly recommended

1.9 Warranty
A. A project specific 15 year warranty for the performance of the specified product should be
agreed and confirmed in writing from the specialist applicator, backed by the product
manufacturer's standard product supply warranty for the same period'. This warranty should
form part of the tender bid documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturer
A. All materials shall be sourced from a single manufacturer.
B. The selected manufacturer must prove compatibility between all products in direct contact
with each other.

2.2 Materials
A. Inverted PVC Roofing Membrane System’s components:

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 56
 VOLUME III

1. Sarnafil®-G476-15 (Loose Laid PVC membrane): A multi-layer, synthetic roof

waterproofing membrane based on premium-quality polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with an
inlay of glass non-woven.
2. Sarnafil®-G410-15 L (Detailing membrane for up stands): A multi-layer, synthetic roof
waterproofing detailing membrane based on premium-quality polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
with an inlay of glass non-woven, with outstanding resistance to weathering, including
permanent UV irradiation.
3. XPS (Extruded Polystyrene Insulation): Install XPS, CFC and HCFC free, extruded
polystyrene insulation with a minimum density of (33/35/45Kg/m³) to achieve a ‘U’ value
of 0.3. The insulation is to be in accordance with BS EN 13164 and the SPRA Design
Guide, fastened with Sarnafast fasteners and DTL-70x70 pressure plates.
4. S-Felt 300 g/m2 (Geotextile layer): A White Geotextile based material of weight 300 g/m2
used beneath the PVC membrane to act as cushion layer and used above the membrane
to act as a protection layer.
5. S-Felt 80 g/m2 (Geotextile layer): A White Geotextile based material of weight 80 g/m2
used above the insulation layer to act as a filter layer.
6. S-Felt GK 400 (Protection and slip-layer): A Polypropylene (PP) based material of
density 400 g/m3 used as a protection and slip-layer beneath paving or poured
cementitious toppings to protect the PVC membrane or the insulation layer.
7. S-U Bar (Galvanized Metal Strip for membrane termination): A 1.0 mm thick galvanized
metal strip with reinforced bending edges for use as reinforced termination of roofing
membranes details.
8. S-Welding Cord PVC 4mm (Hot-air welded PVC Cord): Hot-air welded PVC Cord used
at perimeter fastening of roof systems with S-U bar to prevent the membrane from
slipping.
9. Sarnafast Insulation Washer DTL 70 x 70 (Membrane Washer Accessories):
Quadratic, zinc plated steel washer with rounded edges for attaching thermal insulation
to steel decks. Hole diameter 7.5 mm. Fastened with one fastener per washer.
10. Sarnacol 2170 (Adhesive for the detailing and up-stand PVC membrane): A nitrile
rubber-based one-pack contact adhesive used to bond Sarnafil® G 410-20 L
membranes on surfaces and perimeter and flashing areas.

2.3 Inverted PVC Membranes Built-up system:

A. Inverted PVC Membrane System: Sarnafil® G 476-15 system comprised of the following
layers:

1. A screed to falls layer shall be casted over the concrete deck after cleaning and
preparation to achieve the needed inclination of the roof for proper drainage. This screed
to falls shall not be a foamed concrete.
2. A geotextile layer S-Felt 300 g/m2 of 300g/m2 shall be loosely laid on top of the screed
to falls after proper inspection of the flatness of the surface.
3. An orange PVC membrane Sarnafil® G 476-15 to be loosely laid on the geotextile layer
and to be terminated with a galvanized metal strip S-U Bar and S-Welding Cord PVC
4mm at the edges and the corners of the roof.
4. Another layer of geotextile layer S-Felt 80 g/m2 of 80g/m2 shall be loosely laid on top of
the PVC membrane.
5. XPS Insulation board is loosely laid on the geotextile layer.
6. Another geotextile layer that works also as a protection layer of S-Felt GK 400 shall be
loosely laid on top of the insulation board before the casting of the final finish layer, e.g.
concrete paving or cementitous topping.
7. Up-stand and detailing shall be done with strips of the exposed PVC membrane
Sarnafil® G 410-15 L which is adhered to the surface with its adhesive of type
Sarnacol® 2170 adhesive.

B. Inverted Loosely Laid PVC Membrane: Physical properties complying with the following:

Sarnafil® G 476-15 (Loose Laid PVC membrane): Multi-layer, synthetic roof waterproofing
membrane based on premium-quality polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with an inlay of glass non-

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 57
 VOLUME III

woven carrier for dimensional stability suitable for use in hot and tropical climatic conditions with
the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Effective thickness EN 1948-2 1.5 mm
Dimensional stability EN 1107-2 ≤ 0.2%
Water tightness EN 1928 Pass
Water vapour transmission EN 1931 15’000
Joint Sheer resistance EN 12317-2 ≥ 500 N/50mm
Tensile Strength EN 12311-2 ≥ 8.5 N/mm2
Elongation EN12311-2 ≥ 180 %
Resistance to impact EN 12691 ≥ 500 mm on hard substrate
≥ 1’000 mm on soft substrate
Resistance to static load EN 12730 ≥ 20 kg on rigid & soft substrates

XPS (Extruded Polystyrene Insulation): to be laid in a staggered bond pattern (unless a

rebated board is used), with lightly butted joints and fastened with flat/telescopic pressure
plates and screw fasteners in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions or with a
minimum of 4 no. fasteners per board 3.7/m² whichever is the greater, fastened with
Sarnafast SBF 6.0 and Sarnafast Insulation Washer DTL 70x70 pressure plate and
should be with the following properties:
XPS, CFC and HCFC free, extruded polystyrene insulation with a minimum density of
(33/35/45Kg/m³) to achieve a ‘U’ value of 0.3. The insulation is to be in accordance with BS
EN 13164 and the SPRA Design Guide.

S-Felt 300g/m2 (Geotextile for membrane protection): A white geotextile based material
used as a separation layer between the PVC membrane and the substrate and also as a
cushion layer. It is also used above the PVC membrane as a protection layer in vertical as
well as horizontal applications with the following properties:
Technical Data Main requirement
Material PET
Colour White
Thickness ≥ 2.4 mm
Weight 300 g/m2
Tensile Strength ≥ 9.5 KN/m
Elongation at break 25 ~ 100%
CBR perforation strength ≥ 1.5 KN
Effective bore diameter O95 0.07 ~ 0.2 mm
Vertical permeability coefficient 0.001~1 cm/s
Tear Strength ≥ 0.24 KN

S-Felt 80g/m2 Long Fiber (Geotextile for membrane separation): A white geotextile based
material used above the insulation layer to act as a filter layer used for vertical as well as
horizontal applications with the following properties:
Technical Data Main requirement
Material PET
Colour White
Thickness ≥ 0.36 mm

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 58
 VOLUME III

Weight 80 g/m2
Elongation at break 5 ~ 50%
Force at break ≥ 100 N/5cm
Shrinkage rate ( +180OC 10 Mins) ≤ 3%

S-Felt GK 400 (Protection and slip-layer): A Polypropylene (PP) based material of density
400 g/m3 used as a protection and slip-layer beneath paving or poured cementitious
toppings to protect the PVC membrane, with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Material 100% Polypropylene PP (Foil PE)
Colour Coloured/Black
Thickness EN 9863 2.7 mm (± 10%)
Mass per unit area EN 9864 400 g/m2 (±10%)
Reaction to Fire EN 13501-1 Class E
Tensile Strength EN 10319 ≥ 360 N/50 mm (Longitudinal)
≥ 480 N/50 mm (Transversal)
Elongation at break EN 10319 ≤ 110 % (Longitudinal)
≤ 120% (Transversal)

S-U Bar (Galvanized Metal strip): of 1.0 mm thickness with reinforced bending edges and
shall comply with the following properties:
Technical Data Main requirement
Material Galvanized metal sheet
Colour Silver grey
Dimensions 2m L x 25mm W x 6mm H
Hole diameter 7.5 @ 50 cc

S-Welding Cord PVC 4mm (Hot-air welded PVC Cord):

Hot-air welded PVC Cord used at perimeter fastening of roof systems with S-U Bar to
prevent the membrane from slipping, with the following properties:
Technical Data Main requirement
Material PVC dry blend
Colour Red or Light grey
Dimension 4mm

Sarnafast SBF 6.0 (Carbon Steel Fastener): fasteners should have an ETA-08/0262
approval and comply with the following properties:
Technical Data Main requirement
Form Pre-Formed metal with smooth appearance
Material Hardened Carbon Steel
Thread 6.0 mm diameter buttress thread commences 2.5 mm
below the head on fasteners ≤ 70 mm; all fasteners ≤ 80
mm are with 75 mm thread lengths
Corrosion resistance Concentration SFW 2.0 S
(15 cycles Kesternich test) in accordance with DIN 50018
according to ETAG 006 - D.3.1.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 59
 VOLUME III

C. Detailing and Up-stands exposed PVC Membrane: Physical properties complying with the
following:

Sarnafil® G 410-15 L (Detailing and Up-stand exposed PVC membrane): Detailing

exposed PVC membrane with a unique lacquer finish, of thickness 1.5mm with the following
properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Effective thickness EN 1948-2 1.5 mm
Water tightness EN 1928 Pass
Reaction to fire EN ISO 11925- Class E
2
EN 13501-1

Water Vapour transmission EN 1931 15’000

properties

Joint Sheer resistance EN 12317-2 ≥ 500 N/50mm

Tensile Strength EN 12311-2 ≥ 8.5 N/mm2
Elongation EN12311-2 ≥ 180 %
Resistance to impact EN 12691 ≥ 600 mm on hard substrate
≥ 1’000 mm on soft substrate
Resistance to static load EN 12730 ≥ 20 kg on Rigid & Soft substrates
Dimensional Stability EN 1107-2 ≤ 0.2 %
UV Exposure EN 1297 Pass
(>5000 hrs / grade 0)
SRI ASTM 1980-01 106 SRI (White colour)
(Solar Reflectance Index)

Sarnacol 2170 (Adhesive for the detailing and up-stand PVC membranes): of coverage
rate that depends on the roughness and absorbency of the substrate and ranges from 300-
500 g/m2 on closed substrates to 1000 g/m2 on very absorbent substrates, with the following
properties:
Technical Data Main requirement
Chemical Base Nitrile rubber-based solvent-containing one-pack contact
adhesive.
Colour Red
Density (at +20°C) ~ 0.90 kg/lt
Setting time In the wet bonding process, you must allow a setting time of 15
minutes to 1 hour, depending on the weather conditions.
Final Curing Final strength is achieved after approx. 1 week and depends on
the temperature and humidity.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom+ Production Facility Extension + External

Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 60
 VOLUME III

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 Examination:
A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. Notify
Architect in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the work in an area shall mean
Installer’s acceptance of the substrate.
B. Surfaces shall be sound, dry, clean and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or other
contaminants.

3.2 Surface Preparation

A. For optimum system performance surfaces to be applied shall be completely dry and free
from containments such as dirt, dust, oil, surface treatments and old coatings.
B. High spots must be removed by e.g. grinding.
C. All dust, loose and friable material must be completely removed from all surfaces before
application of the product, preferably by brush and/or vacuum.
D. The selected method of preparation will depend on the surface condition, environmental
constraints and availability of services. The method may be selected on the basis of trial
areas, approved by the Contract Administrator.

3.2 Application
The specialist applicator must be fully familiar with installing PVC roofing membranes and have
a successful track record of 5 years or more. The Specialist Applicator shall maintain qualified
personnel who have received product training by the PVC membrane manufacturer

A. A Screed to falls shall be casted over the concrete deck after proper cleaning and
preparation, with the exact inclination needed for drainage water.

B. After the curing of the screed to falls and proper inspection of the smoothness of the surface,
a geotextile layer of 300g/m2 is laid on the screed to falls. It is a white geotextile based
material used as a cushion layer between the PVC membrane and the substrate and it is
loose laid with overlapping 8-10cm.

C. The PVC membrane of type Sarnafil® G 476 is loosely laid onto the geotextile with overlaps
that are electrically welded then tested for tightness.

D. These overlaps are welded by electric hot air welding equipment, such as manual hot air
welding machines and pressure rollers or automatic hot air welding machines with
controlled hot air temperature. Recommended type of equipment: Leister Triac PID (manual
welding) and Sarnamatic 661plus (automatic welding).

E. Welding parameters including temperature, machine speed, air flow, pressure and machine
settings must be evaluated, adapted and checked on site according to the type of
equipment and the climatic situation prior to welding. The effective width of welded overlaps
by hot air should be minimum 40 mm.

F. The seams must be mechanically tested with screw driver to ensure the integrity /
completion of the weld. Any imperfections must be rectified by hot air welding.

G. A geotextile layer of type 80g/m2 should be laid over PVC membrane Sarnafil® G 476 for
protection then an insulation layer of extruded polystyrene should be put on top.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 61
 VOLUME III
H. The insulation boards shall be laid in a staggered bond pattern with all board joints lightly
butt joined and leveled.

I. Another geotextile layer of 140g/m2 that works as a protection and slip-layer shall be loosely
laid on top of the insulation boards followed by the final finish layer, e.g. concrete paving or
cementitous topping.

J. The final finish layer of paving or cementitious covering shall be installed as soon as
possible above the protection and slip-layer of type S-Felt GK 400 as per designer’s
recommendation and should be of sufficient weight to withstand the anticipated wind
loadings.

K. The edges around the corner of the roof must be terminated using S-U Bar which is a
galvanized bended edged metal strip. S-U Bars fastened with Sarnafast SBF fasteners and
S-Welding Cord PVC shall be installed as directed by the manufacturer.

L. For up stands, strips of Sarnafil®-G 410 L membrane are used. Sarnafil®-G 410 L
membranes are permanently UV resistant and can be exposed. Flashing strips must be
fully adhered to up stands with Sarnacol®-2170 contact adhesive and welded to the field
membrane. Up-stands are required to be installed to a height of 150mm above finished
level.

M. Flashings and junctions must always be protected against ponding, seepage of rain water
and entrance of spray water.

N. For flashing and detailing, the gap on top should be filled with a joint sealant of type
Sikaflex® Construction+ which is a one part, moisture curing, elastic joint sealant suitable
for movement joints. Sikaflex® Construction+ must be tooled firmly against joint sides to
ensure good adhesion.

3.3 Inspection
Prior to final acceptance of the waterproofing work an inspection shall be made. The Contractor
and the Principal shall both be represented and they shall sign an agreed inspection report. This
report shall include:

- Names of the Contractor and the responsible personnel

- Dates when work was carried out
- Type of substrate
- Condition of surface before preparation
- Tools and methods used to prepare surface
- Condition after preparation
- Normal operating temperature
- Maximum operating temperature
- Weather and ambient conditions
- Batch numbers of the materials installed
- Application periods
- Information on systems being applied
- Mixing and testing prior to application
- Application techniques
- Type of quality control checks carried out, and results.

3.3.1 Any damage discovered during inspection should be repaired as directed by the latest
version of the product data sheet.

3.4 Completion
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 62
 VOLUME III

Upon completion of the roofing/waterproofing works leave finished work in a neat clean condition
and protect the waterproofing as soon as practical to avoid damage and install the full build up
including but not limited to the items below:
- Loose laid drainage boards, as described.
- Build ups for roads / paths / planted areas as described on the project drawings.

6.7 DAMP-PROOFING OF SUBSTRUCTURE – WAREHOUSE EXTENSION, CUSTOMER SERVICE

CENTER AND WARE HOUSE

1) Rubberized bitumen liquid emulsion Damp-proofing for Footings and under-ground

concrete structures of type Igasol® Emulsion BA-6510 – 3 COATS (Specification to be
provided by SIKA)

3) Concrete for substructure shall be with water proof additive as per approved mix design.

3) Construction joints to be provided with approved water bar. Concrete for substructure shall be
with water proof additive as per approved mix design.

Part 1 - General

1.01 Summary
A. This specification describes the rubberized bitumen liquid emulsion damp proofing coating
for concrete structures and footings.

1.02 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturing qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified product shall be ISO
9001:2008 certified and have in existence a recognized ongoing quality assurance
program, independently audited on a regular basis.
B. Contractor qualifications: We recommend the use of a Specialist Applicator, qualified in the
field of specialist flooring with a successful track record of 5 years or more. The contractor
shall maintain qualified personnel who have received product training by a Sika
representative.
C. Materials should be installed in accordance with all safety and weather conditions required
by manufacturer or as modified by applicable rules and regulations of local, state and
federal authorities having jurisdiction. Consult Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for
complete handling recommendations.

1.03 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. All materials must be delivered in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's
name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. Damaged material must be
removed from the site immediately.
B. Store all materials in a cool, dry, preferably air conditioned environment, off the ground and
protect from rain or excessive heat until ready for use.
C. Keep equipment that will be in contact with the product cool and away from direct sunlight.

1.04 Job Conditions

A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply material if it is raining or if such conditions appear
to be imminent. Minimum application temperature should be 45ºF (7ºC) and rising.
B. Protection: Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to the new floor finish until full
mechanical & chemical properties have been achieved.
C. Application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.

1.05 Submittals
A. Submit two copies of manufacturer's literature including but not limited to: Product Data
Sheets (PDS), Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and appropriate Method of Statement
(MS).

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 63
 VOLUME III

1.06 Warranty
A. A project specific warranty for the performance of the specified product should be agreed
and confirmed in writing from the specialist applicator, backed by the product
manufacturer's standard product supply warranty for the same period'. This warranty
should form part of the tender bid documents.

Part 2 - Products
2.01 Manufactures
A. All material shall be sourced from a single manufacturer.
B. The selected manufacturer must prove compatibility between all products in direct contact
with each other.
2.01 Materials
A. Igasol® Emulsion BA-6510 (Rubberized Bitumen Emulsion Damp proofing): rubberized
bitumen liquid emulsion with excellent adhesion, which dries to a tough, seamless, highly
flexible, waterproof and vapour proof membrane for concrete structures.

2.02 Specification:
A. Igasol® Emulsion BA-6510 (Rubberized Bitumen Emulsion):
Rubberized bitumen liquid emulsion coating for footings and concrete structures with the
following properties:
Technical Data Main requirement
Density ~ 1.1 kg/lt at 25OC
Solid Content ~ 65% by weight
Rubber Content 10% minimum on dry film
VOC Limits < 30 g/lt (ASTM D2369
Flash point Non-Flammable
Sagging Properties Non Sagging (ASTM D2939)
Water Resistance No blistering, no loss of adhesion, no sign of re-
emulsification (ASTM D2939)
Part 3 – Execution

3.1 Areas of use:

Typically used for damp-proofing of under-ground concrete structures; such as:
A. Footings.
B. Shallow foundations.
C. Under-ground tank structures.

3.2 Surface Preparation

3.2.1 Concrete surfaces particularly if new, should be fully cured with a maximum residual
relative humidity (RH) of 75%, be clean and free from contamination.
3.2.2 All surfaces must be sound, even, free from dust, loose particles and any contamination.
3.2.3 May be applied to damp but not waterlogged surfaces.
3.2.4 Hot and very dry, porous concrete surfaces must be primed by diluting lgasol® Emulsion
BA-6510 with clean water at 1:1 ratio (by weight).

3.3 Mixing and Application

3.3.1 Mixing & application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.
3.3.2 Recommended minimum ambient application temperature is 45ºF (7ºC) and rising, with
a substrate temperature at least 3 ºC above dew point.
3.3.3 If a primer coat is applied, allow it to dry completely before applying subsequent coats.
3.3.4 Apply evenly in one direction using a soft broom or long haired brush. A two-coat
application at right angles to each other is recommended to avoid possible gaps in the
film.
3.3.5 Each coat must be allowed to dry before applying the next one.
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 64
 VOLUME III
3.3.6 In wet areas, where a key to subsequent layers (e.g. screed, tile bedding, etc.) is required,
blind the fresh top layer with clean, sharp, silica sand.

3.3.7 All products should be mixed and applied in accordance with the current Product Data
Sheets (PDS) and Method Statements (MS).

3.4 Cleaning
3.4.1 Clean all tools and equipment with Proprietary Solvent immediately after use. All
hardened or cured material can only be removed mechanically.
3.4.2 Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of
spillovers onto adjacent areas.

6.9 WATER PROOFING OF WET AREAS

Cold applied Waterproofing membrane of Wet areas using one component highly elastic polyurethane
coating of type Sikalastic-152 AE with SikaCeram FLX 23 (tile adhesive, C2 TE) and SikaCeram 545
(Wet area wall plaster, tile adhesive and grout spec to be provided by the SIKA)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Document

A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 Summary
A. This specification covers the application of a cold-applied, 1-component, waterborne and
highly elastic liquid applied waterproofing solution for wet areas on structural concrete or
other approved substrates by manufacturer.
B. The described product meets the requirements of:
LEED category 5 – Indoor Environmental Quality (EQ): EQ Credit 4.2 – Low Emitting
Materials, paints and coatings.
C. Sections Included:
12. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete.
13. Section 07 14 00: Fluid Applied Waterproofing.
14. Section 07 14 16: Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing.
15. Section 07 92 13: Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

1.3 Submittals
A. Submit two copies of manufacturer's literature including but not limited to: Product Data
Sheets (PDS), and appropriate Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
B. A written confirmation from the Manufacturer that the proposed Waterproofing
Subcontractor is certified and approved by the Manufacturer.

1.4 Standards reference:

ETAG-005 PART 8 Specific stipulations for kids based on water dispersible polymers

EN 13501-1 Reaction to fire

LEED EQ Credit 4.2 Low –Emitting Materials: Paints & Coatings: VOC < 100 gm/lt

EN ISO 2811-1 Density

1.5 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturing qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified product shall be ISO

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 65
 VOLUME III
9001:2008 certified and have in existence a recognized ongoing quality assurance
program, independently audited on a regular basis.

B. Contractor qualifications: The one component, cold-applied, waterborne liquid applied

waterproofing membrane and primer, from the same manufacturer to ensure compatibility,
can only be applied by a Specialist Applicator, qualified in the field of specialist coatings.
The specialist applicator must have a successful track record of 5 years or more. The
Specialist Applicator shall maintain qualified personnel who have received product training
by the polyurethane membrane manufacturer.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 66
 VOLUME III

C. Materials should be installed in accordance with all safety and weather conditions required
by manufacturer or as modified by applicable rules and regulations of local, state and
federal authorities having jurisdiction. Consult Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for
complete handling recommendations.

1.6 Job Conditions

A. Minimum substrate and ambient temperature should be 8ºC and maximum should be +35
ºC.
B. Protection: Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to any surface near the work zone
due to the spray application of the specified material.
C. Follow condition limits during application and drying recommended in the TDS.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. All materials must be delivered in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's
name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. Damaged material must be
removed from the site immediately.
B. Store all materials in a cool, dry, preferably air conditioned environment, off the ground and
protect from rain or excessive heat until ready for use.
C. Condition the specified product as recommended in the latest technical data sheet (TDS).

1.8 Warranty
A. A project specific warranty for the performance of the specified product should be agreed
and confirmed in writing from the specialist applicator, backed by the product
manufacturer's standard product supply warranty for the same period'. This warranty should
form part of the tender bid documents.
B. A single manufacturer is required to guarantee the interface between the substructure
waterproofing and the superstructure waterproofing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufactures
A. All materials shall be sourced from a single manufacturer.
B. The selected manufacturer must prove compatibility between all products in direct contact
with each other.
C. Due to the complexity of the building the integrity and final quality, durability and water
tightness of the waterproofing system(s) can only be assured if the Contractor takes over
full responsibility for the entire external waterproofing works and assigns one Manufacturer
for the supply of all necessary materials for these associated works and one experienced
Specialist Applicator Subcontractor for the application of the entire waterproofing
systems(s). Both Manufacturer and Specialist Applicator Waterproofing Subcontractor are
to be included by the Contractor in the final design of the details and all relevant
construction steps and application processes including quality management, testing,
inspection, and final acceptance at site on completion of the waterproofing works.

2.2 Materials
A. Sikalastic®-WR (Liquid-applied Waterproofing Membrane): One-component, cold-
applied, waterborne liquid applied waterproofing membrane with high elastic properties.

B. Sika® Ceram-201 LM (Tile Adhesive bonding material): A two-component high

performance, latex modified, non-shrinkage, and water-resistance cementitious tile
adhesive that can be used, for bonding ceramic tiles in internal and external situations, for
vertical as well as horizontal applications. It complies with the requirements for EN 12004-
Class C2.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 67
 VOLUME III

C. Sika® Ceram 502 TG (Tile grout material): Polymer modified cementitious tile grout.

2.3 Cold Fluid-Applied waterproofing built-up System:

A. Cold Fluid-Applied waterproofing system: Sikalastic®-WR system comprised of the
following layers:

1. Liquid Applied Waterproofing Membrane of type Sikalastic®-WR which is cold applied

on the clean prepared substrate.
2. Fixing of the ceramic tiles using cementitious, polymer modified mortar adhesive of
type Sika® Ceram-201 LM.
3. Using non-shrinkage tile grout material for filling the gaps between the tiles of type
Sika® Ceram 502 TG.

B. Liquid applied waterproofing membrane: Physical properties complying with the following:
Sikalastic®-WR (Liquid-applied Waterproofing Membrane): Eco-friendly Liquid Applied
Waterproofing Solution Based on Sika Co-Elastic Technology (CET) for the waterproofing
of bathrooms, shower rooms, kitchens and plumbing rooms beneath a cement screed with
hard protection (eg. Ceramic tiles or stone materials) and comply with the following
properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Description One-component, cold-applied, waterborne
liquid applied waterproofing membrane with
high elastic properties
Chemical Base Polyurethane modified Acrylic Dispersion
Density EN ISO 2811-1 1.35 kg/lt at 23OC
Solid Content 48% by volume &
65% by weight
VOC Content < 100 gm/lt
Tensile Strength DIN 53504 1.5 N/mm2 (free film)
Elongation at Break DIN 53504 350% (free film)
Total Thickness 0.5 mm

C. Tile adhesive system: Physical properties complying with the following:

Sika® Ceram-201 LM (Tile Adhesive bonding material): A two-component high

performance, latex modified, non-shrinkage, and water-resistance cementitious tile
adhesive, supplied ready to use. It can be used for bonding ceramic tiles in internal and
external situations, for vertical as well as horizontal applications with the following
properties:
Technical Data Main requirement
Density Fresh wet density ˜ 1.7 ± 0.10 kg/lt (23OC)
Packing 30kg set (A+B)
Aggregate Grading Dmax: approximately 0.5 mm according to EN 12192-1
Pot life ~ 30 minutes @ 25OC
Layer Thickness Min 1.5 mm
Max 5.0 mm
Compressive Strength ~ 4.0 N/mm2 after 24 hours
(W/P = 0.21) ~ 12.0 N/mm2 after 7 days
~ 15.0 N/mm2 after 28 days

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 68
 VOLUME III

Theoretical Coverage ~3–4 kg per m2 dependent on tile size (20x20cm –

40x40cm)

Sika® Ceram 502 TG (Tile grout material): One component, polymer modified, and water
resistant, cementitious tile jointing grout for finer joints up to 4 mm. It is particularly used in
conjunction with Sika® Ceram tile adhesives with the following properties:
Technical Data Main requirement
Density ˜ 1.8kg/lt (23OC)
Packing 20kg bags
Compressive Strength ~20 N/mm2 after 28 days (+25OC & 65% r.h.)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 Examination:
A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. Notify
Architect in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the work in an area shall mean
Installer’s acceptance of the substrate.
B. Areas of use:
2. Wet areas.
3. Toilets.
4. Balconies.
5. Kitchens.
6. Terraces.

3.2 Surface Preparation

3.2.1 For optimum system performance surfaces to be applied shall be completely dry and free
from containments such as dirt, dust, oil, surface treatments and old coatings.

3.2.2 New concrete should be cured for at least 28 days and should have a pull-off strength ≥
1.5 N/mm2.

3.2.3 Cementitious or mineral based substrates must be prepared mechanically using abrasive
blast cleaning or scarifying equipment to remove cement laitance and to achieve an open
textured surface

3.2.4 Loose friable material and weak concrete must be completely removed and surface defects
such as blowholes and voids must be fully exposed

3.2.5 Repairs to the substrate, filling of blowholes / voids and surface leveling must be carried
out using appropriate products from the waterproofing membrane manufactures range.

3.2.6 High spots must be removed by e.g. grinding.

3.2.7 Outgassing is a naturally occurring phenomenon of concrete that can produce pinholes in
subsequently applied coatings. The concrete must be carefully assessed for moisture
content, air entrapment, and surface finish prior to any coating work. Installing the
membrane either when the concrete temperature is falling or stable can reduce
outgassing. It is generally beneficial, therefore, to apply the embedment coat in the late
afternoon or evening.

3.2.8 All dust, loose and friable material must be completely removed from all surfaces before
application of the product, preferably by brush and/or vacuum.

3.2.9 The selected method of preparation will depend on the surface condition, environmental
constraints and availability of services. The method may be selected on the basis of trial
areas, approved by the Contract Administrator.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 69
 VOLUME III

3.2.10 Protect any areas not to be coated from abrasive shot blasting.

3.3 Application
3.3.1 The waterproofing materials are delivered ready to use.

3.3.2 Coverage rates of primer coat may vary from the values in the manufacturers’ product
data sheet depending on the roughness of the substrate.

3.3.3 Prior to application of the primer, confirm substrate moisture content to be < 6% pbw with
relative air humidity of 80% maximum and surface temperature to during application to
be at least +3OC above dew point.

3.3.4 Prior to application, stir the one component waterproofing material thoroughly for 1 minute
in order to achieve a homogeneous mixture. Over mixing must be avoided to minimize
air entrainment.

3.3.5 The primer coat is applied by roller using the waterproofing material diluted with 10%
water and with consumption as mentioned in the latest PDS (product data sheet) of the
material.

3.3.6 Prior to the application of the waterproofing coats, the priming coat must have cured tack-
free. Protect adjacent areas from splashes, over painting, damage etc. with an adhesive
tape or plastic.

3.3.7 Apply the first coat of the waterproofing material over the cured tack-free primer with
coverage of approximately 0.7-0.9 kg/m2 or as mentioned in the latest data sheet of the
material and ensure that there are no bubbles or creases.
3.3.8 Apply a second coat of 0.7 kg/m2 or as mentioned in the latest data sheet of the material
on the dry first coat to achieve the required total thickness of 0.5 mm membrane film
thickness.

3.3.9 Waiting time between the two coats is approximately 4 hours at a temperature of +30OC
and relative humidity of 50%.

3.3.10 After full cure of the membrane, a cement screed is applied over the waterproofing
membrane and finished with tiling as per the architects recommendation.

3.3.11 Before applying the tile adhesive material, make sure the screed is cured and the
surface of the screed is completely clean and free from dirt. Any contaminations on the
screed will affect the adhesion of the tiles.

3.3.12 The tile adhesive is applied using a notched trowel onto the substrate. Choose the
size of trowel that will give the right thickness on the back of the tile. As a guide:
• For mosaics up to 5 x 5 cm, use a 3 mm notched trowel.
• For normal ceramic tiles (< 200 x 200), use a 6 mm notched trowel.
• For large tiles, use a 9 mm notched trowel.
• For tiles larger than 300 x 300 or for stringent requirements (i.e. the tiles are to be
polished, exposed to heavy loads, etc.), a "buttering" technique must be used.
Apply a uniform layer of tile adhesive by trowel in small areas at the recommended
thickness. Then, immediately, adjust the thickness using a notched trowel. Finally, place
the ceramic tile, pressing it firmly into the mortar.

3.3.13 Apply tile grout onto the tile surface and fully pack the joints using diagonal strokes.
Use a hard rubber grouting float. Excess grout should be cleaned off the tile surface with
a wet sponge while the grout is still fresh. Control joints should be used at all times to
ensure uniformity of joint widths.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 70
 VOLUME III
3.4 Inspection
3.4.1 Dry film thickness (DFT):
DFT has to be measured in accordance to ISO 2808 and is to be no less than 0.5mm for
the polyurethane waterproofing membrane.

3.5 Cleaning
3.5.1 Clean all tools and equipment with water immediately after use. All hardened or cured
material can only be removed mechanically.
3.5.2 Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of spill
overs onto adjacent areas.

6.10 WATER PROOFING OF SUBSTRUCTURE - WAREHOUSE

6.11 WATER PROOFING OF DOMESTIC & FIRE FIGHTING TANKS

SPRAY APPLIED WATERPROOFING SYSTEM FOR DOMESTIC WATER TANKS USING

HIGH QUALITY PURE POLYUREA (Approved by DCL, coating to be changed to RFP)
LIQUID APPLIED MEMBRANE OF TYPE SIKALASTIC®-8800 SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Document

A.Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 Summary
A. This specification covers the application of an elastic, 100% solids, very fast curing colored
pure polyurea liquid applied membrane system for concrete structures.
B. Related Work; the following items are not included in this section and are specified under
the designated Sections:
1. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Section 07 92 13: Elastomeric Joint Sealants

1.3 Standards reference:

DIN 53 504 Tensile Strength.

EN 196-1 Flexural Strength.

DIN 53 504 Elongation at Break.

DIN 53 505 Shore D Hardness.

DIN EN ISO 2811-1 Density.

DIN 4095 Planning, design and installation of drainage systems.

1.4 Submittals
A. Submit two copies of manufacturer's literature including but not limited to: Product Data
Sheets (PDS), Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and project Method of Statement (MS).
B. A written confirmation from the Manufacturer that the proposed Waterproofing
Subcontractor is certified and approved by the Manufacturer.

1.5 Quality Assurance

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 71
 VOLUME III

A. Manufacturing qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified product shall be ISO

9001:2008 certified and have in existence a recognized ongoing quality assurance
program, independently audited on a regular basis.

B. Contractor qualifications: The two component very fast curing polyurea and primer, from
the same manufacturer to ensure compatibility, can only be applied by a Specialist
Applicator, qualified in the field of specialist coatings. The specialist applicator must be fully
familiar with the operation of the required heated, high pressure, plural component spray
equipment and have a successful track record of 5 years or more. The Specialist Applicator
shall maintain qualified personnel who have received product training by the polyurea
membrane manufacturer.

C. Materials should be installed in accordance with all safety and weather conditions required
by manufacturer or as modified by applicable rules and regulations of local, state and
federal authorities having jurisdiction. Consult Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for
complete handling recommendations.

1.6 Job Conditions

A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply material if it is raining or if such conditions appear
to be imminent. The substrate temperature should be at least 3ºC above dew point, and
rising.
B. Protection: Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to any surface near the work zone
due to the spray application of the specified material.
C. Application in a controlled environment is highly recommended

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. All materials must be delivered in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's
name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. Damaged material must be
removed from the site immediately.
B. Store all materials in a cool, dry, preferably air conditioned environment, off the ground and
protect from rain or excessive heat until ready for use.
C. Keep equipment that will be in contact with the product cool and away from direct sunlight.

1.8 Warranty
A. A project specific 10 year warranty for the performance of the specified product should be
agreed and confirmed in writing from the specialist applicator, backed by the product
manufacturer's standard product supply warranty for the same period'. This warranty should
form part of the tender bid documents.
B. A single manufacturer is required to guarantee the interface between the main
waterproofing system on the slab and the architectural waterproofing system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufactures
A. All materials shall be sourced from a single manufacturer.
B. The selected manufacturer must prove compatibility between all products in direct contact
with each other.

2.2 Fluid applied waterproofing membrane system

A. Liquid applied waterproofing membrane system with primer coat for domestic water tanks
using: Sikalastic®-8800 system comprised of the following layers:
1. Sikafloor®161-: 2-part, solvent-free epoxy resin primer.
2. Sikalastic®-8800: Two part, elastic, 100% solids, very fast curing and coloured pure
polyurea liquid applied membrane with good chemical resistance.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 72
 VOLUME III

B. Liquid applied waterproofing membrane system: An elastic, 100% solids, very fast curing
and coloured pure polyurea liquid applied membrane with a primer coat used for concrete
structures with physical properties complying with the following:

Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): primer shall be a 2-part, solvent-free epoxy resin binder
for priming, applied with coverage rate of approximately 0.25 – 0.55 kg/m2. It shall be
broadcast with quartz sand 0.3-0.8 mm, sourced from the same manufacture as the
polyurethane membrane, with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Density DIN EN ISO 2811-1 1.4 kg/litre mixed resin
Solid Content 100% by volume & weight
Bond Strength ISO 4624 > 1.5 N/mm2 (concrete failure)
Shore D Hardness DIN 53 505 76
LEED Rating EQ credit 4.2: Low Emitting Conforms
Materials: Paints & Coatings

VOC Content SCAQMD Method 304-91 < 100 g/litre

Sikalastic®-8800: The high performance waterproofing membrane to concrete surfaces

shall be a spray applied, of coverage rate ~ 1.00 kg/m2/mm (with minimum 2 mm thickness)
with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Mixed Density DIN EN ISO 2811-1 1.00kg / litre
Solid Content > 99%
Curing Speed 5-10 seconds
@ 8-45OC substrate temperature
Tensile Strength DIN 53 504 >18 N/mm2 (28days /23OC )
Shore A Hardness > 50
Elongation at Break DIN 53 504 ~ 350% (28days /23OC )

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 Examination
A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. Notify
Architect in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the work in an area shall mean
Installer’s acceptance of the substrate.
B. Areas of use:
7. Bund lining for water retaining structures.
8. Waterproofing of water features and domestic water tanks.
9. Tank, bund and pit lining in sewage and waste water treatment plants.

3.2 Surface Preparation

3.2.1 For optimum system performance surfaces to be applied shall be completely dry and free
from containments such as dirt, dust, oil, surface treatments and old coatings.

3.2.2 Concrete substrates must be mechanically prepared using abrasive blast cleaning or
milling to remove cement laitance, existing coatings and achieve a gripping profile that is
clean, dry and free from laitance and any other form of surface contamination. Vacuum
blasting or similar techniques are ideally suited.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 73
 VOLUME III

3.2.3 Weak concrete must be removed and surface defects such as blowholes and voids must
be fully exposed.

3.2.4 Repairs to the substrate, filling of blowholes / voids and surface leveling must be carried
out using appropriate products from the waterproofing membrane manufactures range.
The concrete or screed substrate has to be primed or leveled in order to achieve an even
surface

3.2.5 High spots must be removed by e.g. grinding.

3.2.6 All dust, loose and friable material must be completely removed from all surfaces before
application of the product, preferably by brush and/or vacuum.

3.2.7 The selected method of preparation will depend on the surface condition, environmental
constraints and availability of services. The method may be selected on the basis of trial
areas, approved by the Contract Administrator.

3.2.8 Protect any areas not to be coated from abrasive shot blasting.

3.3 Blast Clean Equipment

3.3.1 The compressed air supply used for blast cleaning shall be free from water and oil.
Adequate separators and traps shall be provided, installed in the coolest part of the
system. They shall be emptied regularly to prevent carryover of water and oil.

3.3.2 Accumulations of oil and moisture shall be removed from the air receiver by regular
purging.

3.3.3 Abrasive blast cleaning equipment shall be an intrinsically safe construction and
equipped with a remote shut-off valve triggered by the release of a dead man's handle at
the blasting nozzle.

3.3.4 Where air-operated equipment is used, the operator's hood or head gear shall be
ventilated by clean, cool air served through a regulator filter, to prevent blast cleaning
residues from being inhaled.

3.4 Application
The specialist applicator must be fully familiar with the operation of the required heated, high
pressure, plural component spray equipment and have a successful track record of 5 years or
more. The Specialist Applicator shall maintain qualified personnel who have received product
training by the polyurethane membrane manufacturer

3.4.1 The waterproofing materials are delivered ready to use.

3.4.2 Coverage rates of primer coat may vary from the values in the manufacturers’ product
data sheet depending on the roughness of the substrate.

3.4.3 Prior to application of the primer, confirm substrate moisture content, relative humidity
and dew point. Moisture content of the substrate must be < 4% pbw.

3.4.4 The epoxy-based primer is applied onto the substrate in order to close the pores and to
be able to apply a blister-free waterproofing layer. Primer should not just be rolled or
poured. In order to avoid the formation of pinholes, the primer must be brushed into the
concrete surface, if necessary in two applications taking care to ensure good wetting of
the substrate but avoiding puddles on the surface. After each application broadcast with
quartz sand 0.3 – 0.8 mm. The quartz sand must be firmly bounded (grain and grain) in
the primer and excess material must be removed after the curing of the primer.

3.4.5 It is recommended to apply the primer at falling structure temperatures.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 74
 VOLUME III

3.4.6 Make sure, that all substrate requirements are met, such as temperature and moisture
content of the prepared substrate like written in manufacturer´s product data sheets.

3.4.7 Make sure, that the primer coat or optional scratch coat is free of pores and blow holes.

3.4.8 The waterproofing membrane has to be applied by 2-component hot spray airless
application in successive passes until the targeted wet film thickness is achieved.

3.4.9 Extra coats of material shall be applied on the areas where the shape and/or plane of
application result in thinly applied coatings, e.g. at edges, welds, corners etc. To
compensate for these effects, stripe coats of paints shall be applied (normally applied first
so that they will be covered by the full coat).

3.4.10 Apply following coat within recommended over-coating time written in the manufacturer’s
product data sheet.

3.4.11 The correct spray tips, air pressure, temperature etc, as recommended by the spray
equipment manufacturer and equipment supplier, shall be used.

3.4.12 The waterproofing membrane shall be applied uniformly and completely over the entire
surface. All runs and sags shall be brushed out immediately.

3.4.13 Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of spillages
onto adjacent areas.

3.5 Abrasives
3.5.1 Dry film thickness (DFT):
DFT has to be measured in accordance to ISO 2808 and is to be no less than 2mm for
the polyurethane waterproofing membrane.

3.5.2 Adhesion:
The adhesion of the primer after curing shall be determined by a pull-off test described
in ISO 4624 to meet a minimum rate of 1.5 N/mm2 or failure within substrate.

3.6 Inspection
Prior to final acceptance of the waterproofing work an inspection shall be made. The Contractor
and the Principal shall both be represented and they shall sign an agreed inspection report. This
report shall include:

- Names of the Contractor and the responsible personnel

- Dates when work was carried out
- Type of substrate
- Condition of surface before preparation
- Tools and methods used to prepare surface
- Condition after preparation
- Normal operating temperature
- Maximum operating temperature
- Weather and ambient conditions
- Batch numbers of the materials installed
- Application periods
- Information on systems being applied
- Mixing and testing prior to application
- Application techniques
- Type of quality control checks carried out, and results.

3.6.1 Any damage discovered during inspection should be repaired as directed by the latest
version of the product data sheet. In general damaged areas of the high performance
polyurethane coating should be cut out, a primer applied (Sikalastic-810) and new spray
applied waterproofing polyurethane installed over the damaged areas. It is important that

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 75
 VOLUME III

the same manufacturer supplies the primer for the repair in order to guarantee the
adhesion.

3.7 Completion
Upon completion of the waterproofing works leave finished work in a neat clean condition and
protect the waterproofing as soon as practical to avoid damage and protect the polyurethane
from ‘UV’ degradation by installing the full build up including but not limited to the items below:

- Loose laid drainage boards, as described.

- Build ups for roads / paths / planted areas as described on the project drawings.

6.12 WATER PROOFING OF GRP/FRP / SOAK WELL

POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENTITIOUS MORTAR SLURRY FOR WATERPROOFING OF

DOMESTIC GRP/FRP USED FOR FIRE-FIGHTING AND WATERING PLANTS OF TYPE
SIKATOP® SEAL-107 SYSTEM

Part 1 - General

1.01 Summary
A. This specification describes the polymer modified cement-based two part, waterproofing
mortar slurry for water tanks used for potable water supply stations.
B. Sections Included:
1. Division 07 16 00: Cementitious and Reactive Waterproofing.
2. Section 07 16 13: Polymer Modified Cement Waterproofing.

1.02 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturing qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified product shall be ISO
9001:2008 certified and have in existence a recognized ongoing quality assurance
program, independently audited on a regular basis.

B. Contractor qualifications: We recommend the use of a Specialist Applicator, qualified in the

field of waterproofing & coatings with a successful track record of 5 years or more. The
contractor shall maintain qualified personnel who have received product training by a Sika
representative.

C. Materials should be installed in accordance with all safety and weather conditions required
by manufacturer or as modified by applicable rules and regulations of local, state and
federal authorities having jurisdiction. Consult Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for
complete handling recommendations.

1.03 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. All materials must be delivered in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's
name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. Damaged material must be
removed from the site immediately.
B. Store all materials in a cool, dry, preferably air conditioned environment, off the ground and
protect from rain or excessive heat until ready for use.
C. Keep equipment that will be in contact with the product cool and away from direct sunlight.
1.04 Job Conditions
A. Environmental Conditions: Minimum application temperature should be 8ºC and rising.
B. Protection: Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to the waterproofing finish until
full mechanical & chemical properties have been achieved.
C. Application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.

1.05 Submittals

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 76
 VOLUME III

A. Submit two copies of manufacturer's literature including but not limited to: Product Data
Sheets (PDS), and appropriate Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

1.06 Warranty
A. A project specific warranty for the performance of the specified product should be agreed
and confirmed in writing from the specialist applicator, backed by the product
manufacturer's standard product supply warranty for the same period'. This warranty should
form part of the tender bid documents.

Part 2 - Products

2.01 Manufactures
A. All material shall be sourced from a single manufacturer.
B. The selected manufacturer must prove compatibility between all products in direct contact
with each other.

2.01 Materials
A. SikaTop® Seal-107 (Cementitious Waterproofing Mortar Slurry): Two part polymer
modified cement-based waterproofing mortar slurry for water tanks used for potable water
supply stations.

2.02 Specification:
A. SikaTop® Seal-107 (Cementitious Waterproofing Mortar Slurry):
Two part polymer modified cement-based waterproofing mortar slurry for water tanks used
for potable water supply stations, with the following properties:

Technical Data Standard Main requirement

Chemical Base Part A: Liquid polymer & additives
Part B: Portland cement, selected
graded aggregates & admixtures
Density ~ 2.00 kg/lt (fresh mortar @ 25OC)
Thermal Expansion 13 x 10-6 per OC
Carbon Dioxide Diffusion ~ 35.000
Coefficient (µCO2)
Water Vapour Diffusion ~ 500
Coeifficient (µH2O)

Compressive Strength EN 196-1 ~ 20 N/mm2 @ 3 days

~35 N/mm2 @ 28 days
Flexural Strength EN 196-1 ~ 6 N/mm2 @ 3 days
~ 4.5 N/mm2 @ 28 days
Tensile Strength DIN ~ 3.2 N/mm2 @ 14 days / Cured in water
53455 ~ 4.5 N/mm2 @ 14 days / Cured in air

Bond Strength ~ 1.0 N/mm2

E-Modulus Static: ~ 8.4 kN/mm2

Part 3 – Execution

3.1 Surface Preparation

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 77
 VOLUME III

3.1.1 Concrete surfaces must be structurally sound and free of all traces of contaminants, loose and
friable particles, cement laitance, oils and grease etc. The concrete “pull off” (tensile
adhesive) strength must be > 1.0 N/mm2.

3.1.2 The substrate must be prepared by suitable mechanical preparation techniques such as
high pressure water jetting, blast cleaning, scabblers etc. and properly pre-wetted to a
saturated surface dry condition.

3.1.3 For pore / blowhole filling, Blast clean to remove all contaminants including from within
the pores / blowholes. And for leveling mortar, Prepare and clean all surfaces by suitable
mechanical means such as abrasive blast cleaning or equivalent to ensure cement
laitance, surface contamination and all existing coatings are removed and all blowholes
and honeycombed areas are exposed.

3.1.4 The resultant surface must be profiled to achieve maximum bond strength.

3.2 Mixing and Application

3.2.1 Mixing & application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.
Minimum ambient application temperature is 8ºC and rising.

3.2.2 The polymer modified cement-based waterproofing mortar slurry is mechanically mixed
using a forced action mixer or in a clean drum using a drill and paddle (max. 500 rpm).

3.2.3 Stir Part A (liquid) thoroughly before pouring then put half of the quantity in a clean mixing
container.

3.2.4 Add Part B (powder) slowly to half of the part A in the clean container and keep slowly
adding the powder while mixing continuously.

3.2.5 Add the remaining portion of Part A and continue mixing until a uniform lump free
consistency is achieved (~ 3 minutes).

3.2.6 Don’t add any further additive. Mix the whole quantity (liquid & powder) in order to avoid
inhomogeneous distribution of particles and aggregate.

3.2.7 The surface of the substrate must be pre-wetted to a saturated surface dry condition
before application.

3.2.8 Apply the mixed SikaTop® Seal-107 either mechanically, by spray, or by hand using a stiff
brush. Make sure, it’s applied in the same direction. Then apply the 2nd coat of SikaTop®
Seal-107, by brush in crosswise direction to the first application as soon as first coat has
hardened.

3.2.9 If a mortar is needed, then SikaTop® Seal-107 is applied by trowel but the mix showed
by done with a 10% reduction of Part A (~ 1 A : 4.5 B). Then apply the 2nd coat of
SikaTop® Seal-107 as soon as the first coat has hardened.

3.2.10 When applying several layers, wait for the first layer to harden first before applying
the second one with consideration to the waiting time between coats.

3.3.11 All products should be mixed and applied in accordance with the current Product Data
Sheets (PDS) and Method Statements (MS).

3.4 Cleaning
3.2.1 Clean all tools and equipment with clean water immediately after use. All hardened or
cured material can only be removed mechanically.

3.2.2 Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of
spillovers onto adjacent areas.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 78
 VOLUME III

7. Metal Works and Glazing

7.1 GENERAL

The contractor is required to employ approved specialists to supply and erect all metal work items.
Working drawings are to be prepared and issued to the Engineer in quadruplicate for approval in good
time to afford no delay to the project and in no case less than eight weeks before work needs to be put
in hand. No work at site or fabrication in factory shall commence prior to any approval by the Engineer.

7.2 STANDARDS

Materials used in this Section shall comply with British Standards, the British Codes Practice, DIN
Standards, American Standards and American Society for Testing and Materials, or Local Authority
Standards and Codes whichever are the more stringent.

Applicable provision of the following British Standards shall apply to these works as follows:-

1. Mild Steel shall comply with BS 4360, sections generally shall comply with BS 4: Part 1, hollow
sections with BS 4848: Part 2 and angles with BS 4848: Part 4. Steel plate and sheetshall
comply with BS 1449: Part 1 and steel tubes to BS 1775.
2. Stainless Steel Tubes shall comply with BS 3014, & stainless steel plate with BS 1449: Part 2.
3. Aluminum alloy extruded sections shall comply with BS 1161 or BS 1474 and Aluminum alloy
drawn tube with BS 1471. Anodizing process when applicable to comply with BS 3987.
4. Brass work as indicated on the drawing shall comply with the various appropriate Standards.
5. Fastening unless otherwise specified shall be of the same metal as the item being fixed, with
matching coating or finish. Wood screw shall comply with BS 1210. Bolts screw and nuts to
BS 4190, machine screws and nuts to BS 4138 and self-tapping screws to BS 4174.
6. Plugs shall be proprietary fibre plastics or other approved type.
7. Bitumen solution for cold application shall comply with BS 3416 Type 1.

7.3 FINISHED COATING

1. General
The finished coating shall be as stated on the drawings and applied strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions. The colour of the coating shall be selected from available
ranges if not stated elsewhere in these Documents. The Contractor shall offer samples for
approval prior to the final selection and the manufacturer of these elements.

2. Anodized coating
The aluminum, anodizing shall comply with BS 3987 and be integral colour hard coat
anodizing 550 kg/mm2 hardness, minimum 25 microns thick.

The colour of anodizing shall be as described on the drawings. Samples of colour including
limits of colour variation shall be submitted to the Client /Engineer for his approval before
work commences. The Engineer/ Client reserve the right to reject the products of any
supplier who cannot guarantee a reasonable limit of colour variation, the acceptable limit of
variation being at the Engineer's discretion.

3. Super durable Polyester powder coating

The metal must be chemically pre-treated in accordance with the synthetic premium system in
order to obtain coating which will be both decorative and give long lasting protection.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 79
 VOLUME III

Unless stated otherwise, all Aluminum works shall be finished in colored electrostatic
polyester powder coating to AAMA 2604-98 standard for Aluminum and BS 6497 for
galvanized steel or equal and approved to Ral colour subject to the Engineer's approval.

4. Epoxy Paint Coating

Mild steel dipped galvanized to be spray coated with Epoxy based paint and shall be factory
applied in two layers, primer coat 0.3 mils dry film thickness and finished colour coat minimum
1.0 mils dry film thickness. Minimum overall thickness of 1.3 mils dry film thickness. Inside
corners, channels and the like shall be visually covered to the extent possible. The Engineer
shall select the colour from the range available,

The coating shall be applied to properly cleaned and pre-treated galvanized steel section.

Application shall be by approved applicators and the Contractor shall provide certified details
of same. The pre-treatment and application of the coating shall conform to all ASTM, BS, DIN
Standards and the like as stated in the Supplier's printed Specifications.

5. Resin Coating ( Kynar 500 )

Wherever specified, PVDF (Polyvinylidene fluoride) resin coating to be used as a final coating
for Aluminum , Galvanized Steel which should be factory applied over baked finish with
environmental compliant. This finish is a dispersion coating resin which shall meet the
performance criteria of AAMA 2605-2 specification and shall be applied on two coats system.
Full details of the source and samples to be submitted for the approval prior to any coating is
commenced.

6. Coating thickness
As and when instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide certificates from
independent laboratories that the minimum, of 60 microns with a preferred maximum of 120
microns has been applied to the Aluminum sections. Failure to provide such information shall
result in the complete installation being rejected and replaced at the Contractor's expense.

7. Dissimilar materials
All Aluminum surfaces that are to be in contact with cured concrete, mortar, steel and other
metals shall have the contact surfaces protected wherever they may entrap moisture or
corrosive elements. Metals that are to be in contact with mortars or concrete shall be
protected with a two coat bituminous coating.

Prime paint steel parts of anchors anchor inserts, reinforcements, supports, and all parts after
field welding or bolting with zinc chromate. Minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil zinc
chromate.

7.4 ALUMINUM

 Generally
All Aluminum doors, windows frames, transoms, mullions, etc. Where shown on the drawing
shall be manufactured of extruded section of Aluminum alloy to B.S. 1474. Heat treatable
free from defects type, 11.9. They shall be supplied by a manufacturer approved by the
Engineers. Fittings shall be Aluminum alloy in accordance with B.S. 1473.

All Aluminum sections shall present clear, straight and sharply defined lines and shall be free
from defects and imperfections that may impair their strength.

Samples of Aluminum shall include a corner joint and glazing gasket & all the accessories.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 80
 VOLUME III

The contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all aluminum work until, the completion
of the Work, and only units in perfect working order and in perfect condition will beaccepted. All
hardware, screws, bolts and other necessary accessories shall be of aluminumor other non-
corrodible material and shall match in colour and consistency of the finished coating of the
anodized aluminum.

Where aluminum is in contact with wood, the wood shall be treated with pentachlorophenol or
equal and approved, 5% minimum concentration, followed with the protective measures
described for aluminum in contact with wood or other absorptive materials.

The aluminum work shall be designed and anchored so that work will not be distorted, northe
fasteners due to stresses from the expansion and contraction of the metal.

 Protection
Before shipment from the factory, aluminum surfaces requiring protection shall be given a
coating which will protect the metals during construction. In areas where appearance of the
finish on aluminum items is important a coating of methacrylate lacquer shall be applied.

Apply two sprayed coats or water-white methacrylate lacquer having a total minimum thickness
of 0.125 mm, which when applied to the aluminum surface shall be capable of withstanding the
action of lime mortar for a period of at least one week in an atmosphere of 100% relative
humidity at 100 degree F and the acting or 10% (by weight muriatic acid for aperiod of six hours
at 70 degree and the action of atmospheric weathering for a period of 12months.

Alternatively a thick adhesive tape may be used. The coating or tape shall be applied in the
manufacturer’s plant to the exposed surfaces of all aluminum components subject to staining
from alkaline mortar and plaster abrasion and other construction abuses.

 Workmanship
The Contractor shall furnish all aluminum units as indicated on the drawings. Workmanship and
installation shall be in accordance with recommended standards of First Class Aluminum
Manufacturers .

The Contractor shall furnish all labour, materials and equipment to complete the aluminum
work indicated on other drawings or specified herein to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Work shall include all parts and accessories for all variations, fabrication techniques required
for a complete installation, caulking, priming and back coating and shop drawings.

All aluminum work shall be performed in a shop where grade of metal wok is of recognized
quality acceptable to the Engineer. All items shall be installed plumb, straight, square, leveland
in proper elevation, plane, location and alignment with other work. All work shall be designed
for adjustment to field variation, fitted with proper joints and intersections and adequately
anchored in place.

All workmanship and finished items shall be first class. Strictly in accordance with the best
practice. All work shall be complete in every detail. Finished work shall be approved by the
Engineer before the job will be accepted.

Where aluminum surfaces come into contact with metals other than stainless steel, zinc, white
bronze or other metal non-compatible with aluminum, they shall be kept away from direct
contact with such parts by painting the dissimilar metal with a primer, followed by one or

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 81
 VOLUME III

two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint of other approved suitable protective coating,
excluding those containing lead pigments, or a non-absorptive tape or gasket shall be placed
between aluminum and dissimilar metals. Steel anchors and connecting membersshall be hot
dip galvanized or zinc plated after fabrication.

Aluminum in contact with wood or other absorptive material which may become repeatedly wet
shall be painted with two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint or a coat of heavybodied
bituminous paint. Alternatively paint the wood or other absorptive material with two coats of
aluminum house paint and other foreign materials to ensure proper lacquer adhesion.

Upon completion, the Contractor shall clean all aluminum work as required by removing
protective tape and other coating, using mild soap or detergent. Acid, caustics and abrasives
shall not be used. Where cleaners are used to remove excess sealing compounds care shall
be taken to prevent damage to seal or staining or damage to adjacent work.

 Aluminum Windows and Doors

All windows and doors are to be constructed by approved specialist suppliers of light, medium
or heavy section to suit location, local building regulations, and particular requirements noted
on the drawing as to weight and profile.

All frames should be made to fit the actual openings with a 5 mm clearance all round.
Discrepancies in overall width or height exceeding 5 mm will not be allowed and the frames will
be rejected in such cases. Any small discrepancies shall have the gaps suitability backedand
then filled with gun-applied water repellent mastic sealant.

All nuts, bolts, washers and screws used for assembly and fixing shall be of adequatestrength
for their purpose within the design and shall be stainless steel grade 18/8.

All sealants used in the assembly of, and in the fixing of cladding and window framing, shallbe
not-setting to allow thermal movement without detriment to those joint sealants used for
peripheral caulking and shall be one part silicone sealant and shall conform to BS 4245.

All spliced joints between mullions will be sealed within approved silicone product, compatible
with other sealants and packing used.

All ironmongery shall have the same finish as the frame & shall be approved by the Engineer.
At all openable windows and doors and where there are louvered screens and doors, a fly
screen shall be provided to approval of the Engineer, constructed following the principles and
specifications as described elsewhere in this specification.

Glazing section shall be set in special heat resisting PVC and of channel type. Separateglazing
sections on each side of the glass will not be permitted.

The following table indicates the basic requirements for window construction. The weights of
framing make no allowance for beads, glazing bars, opening light framing, coupling mullions
or transoms.

Classification min. weight of Max. superficial Max dimension Remarks

basic frame area of window either way
kg/r.m m2 mm
Light 0.60 1500

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 82
 VOLUME III

Medium 1.50 5 2500

Medium 2.00 9 3000
Heavy 2.50 12 3500
Heavy 3.00 12 3500 with door

7.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

1. All materials shall be stored in protected areas on site and shall be fully protected against the
effects of weather.

2. All materials shall be carefully handled and stored under cover in manner to prevent
deformation and damage to the materials and to shop finished, and to prevent rusting and the
accumulation of mud, dirt or other foreign matter on the metal work. All damage and
accumulation shall be corrected prior to erection.

7.6 MATERIALS

All material shall be new stock, free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance and of
best commercial quality for each intended purpose.

Provide all anchors, bolts, sleeves, spigots and other parts required for securing each item of work of
this Section to the construction, including furnishing to concrete workers all required inserts and
sleeves for using in concrete and furnishing to masons all anchor, bolts, and other items required to
be built-in masonry.

All exposed fastenings shall be of the same material finish as the metal to which applied, unless
otherwise noted.

Welding rods shall conform to British Standards and the recommendations of the metal welding rod
manufacturer.

Bolts and nuts where used, shall be in accordance with B.S.4320. The size of the holes shall not
exceed the bolt diameter by more than 2 mm.

Clamps, Wall Ties, Anchors etc.

The clamps for fixing wood frames to walls shall be 200mm long, 30mm wide and 3mm thick and shall
have one end bent and two countersunk drill for screwing to the frame and the other end fishtailed for
setting into blockwork.

All fixing clamps wall ties, anchors etc., shall be galvanized mild steel proprietary type such as
Pepcon International or equal and approved. The Contractor is responsible for submitting suitable
samples to Engineer for approval.

Steel Channels and Chequered Plate

Where such material on site in Electrical Rooms or Substations are required, the Contractor must
allow for all necessary galvanized steel channels and Aluminum mill finish chequered plate as
directed by the Engineer including framing, Supports, hand railing etc., as necessary.

7.7 SHOP PAINTING MATERIALS

Shop paint for ungalvanized surfaces shall be a high quality, lead free, rust-inhibitor primer, as
approved by the Engineer.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 83
 VOLUME III

Shop paint for galvanized metal shall be high quality, zinc rich metal primer especially formulated for
used on galvanized metal, as approved by the Engineer.

Shop paint for aluminum shall be Dichromate based primer.

7.8 SHOP COATINGS FOR FERROUS AND GALVANIZED SURFACES

1. Galvanizing

 All ferrous metal under this Section for exterior use on addition to any other interior
items specifically so specified, shall be of hot dip galvanized, including all bolts,

 Hot- dip galvanizing process shall comply with BS 729 as applicable. After
galvanizing, processed items shall be straightened free of all warpage and distortion
caused by the hot dip process. Galvanization shall be 100 micron minimum

 Galvanized surfaces to receive paint coatings shall be given hot phosphate

(bonderizing) shop pre-treatment.

 Furnish to the Engineer, a certified statement that galvanizing and hot-phosphate pre-
treatments comply fully with this Specification.

2. Shop Painting

 All materials (plain and galvanized ) ( including non-ferrous where specified for paint
finish under this section shall be given a shop coat of primer as specified, using the
appropriate primers specified previously in this Section.

 Immediately before painting, remove all rust, loose mill scale, dirt, weld flux, weld
spatter and other foreign material with wire brushes or steel scrappers. Remove all
grease and oil by use of detergent or solvent as recommended by the manufacturer
of this proposed painting system.

 Apply paint by spray process in strict accordance with, manufacturer’s printed

instructions to dry film, thickness recommended. Apply thoroughly and evenly and
work well into corners and joints taking care to avoid sags and runs.

 Do not paint surfaces to be embedded in concrete, or to be welded in the field.

 After erection, sand smooth and retouch all portions of the shop coats chipped off or
damaged during erection, and coat all field welds and connections with the same
paint used for all the shop coat.

 All aluminum surfaces in contact with cement or concrete surfaces are to be given
two coats of bitumen based paints before being fitted.

7.9 WORKMANSHIP

1. Coordinate and provide details of the work as necessary to ensure coordination with related
building elements and services. Liaise as necessary to ensure co-ordination of the work with
related building elements and services, provide fabrication/installation drawings and other
information requested, submit sufficient copies of drawings, etc., for approval. Make
necessary amendments in accordance with any comments of the Engineer without delay and
re-submit for approval. Unless it is confirmed that this is not necessary and submit sufficient
copies of final version of drawings, for distribution to all parties.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 84
 VOLUME III

2. Take site dimensions and submit Drawings as detailed elsewhere in these documents.,
showing elevations, plans and full size sections, proposed ,methods of fixing, proposed
methods of forming joints. Any proposals for fabricating large components in more than one
piece.

3. Prepare control samples as requested and obtain Engineer's written approval of appearance
before proceeding with manufacture.

4. Fabricate, metalwork carefully and accurately to ensure compliance with design and
performance requirements, suing types and grades of metal appropriate for the purpose.
Finished work must be free from distortion and cracks. Use proprietary products to
manufacturer's recommendations.

5. Pre- finished metal may be used provided the finish complies with this specification and the
methods of fabrication do not damage or alter appearance of a finish and the finish is
adequately protected during fabrication.

6. For cold formed work, use brake press or cold rolling to produce accurate profile with straight
edges. Unless specified otherwise, mitre junctions of identical sections. Remove all burrs,
sharp edges which will be visible and a hazard to the user after fixing. After thermal cutting of
S/S, grind off material which is liable to corrode.

7. When assembled all moving parts must move freely and without binding.

8. Prepare surfaces of metals to receive adhesives by degreasing and abrasing mechanically or

chemically and to form bond under pressure. Use adhesives in accordance with
manufacturer's written recommendations.

9. Mechanical joints shall be tight with no visible gaps. Where screw heads will be visible after
components is fixed, or raised screw heads would interfere with any moving part of
component, use countersunk machine screws unless specified otherwise Mechanical joints of
components which will be located externally shall be bedded in bedding compound, including
all mating surfaces, cleats and other fixings.

10. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be welded and ensure accurate fit using clamps and jigs where
practicable. Use tack weld only for temporary attachment unless specified otherwise. Make
joints with parent and filler metal fully bonded throughout with no inclusions, holes, porosity or
cracks. Completely remove all traces of flux residue and slag. Prevent weld spatter falling on
surfaces of materials which will be self-finished and visible in completed work. But welds
which will be visible in complete work shall be finished smooth, flush with adjacent surfaces.

11. Metal welding shall be to BS 5135 or other methods subject to approval.

Welding of stainless steel shall be TIG welding to BS 3019: Part 2, or other methods subject
to approval. Use double bevel butt welds, backing bars to remove heat, jigging, tack welds
and any other measures necessary to minimize distortion.

Remove slight distortion by light hammering, taking care not to damage surface finish.
Welding of aluminum alloys shall be TIG welding to BS 1126, or other methods subject to
approval. Welding of copper alloys shall be fusion welding to BS 1077 for copper, or other
methods subject to approval.

12. Apply metal coatings after fabrication is complete and all fixing holes have been drilled,
unless otherwise, specified, Before applying coating remove all welding slag, weld spatter,

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 85
 VOLUME III

anti-spatter compounds paints. Grease flux rust burrs and sharp arises and make good all
defects which would show after application of coating and finish surfaces smooth.

13. Galvanizing shall comply with Bs 729, BS 4921, zinc spraying of iron and steel surfaces shall
comply with BS 2569: Part I and Vitreous naming of steel surfaces with Bs 3830. Surfaces of
stainless steel, bronze and brass which will be visible in the completed work shall be finely
polished.

14. All section shall be protected to prevent distortion of metalwork during transit, handling,
storage and fixing and damage to arises, projecting features and surfaces which will be
exposed in the finished work. Prevent contact with mud, ashes, plaster and cement and
provide protective coverings as necessary and remove them on completion.

15. Position metalwork accurately, plumb, level and true to line. Fix securely to prevent pulling
away, deflection, or other movement during use. Do not distort when tightening, fastening
and the like.

16. Do not use railing or balustrades as strutting or supports after fixing for other works. Do not
weld, braze or solder on site without approval.

17. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness of metal and details of assembly
and supports shall give ample strength and stiffness. Joints exposed to weather shall formed
to exclude water. Do all cutting, punching, drilling and gapping required for attachment fo
hardware and of work by other trades.

18. Generally metalwork shall conform to all local Authority Bye-Laws, and, in lieu of other
specific legal requirements, shall support any live loads which may normally be imposed plus
a safety factor of 2.5.

7.10 INSTALLATION

1. All work shall be installed adjusted and glazed by experienced workmen all in accordance
with the manufacturer's installation instructions and in full conformity with the approved shop
drawings, samples and other submitted date. Under no circumstances shall materials be
installed on surfaces that contain condensation, dirt, grease or other foreign encountered
materials that would hinder or prevent proper installation and functioning for the use intended.

2. All work shall be carefully and accurately assembled with proper and approved provision for
counteraction and expansion and set in correct locations as per approved detailed shop
drawings, all level, square,, plumb and aligned with other work. All joints between framing and
structural building shall be sealed in order to be watertight and weatherproof and to satisfy all
other requirements of the Engineer.

3. Frames shall be designed and manufactured with a maximum 2.5 mm tolerance around the
opening in the structure. These joints are to be finished by applying an approved sealant in to
a polystyrene foam backing strip.

4. All works are to be fully protected for the duration of the contract from damage by other
trades. The engineer shall approve the method of protection.

5. If for any reason final finishes become scratched, abraded or damaged during transport,
delivery, storage or erection, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to remove or repair
those defective areas or components as directed and to the complete satisfaction of the
engineer.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 86
 VOLUME III

Repair work shall be identical to the manufacturer's applied finish with regard to gloss, finish
and visual appearance. Field touch up of painted aluminum is permitted only with written
permission of the Engineer. Where touch up is not an authorized means of repair the
damaged material must be replaced by new.

6. Upon completion of work all protective coverings from all exposed surfaces shall be removed.
All surfaces shall be cleaned using soap or detergents as recommended by the Aluminum
manufacturers to remove sealants, discoloration and any other foreign material. Defect of any
type determined by the Engineer shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense.

7. Extreme care shall be taken when cleaning the exterior portion to protect all other adjacent
works.

7.11 SAMPLES

1. Submit duplicate samples of all finished materials for approval by Engineer. The samples will
show the full range of finishes and mechanical properties to be expected in the finished
product. Where physical samples would otherwise be too large, examples will be given that
can be readily inspected locally or the Contractor will provide facilities for the Engineer's
inspection at the Contractor's expense.

2. Unless specifically called for, size and form of each sample shall be as directed by the
Engineer.

7.12 SEALING JOINTS

The Contractor shall ensure that joints are dry and remove all loose material, dust and grease.

Joints shall be prepared in accordance with sealant manufacturer's recommendation using

recommended solvents and primers where necessary.

Adjoining surfaces which would be impossible to clean if smeared with sealant shall be masked.

Backing strips shall be inserted in all joints to be pointed with sealant.

When using backing strips, the Contractor shall not leave gaps and shall not reduce depth of joint for
sealant to less than the minimum recommended by the manufacturer.

Cavities shall be filled and jointed with sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.

Sealant shall be tooled to form a smooth flat bead.

Excess sealant shall be removed from adjoining surfaces using cleaning materials recommended by
the sealant manufacture, and shall be left clean.

7.13 GLAZING

All glazing work shall be installed by workmen experienced in this wok in accordance with BS 6262.

The Contractor shall fix all glass with required gaskets, clips, beads, etc.

All glass panels shall have rounded edges to prevent any damage to gaskets.

The Contractor shall produce on request all invoices or advice notes from suppliers to confirm that the
glass is of the standard specified.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 87
 VOLUME III

Any scratched, broken or otherwise defective glass is to be removed and replaced by the Contractor
at his cost during or on completion of the Works.

7.14 GLAZING MATERIALS

 The contractor shall submit representative samples of all glass he proposes to install in the
Works. On receipt of the Engineer's approval of same the Contractor shall commence the
procurement of the glass. All glass shall comply with the Specification given below and will be
delivered to the site in cut sizes and in packages marked as to the quality of the content.

 Unless otherwise indicated, mirrors shall be of uniform thickness, free from waviness, air
bubbles and the like. Representative sample of mirror shall be submitted for the Engineer's
approval. The mirror glass shall be clear and silvered by nitrate precipitation, protected by
copper plating with a protective plastic coating on the reverse side. The mirrors shall be 6
mm thick and cut to sizes as shown with ground and polished edges. The mirrors shall be set
on calcium cilicate backing, plugged and screwed to wall and shall have stainless steel
trimming all around.

7.15 GLASS OPENINGS

The glass framing shall both structurally support and adequately cushion the glass. To prevent
mechanical and thermal stresses on the glass, the framing system shall provide openings that are
within the tolerances for sparseness, corner offset and bow. The tolerances are listed below.

Squareness 3mm difference in lengths of the diagonals.

Corner Offsets 0.8mm maximum offsets at corners.
Bow 1.6mm bow in a 1.22m length of frame.

If the variations from these tolerances are anticipated, details of same shall be advised to engineer. If
site conditions are found to be outside these tolerances corrections must be made before the
openings are glazed.

7.16 GLASS INSTALLATION

Workmanship shall generally be in accordance with CP 152 and respective British standards.

The glass is to be delivered to the site with adequate protection to prevent damage and where
possible is to be fixed in position immediately after delivery. When fixed, the contractor is to take all
necessary precautions to prevent damage during successive building operations and will be entirely
responsible for the replacement of any broken or damaged glass at his own cost.

The Contractor is to be solely responsible for determining the exact sizes of glass required, including
a tolerance of 2mm to each edge and he is recommended to check the necessary dimensions on site.

No glazing is to be carried out until rebates have been painted with primer. Glazing beads as
applicable are also to be primed before fixing loose beads.

Glass apertures on timber doors are to be bedded in leather glazing strip, black ribbon velvet or
P.V.C. glazing strip to the approval of the engineer.

7.17 CLEANING

All glass shall be thoroughly cleaned and polished on both sides and all paint spots and the like
completely removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

 CURTAIN WALL GLAZING: Refer to the spec. in the particular specifications part.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 88
 VOLUME III

 METAL DOORS: Hollow metal steel doors and frames to be obtained from a specialist
manufacture with a proven record of at least 15 years and to be approval of the Engineer.
Door shall comply with ASTM-152 and shall be fire rated in accordance with NFPA 80. Every
door and frames should be tested and labelled by an independent testing agency like UL or
WH. Doors finish shall be enamel paint. All doors and frames to be manufactured to SDI and
HMMA / NAAMM specifications. Door finish shall be enamel paint. Door bumpers shall be
single stud, 3 nos. per leaf retained by frame.

 Door bumpers shall be single slid, 3 nos. per leaf, retained by frame.

 Steel Frames: Frames shall be 14-gauge prime painted galvanized steel unit with equal
rabbeted of 150 –mm jamb depth. Frames shall have wall anchors for fixing on to the existing
walls. The frames to be grouted after fixing. Two, 1.2 mm thick steel channel spreaders shall
be attached at frame bottom to maintain square alignment.

 The door to be guaranteed against rust for a period of minimum 10 years from the
manufacture itself.

 Doors shall be factory primed (zinc based) and painted with enamel paint.

7.18 Cat ladders

Cat ladders where noted on the drawings shall be aluminum mill finish and unless otherwise detailed
shall be constructed as follows; Stringers shall be 50x 6mm flat attached to the structure with 75 x 75
x 6 mm plates bolted to the structure at not less than 300mm centers.

Treads shall be formed of 19mm tube reverted to the stringers.

Safety loops shall be fitted to cat ladders more than 2000mm long and thereafter at 1000mm intervals.
The width across the loop shall be 685 mm and the distance from the center line of thestringers to the
inside of the back of the loops measured at right angles to the stringers shall be 762mm . The loop
natural shall be minimum 50 x 12 mm.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 89
 VOLUME III
8. Carpentry & Joinery
8.1 Timber for Carcassing

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.2 Timber for Carcassing

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.3 Softwood for Joinery

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.4 Hardwood for Joinery

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT
(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.5 Preservative Treatment

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.6 Fire Resistance & Flame Retardants

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.7 Plywood

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.8 Blockboard

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.9 Chipboard

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.10 Veneers

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.11 Plastic Laminate

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT
(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.12 Corian

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 90
 VOLUME III

8.13 Hard Board

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT
(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.14 Nails and Screws

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.15 Metal Work

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.16 Adhesives

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.17 Access Panels and the Like

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.18 Workmanship

Joinery shall comply with BS 1186 Part 2 and CP 112 for structural carpentry, and where possibleshall
be fabricated in a manufacturer's shop prior to delivery. It shall be accurately, properly and soundly
constructed with all molds and arises clean and sharp. Joinery shall be protected from damage during
storage at Site and throughout the construction period subsequent fixing.

The terms "frame" or "framed" or " framing" mean work put together by proper carpentry or joinery, such
as morticing and toning, dovetailing, dowelling, etc., and the joints are to be as shown specified or
directed. Butted and screwed or nailed joints or halved joints and the like will not be deemed framed
and will not be accepted for framed work.

Fixing of all joinery work, including fillets, architrave's, frames. glazing beads and the like shall be by
means of screws. Nailed work will not be permitted.

Screw heads in work to be painted shall be countersunk and stopped. Screw heads in wood to be
oiled, varnished or polished shall be pelted, with grain of the pellet in the same direction as the grain
of the member.

Unless otherwise described, work described as "plugged" shall be fixed by drilling holes in the wall or
floor, plugging with "Plastic Plugs" well rammed in and fixing the member with screws. Centres of the

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 91
 VOLUME III

fixings must not exceed those necessary to provide adequate support, and in any must not exceed
600 mm,

8.19 Packaging and Storage

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT
(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)
8.20 Doors

Unless otherwise indicated the hollow core flush doors are to be constructed from 25mm x 75 mm top
and bottom rail and stiles, 25mm x 50mm intermediate cross rails at 100mm centers, both sides covered
with plywood glued and pinned to framing and veneered as described for painting or clear finished in
haguer.

The flush doors are to comply generally with B.S. 459 (1988) in the case of hollow cored and semi-
solid doors and B.S 459 Part 3 in the case of half hour and one hour fire resisting doors. Doors are to
be constructed to the thickness, size and type as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Flush doors generally shall be solid core flush faced with a Ash veneer finish prepared to receive
varnish decoration.

The core of solid core flush doors shall be constructed of longitudinal laminations of precision planed
timber, butt jointed and glued with resin based adhesive under hydraulic pressure, the whole forming
a rigid, fire resistant raft.

Where flush doors are to have rebated or rounded stiles the lipping’s at the edges must be increased
sufficiently to allow these labors. Cutting rebates or forming rounding’s on standard sized lipping’s will
not be permitted.

In the case of hollow cored or semi-solid doors, blockings shall be a minimum of construction of the
door to provide firm fixings for locks, bolts, hinges, springs, and other ironmongery, positions of these
blockings shall be indicated on the door. Where rebate meeting stiles are required on pairs of door, the
lippings on the facing of the door, care being taken to avoid permanent marking.

All doors are to be hardwood lipped on all edges. The lipping shall be a minimum of 12mm thick securely
jointed and tongued into the framing of the door. Where rebate meeting stiles are required on pairs of
door, the lippings on the meeting edges shall be a minimum of 20mm thick.

Doors shall be properly fitted to give a uniform clearance of not more than 3mm all round and hinges
shall be let into doors and frames.
Where observation panels are required they shall be formed to the dimensions and using the type of
glass shown on the drawings. The opening is to be lipped all round similarly to the edges of the door.
The glass is to bedded in non-setting mastic as described in the "Glazing Section'' and help in position
with two sets of glazing beads to the section shown on the drawings, fixed with small brads or lost head
nails.

Where observation panels occur is doors with a clear finish, the lipping’s and beads shall be in a
hardwood to match the veneer, and the beads shall be fixed with brass cups and screw.

Fire doors shall have a 2 hour fire rating unless otherwise described, and shall generally be constructed
in accordance with the relevant British Standard or DIN standard. All fire doors shall be fixed with an
intumescent strip insert in their frame.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 92
 VOLUME III

8.21 Protection, Finishing and Re-examination

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.22 Screens

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.23 Ironmongery

1. General

All ironmongery shall be selected for the appearance and performance required and shall be obtained
from a well-known reputable manufacturer shall bear the stamp of the manufacturer. Unless specified
otherwise all ironmongery shall be supplied the same manufacturer.

The Contractor shall not use in the works types or classes of ironmongery other than those specified
except with approval in writing of the Engineer.

the type, location, quality and finish of ironmongery shall be as shown on the drawings and the
Contractor shall submit for approval a comprehensive schedule of ironmongery covering all items
required to complete the works. This schedule shall give catalogue references and locations for all
ironmongery.

All screws used for fixing ironmongery shall be supplied and shall be of the correct type, material, finish,
size and shape to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The base metals for finishes shall be as follows:

aluminum finish : aluminum

nickel plated : bronze or brass

stainless steel finish : stainless steel

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 93
 VOLUME III

2) Workmanship

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

3. Suiting

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.24 Wardrobes

Using solid Teak plywood sliced with ash veneer 0.6-0.8 mm nominal thickness with the required
stainless steel hinges& fittings as per the approval of the engineer. Sizes& location to be as per
drawings.
Contractor has to submit shop drawings for Engineer's approval prior to commencing work.

8.25 Service ducts and Access Panels

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

8.26 Skirting

10x2.0cm granite skirting (first quality) and having rounded or champhered edges.

8.27 Frames and Linings to Doors and Windows

Frames and linings shall be provided and built to the dimensions and sections shown on the drawings
or as directed by the Engineer. Frame members are to be framed together and linings are to be tongued
at angles all in accordance with the principals of good construction.

8.28 Architraves, Stops e.t.c

All architraves, stops, cover beads, glazing heads, etc., are to be provided and fixed as directed by the
Engineer with neatly mitred angles.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 94
 VOLUME III

Stops to half hour fire resisting doors are either to be worked out of the solid or otherwise fixed with
screws at maximum 18" centers. Stops to one hour fire resisting doors are to be worked out of the
solid, all in accordance with BS 459 Part 3.

Glazing beads shall be fixed with small brads or lost-head nails or in the case of work to receive a clear
finish, with brass cups and screws.

8.29 Drywall Partitions with Vision Openings

Unless shown otherwise all dry wall partition shall be 30 minutes fire rated, using 100mm G.I stud,
runner etc, to achieve composite thickness of 125mm using 12.5 mm thick fixed gypsum board on either
side. All joints are to be treated with joints filler with paper tape. The gypsum partition to haveDouble
glazed panel as indicated in the drawing and as per the Engineer approval.

Unless otherwise indicated the gypsum board applied with Acrylic co-polymer silk / matt emulsion.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 95
 VOLUME III

9. Structural Steel works

9.1 Scope

9.2 Standards.

9.3 Material

9.4 Manufacture

9.5 Design Requirements.

9.6 Workmanship

9.7 Fire Rated Painting

9.1 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

This specifications cover fabricated (pre-engineered system) and un-fabricated (Hot rolled) structural
steelwork to be used in the works, all in accordance with the Drawings, specifications and as directed by
the Engineer.

The particular specification is to supercede this specification.

9.2 STANDARDS

All structural steel work shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of BS 4360 : 1990
and BS 5950 and MBMA – 1996 latest edition of MBMA, (Metal Building manufacturers Association).
and other standards specified therein except as otherwise instructed in the particular specifications or
in the Drawings.

All structural steelwork shall conform to the British Standards, in addition to other standards included
in these specifications.

BS:Part 1 : 1993 Hot rolled sections.

BS 709 : 1983 Testing of fusion welded joints and weld metal

BS 1387 : 1990 Screwed and socketed steel tubes and tubular and of plain
end steel tubes.

BS 2994 : 1987 Cold rolled steel sections.

BS 4320 : 1968 Metal washers for general engineering purposes

BS 4360 : 1990 Weld able structural steel.

BS 3495: part 1&2 High strength friction grip bolts and associated nuts and
washers for structural engineering.

BS 4604 : Part 1&2 Use of high strength friction grip bolts in structural steel work.

BS 4848: part 2:1975 Hollow sections.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 96
 VOLUME III

BS 4848 : part 4:1986 Equal and unequal angles.

BS 5135 : 1984 Arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels

BS 5493 : 1977 CP for protective coatings on Iron and steel

BS 5531:1988 CP for safety in erecting structural frames.

BS 7079 Preparation of substractes before application of paints and

related products.

BS 7419 : 1991 Holding down bolts.

BSEN 10143 : 1993 Continuously hot-dip zinc coated sheet and strip

ASTM A 36 Specification for structural steel.

9.3 MATERIALS

9.3.1 General

Steels used for structural steelwork shall be manufactured to comply with BS 4360: 1990, Weld able
structural steels and ASTM A 36. The grade of steel shall be 43 unless otherwise specified. All
materials shall be free of seams, cracks, flaws, laminations, injuries, and other defects of any kind.

9.3.2 Steel Sections, Angles

Steel sections shall conform to the requirements of BS 4 Part 1 1993 “ Hot –rolled sections”. Steel
angels shall conform to the requirements of BS 4848 Part 1986 “ Equal and unequal angles.”

Circular hollow sections (CHS) and rectangular Hollow Sections (RHS) shall conform to the
requirements of BS 4848: part 2, 19075 “ Hollow Sections”.

9.3.3 Bolts and nuts.

1) High strength bolts shall conform to DIN 931 Grade 8.8 or equivalent – (Hot dip galvanized
bolts).
2) Connection bolts for secondary connection shall be DIN 931 Grade 4.6 – (Hot dip galvanized
bolts).
3) Anchor bolts shall conform to DIN 931 Grade 4.6 or equivalent – (Hot dip galvanized bolts).

9.3.4 Test certificates.

Manufacturer’s Test Certificates for all steel used for fabrication or for bolts for the works shall be
supplied. They shall include for all the mechanical tests described. Notwithstanding the fact that test
certificates will be submitted, the Engineer may request to have independent tests performed and to
inspect material prior to fabrication.

9.4 MANUFACTURE

9.4.1 Straightening.

All plates, bars and sections shall be flattened and straightened and made free from twist before any
other work is done on them. The method adopted for this work shall be such as not to injure or mark
the material.

9.4.2 Machining, Cutting and planning.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 97
 VOLUME III

All bearing ends of steel sections shall be accurately machined true and square, bearing plates shall
be machined to received connections.

Cold sawing shall be used when it is required to cut a section accurately to length.

Flange plates, if made from sheared plates, must have had at least 3mm removed on each sheared
edge by planning.

9.4.3 ChamfeR

9.4.4 All members are to be fabricated with Chamfer built-in to take into account deflections due to
self-weight and applied loads.
9.4.5 Shop Connections.

Shop connections may be either welded or bolted as specified in the drawings. The dimensions of all
welds shall be clearly specified on the working drawings and the length of weld specified shall be
effective length excluding end crates.

All hollow or tubular sections shall be sealed completely at all open ends with a welded plate except
where such sections are connection to other sections with a continuous weld around the full
perimeter of the junction.

9.4.6 Marking.

9.4.7 Each piece of steelwork shall be marked distinctively before delivery, indicating the position
and direction in which it is to be fixed. Three copies of a complete marking plan are to be
supplied to the Engineer copied to before erection commences.

9.4.8 Completion of Fabricated Parts.

All completed work must be exact to the dimensions required, Every piece of material shall be free
from rust, scale and pittig, true to thickness throughout and free from lamination, twist and distortion.

In case of the welded fabrication, The contractor to the approval of the Engineer should rectify any
distortion remains in the members after welding operations are completed.

9.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

9.5.1 Design Drawings.

The contractor shall prepare the structural design for the complete job.

The contractor to prepare full set of detailed drawings and structural calculations required for the
approval of the Engineer and the concerned Municipality.

The Contractor should revise and update the design according to the Engineer satisfaction and
Municipality requirements without any extra cost or time.

Loads to be taken as mentioned on the drawings and to be not less than the standards. Design
should comply with the specified materials.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 98
 VOLUME III

The contractor shall be responsible, unless otherwise specified, for the design and adequacy of the
structural steel work. Where the Engineer has designed certain sections of the work, the contractor shall
check and verify the adequacy of the design and take full responsibility for it.

In the event of any contradiction or ambiguity in the information or drawings supplied by the Engineer
becoming apparent the Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer and obtain his written
clarification.

The contractor shall submit the design details and calculations, along with necessary drawings for the
approval of the Engineer. The proposed system should be certified by a registered, experienced,
professional Engineer.

The contractor shall carry out all necessary modifications and changes instructed by the Engineer and
resubmit further details of design until the final approval is accorded by the Engineer. Approval
accorded by the Engineer shall not relieve the contractor of any of his contractual obligation who shall
be responsible for the safety of the system.

The contractor shall not be entitled for any extra time or cost for the process of approval.

9.5.2 Shop drawings.

The contractor shall, unless otherwise specified, prepare and check shop drawings, incorporating
sufficient information for the proper fabrication of the steelwork.

Before commencing fabrication the contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer in writing to all
shop drawings.

The contractor shall carryout all necessary modifications and changes instructed by the Engineer, and
keep furnishing revised shop drawings till obtaining the Engineer approval on the same.

This approval will signify verification of the correct interpretation by the contractor of the Engineer's
requirements but shall not signify approval of the dimensions. Notwithstanding such approval the
contractor shall be entirely responsible for the accuracy of the shop drawing, the correctness of detail
and the proper design of connections and joints and shall not relieve the contractor of any of his
contractual obligation . The contractor will be responsible for the safety of the system.

The contractor shall supply the Engineer with complete sets of working drawings.

9.5.3 Prefabricated steel structure.

The prefabricated steel structures shall be pre-engineered, designed, supplied and erected in
accordance with the following provisions:

1) All Built up members conforming to ASTM A-572 Grade 50 or equivalent with a minimum
yield strength Fy =34.5 kN/cm².
2) All hot rolled members conform to BS EN 10025 S275 or equivalent Fy= 24.5 kN/cm².
3) All cold-formed sections conforming to ASTM A446 Grade D or JIS G3302 having minimum
yield stress of 34.5 kN/cm².
4) Tube sections (if any) conforming to JIS G3466 STKR 400 with minimum yield strength of
24.5 kN/cm².
5) Pipe sections (if any) conforming to ASTM A 53B with minimum yield strength of 24.1 kN/cm²
or API 51.B with minimum yield strength of 24.0 kN/cm².
6) High strength bolts shall conform to DIN 931 Grade 8.8 or equivalent – (Hot dip galvanized
bolts).
7) Connection bolts for secondary connection shall be DIN 931 Grade 4.6 – (Hot dip galvanized
bolts).

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 99
 VOLUME III

8) Anchor bolts shall conform to DIN 931 Grade 4.6 or equivalent – (Hot dip galvanized bolts).
9) Structural Finish:

1. Primary steel members:

1.1 For non fire rated buildings:

All primary steel members shall be cleaned to SA 2.5 and to have the following Epoxy
painting system:

a. One coat of Epoxy primer (As per manufacturer recommendation with min.
thickness of 75 microns DFT).
b. 2-Polyurethane top coats (As per manufacturer recommendation with min.
thickness of 75 microns DFT for each coat).
c. Total painting system shall be 200 micron DFT(minimum)

1.2 For fire rated buildings:

a. One shop coat of Zinc phosphate epoxy primer similar to Epigrip T878 (75
microns DFT ).
b. Intermediate coat of fire proofing Intumescent paint (2 hours fire rating) similar
to Finetex M70
c. Polyurethane top coat similar to Finetex M75 (75 microns DFT).

2. Cold formed section :to be pre-galvanised and unpainted.

3. Warehouse Ziplock Cladding

Roof and walls shall be Ziplock system cladding to comply with BS EN ISO 9001:
1994 as follows:

Outer skin: Ziplock standing seam roofing system shall be steel covered width of 500
mm or as per the existing building sheet. Ziplock shall be of thickness 0.7 mm
thickness of minimum of 7.5 Kg/ m2 of weight. Ziplock roofing system shall be class O
fire rating and shall confirm to BS 476: part 3:1975 for external fire exposure roof test
and also comply with BS476 part 3 19754 to determine the classification of the
surface spread of flame of the system which shall be class 1.

Ziplock system metal top sheet shall be pre-painted Z275 galvanized steel with
finishing coat of PVF 2.

Insulation: 70mm thick fix mineral wool insulation with density of density less than 35
kg/m³.

Inner skin Linear sheet: Base material shall be confirms to BS 4300/6 N31, temper
H16 (yield stress 207N/mm2).

Sheet thickness shall be 0.7 mm minimum.

Standard sheet profile shall be 0.5 mm colour coated Aluminum. Power coated paint
shall be super polyester 80 microns or PVF2 25 microns on the exposed side and 12
microns clear lacquer on reverse side.

4. Open shed cladding:

Base material shall be confirms to BS 4300/6 N31, temper H16 (yield stress
207N/mm2).

Sheet thickness shall be 1.2mm minimum.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 100
 VOLUME III

Standard sheet profile shall be 0.7 mm colour coated Aluminum. Power coated paint
shall be super polyester 80 microns or PVF2 25 microns on the exposed side and 12
microns clear lacquer on reverse side.

Also, contractor shall submit ultimate load and moments for Engineer's approval. Shop
drawing for holding purlins shall be submitted for Engineer's approval

10) Design Loads: To be as per British code CP3 or the American equivalent.

And not less than the following:

1- Main frames:

-(0.75 KN/m2) Live Load on roof.

-The maximum wind speed shall be applied as per the codes and not
less than 160 km\hr.

-Dead loads to be calculated as per the design.

-(30 KN/M2) load for the flooring of the warehouse.

2- Mezzanine slab covering the office area to be concrete slab as shown on

structural drawings

11) Code : MBMA – 1996 latest edition of MBMA, (Metal

Building manufacturers Association).

12) Min. thickness and welds:

-main frame (webs to be 6 mm x flanges to be 8 mm).

-Cold formed ( 2 mm )

-All built up sections to be double welded.

13) Cross bracings: Angle bracing only to be used for horizontal bracing .

Portal vertical bracing to be used.

14) Steel Staircase: One flight steel staircase having one landing with G.I. handrails as shown on
drawings shall be provided rising from Interlock level to platform higher level.

9.6 WORKMANSHIP

9.6.1 Erection of Steel work.

The contractor shall be responsible for accurate positioning, leveling and plumbing of all steelwork
and placing of every part of the structure in accordance with the drawings and to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. All column bases, beams and girders bearings, etc.. shall be securely supported on
suitable steel packs.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 101
 VOLUME III

Any lifting or erecting machinery shall be to the approval of the Engineer and shall be removed from
the site if the considers such appliances dangerous or unsuitable for their functions.

The contractor shall be entirely responsible for the stability of the structure during erection and shall
arrange that sufficient tack welds, bolts, braces or guy ropes are used to ensure that work will remain
rigid until final bolting or welding is completed. The contractor shall supply and fix, without extra
charge, any temporary bracing which may be necessary. The permanent welding or bolting up of
connections shall not be carried out until a sufficient portion of the structure has been erected and
temporary connected up, to ensure that there will be no straining of members during the erection and
lining up of the remainder of the structure.

Packs for leveling up stanchions shall be shown on the shop drawings and the number of packs
provided shall be 25 % in excess of the theoretical requirement. Packs shall not be larger than is
necessary for their purpose, and shall be sawn and not sheared or flame cut packs shall not protrude
unduly from stanchion bases they shall be grouted in and the grout shall totally enclose them.

All steel work shall be erected in the exact positions as shown on the drawings all vertical members
shall be truly vertical throughout and all horizontal members truly horizontal, fabrication being such
that all parts can be accurately assembled and erected.

9.6.2 Riveting.
Shop riveting may be permitted as per the discretion of the Engineer, where practical and the rivets
and method of riveting shall be accordance with BS 4620 : 1988 and the BS specified therein. No site
riveting will be permitted.

9.6.3 Bolting
The contractor shall supply all nuts, bolts washers including spares and service bolts required for
erection.

The size of ordinary round holes and edge distances for black bolts shall comply with BS 5950. Holes
shall be drilled, not punched, and reamed if required to the correct size. All burrs due to drilling must
be removed. Flame cutting of holes shall not be permitted.

All holes for site connections shall be accurately central in the workshop, so as to render unnecessary
any reaming or drifting during erection.

High strength friction grip bolted joints where specified or approved by the Engineer shall be in
accordance with the requirements of BS4604 parts 1 & 2 use of high strength friction grip bolts in
structural steelwork and the bolts shall comply with the requirement of BS4395 part1&2 high strength
friction grip bolts such bolts shall be torshear or other similar approved type which, after tensioning,
give a positive visual indication that the required minimum pre-load has been attained. The
tensioning of the bolts to produce the required friction shall be carried out by use of an automatic non-
calibrated tool.

Generally the tightening tool shall be power operated but in certain cases the use of a hand-operated
tool may be permitted subject to the prior approval of the Engineer.

9.6.4 Welding

All welding shall be metal-arc welding carried out with modern plant of adequate capacity and
complying in all respect with the requirements of BS 5135 1984 specification for Arc welding of carbon
and carbon manganese steel and BS 4872 specification for approval testing of welders when welding
procedure approval is not required fusion welding of steel.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 102
 VOLUME III

9.6.5 Testing of welds.

The contractor shall carry out tests in compliance with BS 709 : 1983 Destructive testing fusion
welded joints and weld metal in steel, BS 2600 part 1: 1983 Radiographic examination of fusion
welded butt joints and BS 3923 parts 1 & 2 ultrasonic examination of welds, and as required by the
Engineer.

Isolated slag inclusion and gas pockets whose greatest dimention exceeds one-eight of the thickness
of the thinner plate joined shall be cut and the joint re-welded. Porosity and stringers shall be dealt
with at the discretion of the Engineer.

9.6.6 Inspection

Every facility shall be given to Engineer representative to visit the contractor’s works and to inspect
the steelwork during all stages of preparation and fabrication. Any work which is not in accordance
with the specification shall be corrected at the contractor’s expense. Inspection by the Engineer or
his representative shall not relieve the contractor of liability for rectifying any defects which may
subsequently appear or be found during or after erection.

9.6.7 Protection of Steelwork.

The steelwork, prior to delivery, shall be cleaned from scale, rust, dirt and grease, etc, by means of
sand blasting to near white profile SA 2½ standard. The cleaning shall be to the entire satisfaction
and approval of the Engineer. Cleaning shall proceed each day over the extent of surfaces, which
can be painted on that day.

Immediately after cleaning as described above, the surfaces, which shall be thoroughly dry, shall be
given one coat of approval zinc rich epoxy primer or other approved or specified priming paint. Site
weld locations shall be left free from paint within 150mm of the weld position and contact surfaces in
connections using High strength Friction grip bolts shall not be painted nor shall lengths to be
encased in concrete. Immediately after completion of erection all damaged paint shall be scraped off
and made good to the approval of the Engineer. The contractor shall also clean down and apply one
coat of primer to all site bolts, site belted connections and side weld locations and the paint work
generally shall be left in sound condition for subsequent painting.

All paint to be used shall be stored under cover in such conditions as will preserve it from extremes of
temperature and the paint shall be used and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.

Surface which are to be brought permanently into close contact or made inaccessible either in the
shops or upon erection shall, after cleaning be given two coats of Zinc rich epoxy primer to BS 2523
type A or other approved or specified paint and the surfaces shall be brought into contact while paint
is still wet.

All enclosed surfaces of box members shall be completely sealed by oiling or by coating with an
approved Bitumen paint and all such members and tubes shall have their ends closed by suitable
plates welded in position.

Steelwork shall be stored on site on steel or timber blockings to keep all sections clear from the
ground.

The steel sections where specified to be factory rust-proofed shall be rust proofed by a hot dip
galvanizing, metalizing or sheradizing process. The rust-proofing shall be sufficient to withstand the
72 hours salt-spray test as provided for in BS7479 1991 if the rust proof coating shall be damaged

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 103
 VOLUME III

during the progress of work, the damaged part shall be recoated to the original thickness and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

9.7 FIRE PROTECTION

9.7.1 Surface preparation

Steel surface shall be prepared by sand blast cleaning in accordance with BS 7079

Blast clean to BS 7079 averages surface profile to SA 2.5 standard. Hot dipped galvanized

100 microns.

Surfaces should be dry and free from visual contamination in the form of grit, dust or grease before
abrasive cleaning.

9.7.2 Priming

Zinc phosphate epoxy primer shall be applied immediately after cleaning as described above on dry
surfaces and at temperatures in excess of 10 degree C and under conditions of reasonable relative
humidity.

Apply material by airless spray in one or more coats to a Dry Film Thickness (DFT) not less then 75
microns.

9.7.3 Intermediate coat

Intermediate coat shall be In tumescent paint (2 hours fire rating) and shall be applied by airless spray
on zinc phosphate epoxy primer 2 hours after application of the priming coat .

9.7.4 Finishing coat.

Polyurethane topcoat Finishing shall be applied by airless spray to a thickness of not less than 75
microns DFT.

9.7.5 Tolerances for structural steel work.

No structural steel work member shall differ from the line, level and plumb shown on the drawings by
more than 3 mm and any such departure from the true line or plumb shall not occur at a rate in
excess of on percent.

In preparation of shop drawings and designing the steel work connections, the contractor shall make
such allowance for lack of fit and ease of erection, as he shall consider necessary.

Any work lying outside the above mentioned tolerances should be dealt with as directed by the
Engineer and at the expense of the contractor.

9.7.6 Grouting Bearing Plates.

All bedding and grouting shall be carried out using a proprietary make, high mechanical strength, free
flowing epoxy grout. The grout shall be a 2 component aggregate filled epoxy resin, based on a low
viscosity liquid reactor producing of type Sikadur®-42 MP Slow of coverage 2.0 kg/m2/mm thickness
with minimum grout depth of 10mm and maximum grout depth of 150mm and with the following
properties:

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 104
 VOLUME III

Compressive strength ASTM C 579 ~79 N/mm² (23°C, 50% rH, after 1 day)

(Test specimen size: 50 * 50 * 50mm) ~91 N/mm² (23°C, 50% rH, after 3 days

~99 N/mm² (23°C, 50% rH, after 7 days)

~105 N/mm² (23°C, 50% rH, after 28 days)

Flexural strength ASTM C 580 ~ 35 N/mm² (23°C, 50% rH, after 14 days)

Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 ~ 15 N/mm² (23°C, 50% rH, after 14 days)

E-Modulus ASTM C 580 > 12’000 N/mm² (Tangent modulus of elasticity in bending)

Bearing plates shall not be grouted until the steel work has been finally leveled and plumbed to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

The preparation of the concrete surfaces receiving the grout, mixing application, curing, etc. shall be
strictly in accordance with the written instruction of the manufacturer.

9.8 PROTECTION FOR NON FIRE RATED STRUCTURAL STEEL

The system to be as explained in item 7 above but the painting system to be as follows:

1- One coat of Epoxy primer (As per manufacturer recommendation with min.
thickness of 75 microns DFT).

2- Polyurethane top coats (As per manufacturer recommendation with min.

thickness of 75 microns DFT).

3- Total painting system shall be 200 micron DFT

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 105
 VOLUME III

10. Floor, Wall and Ceiling

Note : SIKA Products must be used where ever specified. Contractors scope is limited to
application / installation as per manufacturers guidelines and approved method statements.

10.1 CEMENT

The cement shall be as described in Concrete work

10.2 WATER

All water used in the completion of the finishes as specified herein shall be clear, clean, potable,
freshwater, free from all deleterious matter or chemical impurities which may adversely affect the
finishes and shall comply with BS 3148.

10.3 SAND

The sand is to be clean, sharp, river or pit sand free from earth, loam, saline materials or other
impurities and well graded from coarse to fine.

For use in plastering, sand is to comply with the requirements of BS 1198 Table 1

For use in beds, granolithic finishing, tile bedding and jointing etc., sand is to comply with the
requirements of BS 1199 Table 1.

10.4 LIME (Not used)

10.5 GYPSUM PLASTER

Gypsum plaster shall be a dual-purpose plaster (undercoat and finishing as retarded semi-hydrate
gypsum class B as BS 1191. The resultant plaster shall be capable of being trawled to a smooth
surface, highly resistant to cracking and crazing and chemically inert when set.

10.6 ADMIXTURES AND PLASTICIZERS

All additives and the like shall only be used when approved in writing by the Engineer and in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.

10.7 COLOUR PIGMENTS

Colour pigments shall comply with the requirements of BS 1014, and to be lime proof and non-fading.

10.8 PLASTERBOARD & CEMENT SHEETS (not sheet)

10.9 METAL LATHING, STOPS AND BEADS, EXPANSION JOINTS COVER STRIP.

Metal lathing, stop and beads are to suit the plaster and tile thicknesses and are to be as
manufactured by the expanded Metal Co. Ltd. or equal and approved and is to be fixed with non-
ferrous nails to walls strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

All internal areas using G.I whereas external areas are to be using S/S 316 grade.

Expansion Joint Cover Strip (for all types of finishes generally)

Expansion joint, cover strips shall be complying to drawing details and approved by consultant and by
the joint sealant manufacturer.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 106
 VOLUME III

10.10 GRANITE TILES

Granite floor and wall tiles are to generally comply with the requirements of BS 4131 and they are to
be supplied by a manufacturer approved by the Engineer. The floor tiles are to be laid on a ready-
supplied cement material of type Sika® Ceram supplied by SIKA and specifically designed for the
fixing of marble and granite tiles to make up the total floor finish thickness. The wall tiles shall be
fixed by recommended materials from SIKA..

10.11 CERAMIC TILES

Unglazed ceramic floor and wall tiles are to generally comply with the requirements of BS 1286.

The glazed ceramic floor tiles and curved skirting are to comply with the requirements of BS 1281.

The tile adhesive materials to be used as recommended by SIKA depending on tiles type thickness
and usage application.

10.12 Workshop Extension Floor slab and floor coating:

At workshop floor area, there shall be concrete grade slab 15 cm thick reinforced with two layers of
steel Dia 12 in both directions to carry the movement and the loads of heavy traffic of cars . It shall be
constructed with necessary construction, expansion and transverse joints. Each panel should not
exceed 25 m2. The slab surface shall be prepared and levelled to receive the specified floor coating
which is Multilayer Decking system as specified.

The floor slab should be isolated from the plinth beams and stub columns by 12 mm thick flex cellboard
filled with approved sealant.

Floor trench for electrical cables \ services is to be considered and waterproofed and covered with
removable concrete panels or G.I grating wherever located. No cables nor pipes are to be visibly layed
above ground for any reason.

The Workshop slab floor coating shall comply with the floor coating of type F-07 mentioned below in
details.
Proposed products and application of all materials are to be strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and to be carried out under the supervision of the consultant and the responsibility of the
approved applicator by the manufacturer of the floor coating system.
The main contractor to submit manufacturer’s certification stating that all materials supplied are same
as specified and are compatible with each other, suited for location and purpose intended and shipped
in sufficient quantity to ensure proper, timely installation.
The Main contractor should submit a Guarantee as per flooring requirements of minimum ten years
from the date of the substantial completion supported with guarantees of manufacturing from the
supplier. The applicator is to take full responsibility against any defect or failure which may happen to
the decking system. Certification that the system is meeting the design criteria should be submitted
along with the guarantee.

10.13 SURFACE HARDENERS & ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS

The contractor shall treat surfaces of cement and sand screeds with suitable medium duty surface
hardener, used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 107
 VOLUME III

For adhesive and Sealant:

Use 3-4mm high performance latex modified non-shrinkage and water-resistance cementitious tile
adhesive of type Sika® Ceram-201 LM supplied by SIKA and specifically designed for the fixing of
tiles in wet areas and provide a polyurethane modified acrylic dispersion waterproof membrane to the
substrate underneath the tile adhesive of type Sikalastic®-WR and apply as per the manufacture’s
instruction mentioned in the latest local product data sheet.

10.14 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY

Workmanship shall conform to the recommendations of the appropriate codes of practice, the
contractor is responsible for the provision of all labour, scaffolding, materials tools, plant, etc.,
required for the completion of the execution of the works, to the full satisfaction of the Engineer.

10.15 DEFECTIVE/DAMAGED WORK

All defective or damaged work shall be cut out and patched as directed by the Engineer.

All patched surfaces shall match the consistency and finish of the original surface and shall be level
with adjoining surfaces.

Damaged or deteriorated materials and manufactured items shall not be used in the works. Any
materials or manufactured items damaged during and after bedding or setting in position shall be
removed and replaced by and at the contractor's expense.

10.16 STORAGE

All branded materials delivered to site are to be properly stored in water tight shed on a dry floor, or in
equivalent conditions to avoid deterioration prior to use. Any materials which deteriorate or become
damaged before use are to be removed from site and replaced at the Contractor's.

10.17 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

Surfaces to receive plastering, beds and the like are to be dry brushed to remove all loose particles,
dust, laitance, efflorescence, efflorescence and the like, any projecting fins on concrete surfaces shall
be hacked off. All traces of mould oil shall be removed from concrete surfaces by scrubbing with
water containing detergents and rinsing with fresh water.

Surfaces are to be wetted and re-wetted as required to equalize suction before the first coat of plaster
or the like is applied. Particularly dense, hard concrete surfaces are to be wetted and re-wetted as
required before bonding plaster is applied.

Where surfaces are out of line, they are to be brought to level by hacking or dubbing out in similar mix
to the undercoat prior to commencement of finishing. Irregularities in surfaces to be plastered shall
be filled with mortar (without lime twenty four hours before plastering commences.

Joints in block work and the like shall be well raked out before re plastering to form a good key.
Smooth concrete surfaces to be plastered shall be treated with and approved proprietary bonding
agent.

Before plastering is commenced all junctions between differing materials shall be reinforced. This
shall apply where walls join columns and beams, particularly where flush, and similar situations where
creaks are likely to develop and as directed by the Engineer. The reinforcement shall consist of a strip
of expanded metal lathing 300mm wide which shall be plugged, nailed or stapled as required at
intervals not exceeding 450 mm at both edges fixed to cover both materials evenly.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 108
 VOLUME III

The reinforcement is also to be provided over all electrical conduits and service pipes running within
the walls.

Plastering shall not be commenced until all mechanical and electrical services, conduits, pipes and
fixtures have been installed.

The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the suitability of all surfaces prior to the commencement of
the application of the finishing material.

10.18 PLASTERING AND RENDERING

Internal plastering is to comply with BS 5492.

Withstanding the below aspects of plastering works that should be complied with the plastering for this works
shall be mechanically applied with pre-approved machine and method of statement, accordingly, no on site
mixing or plastering preparation works shall be permitted

The plaster for use internally is to be composed of one part cement and four parts of sand, and is to
be applied in two coats to a the finished stated thickness.

The render for use externally is to be composed of one part cement and four parts of sand, and is to
be applied to the finished stated thickness stated thickness externally.

Plaster or render is to be mixed in clean buckets and gauge boxes. All tools are to be kept clean and
not to be contaminated with plaster or render.

Preparation works as noted below to be completed well in advance of commencement of plastering

work.

 All the service lines to be concealed in plastered area are to be completed and tested.
Cutting on plastered wall not be accepted.
 Cutting made on block work for service lines in wider size shall be repaired by concrete.
 Approved expanded metal mesh to be provided at all joints between block
 Work / concrete and on the repaired surface of cutting made for services viz. electrical,
plumbing pipes etc.
 Angle beads to be provided on all internal corners of walls & also in R.C. column projection
sample to be submitted for approval.
 Angle beads are to be provided on all corners for the door and window opening wherever
plastering will be done.
 Key coat to be applied and cured properly on the surface to be plastered and same shall be
from approved supplier.
 Hacking to be done on concrete surface to roughen the area before the application of key
coat.
 Plaster level pads to be provided to maintain the line, level and plumb.
 Irregularities on the surface to be plastered shall be filled with mortar 24 hour before
plastering work
 Joints in block etc. to be well raked out to form a good key.
 All surfaces to be plastered shall be clean and free from dust, loose mortar and traces of salt.

The ingredients for the plaster or render are to be mixed mechanically.

The contractor is to ensure that before plastering or rendering commences the junctions between
differing bases materials are reinforced with a strip of expanding metal lath secured at both edges. All
angle beads and the like shall also have been fixed.

All surfaces to be plastered or rendered are to be sprayed with water, which is to be allowed to dry out
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 109
 VOLUME III
before a key coat of cement slurry is applied.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 110
 VOLUME III

All undercoats are to be scratched to form an adequate dry for the next coat. , The setting coat is not
to be applied until the floating coat has been left in a moist condition for at least three days.

All Plastering shall be executed in a neat workmanlike manner and made good to wood frames,
skirting, pipes, fittings and the like.

Plaster work is to be finished with as smooth, trawled face, free from blemished and fit to receive
decoration. Render is to be finished with a wood float. Any blown, cracked or otherwise damaged
plaster or render shall be condemned by the Engineer and is to be hacked off and made good with
quick setting plaster at the Contractor's expense.

Full use is to be made of grounds, rules and angle trowels to ensure that all wall faces finish plane
and true to line in all direction and that all angles are straight, true and plumb. Prices for plastering
and rendering are to ensure that work to walls and ceilings are effectively 'cut' at the joint so as to
minimize damage due to movement.

Tyrolean finish on plastered surface externally as noted shall be applied with an approved machine in
not less than two coats to a minimum of 6mm finished thickness. The surface finish is to be both
rough textured or pressed and the render it to be cured after application of the second coat.

10.19 GYPSUM PLASTER

Gypsum plaster shall generally be applied in accordance with the manufacturers preferred. All mixing
equipment shall be clean and thoroughly washed after each mix.

It is important that all equipment is kept clean and free from set plaster and impurities.

Should any plaster be present in subsequent mixes the Engineer shall condemn the mix and require
the Contractor to clean all the utensils and equipment before continuing with further mixing.

The gypsum plaster shall be of European origin and suitable for mixing with water. The plaster is a
gypsum hemihydrates premixed plaster containing special aggregates and additives.

Preparation of background surfaces shall follow the previous clause for plasterboard or concrete
which shall be treated with a proprietary bonding agent. The bonding agent shall be compatible with
the gypsum plaster and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.

Application of the gypsum plaster may be by hand or by machine at the selection of the Contractor
and it shall be carried out as follows:

Hand applied plasterer shall be applied to solid background with firm pressure. The initial coat shall
firstly be applied as a tight coat, then turning back with the same batch of material to give an overall
thickness of 11 mm. For thicknesses over 11mm, scratch the first or render coat thoroughly to
provide a good mechanical dry for subsequent coats. Apply further coats to a maximum thickness of
8 mm per coat. Allow each coat to set before applying the next. Rule the floating coat to an even
surface and lightly scratch to provide a key for the application of the thistle finish coat. The minimum
thickness of the thistle finish coat shall be 2 mm and finished with a smooth, blemish free surface.

When application is by machine, the plaster is sprayed onto the background in the form of ribbon by
holding the nozzle of the plastering machine close to the surface. The consistency of the mix shall
allow the ribbon to run together. When a substantial area has been covered the plaster is worked and
ruled in exactly the same manner as for the hand applied undercoat. Scratch undercoat and apply
thistle finish coat as before.

The contractor shall only use operatives skilled in the application of plaster in this operation.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 111
 VOLUME III

All plaster shall be finished to receive decoration and any damaged or cracked surface shall be cut
out and replaced at the Contractor's expense.

10.20 ANGLE BEADS

All external angels in walls, and at openings such as doors, windows and the like shall be protected
with galvanized mild steel angle beads complying with BS 1246 Fig,7 Profile C3. Whereas for external
to use stainless steel.

They shall be securely plugged, mailed or stapled as required at intervals not exceeding 18" (450mm)
at both edges.

Work to include as well, supply and fix of galvanized mild steel plaster stops to finish the plaster at
meeting with skirting leaving 10mm joint groove.

10.21 BEDS FOR FLOOR TILING

Pre-mixed, 1 component title adhesive from Sika.

10.22 SAND CEMENT SCREED

Floor screeds are pre-mixed, pre bagged machine applied screeds are allowed. No on site mixing of
“standard” screed. (Specification to be provided by Sika)

10.23 MOSAIC TILES (TERRAZZO)

The mosaic floor tiles shall comply with the requirements of BS 4131 and supplied by manufacturer
approved by the Engineer. The tiles are to be laid on a cement and sand screed to make total floor
thickness as stated herein or as shown on the drawings.

All tile adhesive and tile grouting product should be SikaCeram®Range

Mosaic tiles and slabs shall be composed of 2.5 parts of marble chips bedded in 1 part coloured
cement. Terrazzo tiles and slabs shall be laid in the locations shown on the drawing and in
accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.

The floor tiles and slabs shall be to the sizes shown on the drawings and caster in heavy metal molds
under pressure. Tiles and slabs shall be cured by totally immersing them. After the initial set has
taken place, in a tank of clean table water for at least 24 hours or other approved means and then
ground and filled, before distribution to the site Grinding shall be done wet by means of a No. 80
carborundum stone. Filling shall be carried out with a neat cement grout SikaCeram®Range of the
same colour and should be worked into the surface with a wooden scraper to fill all voids and air
holes. Surplus grout shall be removed with a dry cloth. After a minimum period of 24 hours polishing
shall be carried out with means of a No140 carborundum stone.

Skirting tiles shall be manufactured in the same way as the floor tiles to the sizes shown on the
drawings and shall match the floor tiles.

Samples of the tiles shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering same.

The tiles and slabs shall be laid with minimum of cut tiles or slabs, but where it is necessary they shall
be carefully cut with a suitable cutting tool and any rough edges shall be rubbed smooth. Cut tiles or
slabs which do not fit properly shall be replaced with correctly cut tiles or slabs.

Before laying, the tiles or slabs shall be thoroughly soaked in clean war and drained, so that no free
moisture remains on the back of the tiles.
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 112
 VOLUME III
The tile or slab bedding shall be as stated in this Specification, Only enough mortar shall be mixed
and spread at one time as can be covered with tiles or slabs before the mortar has attained its initial
set. The tiles or slabs shall be laid on the mortar bed while the surface of the bed is still in a plastic
state and shall be lightly tapped with a hammer to ensure solid bedding and to prevent the formation
of air pockets, Tiles or slabs shall be laid level or to fall as may be require with contiguous joints in
both directions

Movement joints for the full depth of the screed and tiling shall be provided to the perimeter of the
work and dividing the flooring into areas not exceeding one square meter using 1/2" x 11/2” ebonite
strips fixed before the screed is laid.

Areas not exceeding 10'0" wide do not require longitudinal movement joints.

Dividing Strip.

Wherever differing floor finishes about each other, they are to be finished with a fair square cut edge
and separated by means of dividing strip.

The dividing strip shall be formed of P.V.C, aluminum, brass or Marble and to be to the Engineer’s
approval, fixed in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.

10.24 CERAMIC FLOOR AND WALL TILING

Glazed ceramic wall tiles shall comply with the requirements of BS 1281.

All tile adhesive and tile grouting product should be SikaCeram®Range

The surfaces to which tiles are to be fixed are to be thoroughly dry before fixing commences and free
from all defects. Any such defects are to be made good before work commences. Wall tiling shall be
carried out in accordance with CP 212.

The ceramic tiles shall be true in size and shape, free from flaws, cracks and crazing, uniform in
colour and texture and keyed on the back. They shall be equal in all respects to samples approved
by the Engineer.

External angles and exposed edges of tile areas shall be formed with rounded edge tiles. Misfits as
well as damaged or defective tiles shall be removed and replaced with good where tiling abuts
frames, surrounds, etc., or where holes are required for pipes etc., the tiles shall be carefully cut and
fitted to form a neat close joint. Fair exposed edges of tiled areas shall be finished with tiles having a
polished edge matching the surface.

The wall tiles shall be fixed with approved adhesive to a true vertical face with continuous vertical and
horizontal joints. Joints shall be straight, level perpendicular and pointed neatly using specified grout.
The width of joints shall be as directed by the Engineer. Any surplus grout which adheres to the tiling
shall be wiped off with a damp cloth before it sets hard.

The floor tiles shall be laid symmetrically about the center lines of the room and any cut tiles shall be
made by using a proper tool leaving the cut edges square and smooth. The tiles shall be solidly
bedded in cement and san mortar (1:4) and pointed in colored cement to match the tiling.

Before setting in position, glazed tiles shall be thoroughly immersed in clean potable water for 24
hours and drained off so that no free moisture remains on the back of the tile.

The surface of concrete or block work shall be thoroughly cleaned, wetted and well dried before
applying the base coats and screeds Mixes, thicknesses and methods of application of beds and
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 113
 VOLUME III
backings for wall and floor tiling shall be as shown on the drawings Mortar for base coats shall be
used within one hour after mixing and re tempering will not be permitted. The base coat shall be
applied with sufficient force to prevent air pockets and to secure a good and shall be scored or cross-
scratched, when nearly set, to form a key. The surface of the base coat shall be well wetted and dried
immediately before the tiling is commenced.

Floor and wall tiling to kitchens shall be run under or behind cupboard units.

Movement joints are to be provided at the perimeter of areas of ceramic tiling and at intervals not
exceeding 4m in either direction in larger areas. In addition, the Contractor shall take adequate
precautions against lifting or cracking of ceramic tiles for any other person.

Upon completion, all tiling shall be left clean and free from cement or stains.

For areas specified, tiles shall be certified acid resistant min. thickness 8 mm and size and colour to
approval and shall be fixed in Mortar Bed or Adhesive to approval of Engineer.

Tiles shall be necessarily true to line and shape.

The approval of the engineer to the setting out of tiles is to be obtained before commencing work and
a sample room if to be set out for the Engineer's approval prior to continuing work on other rooms.

Shop drawings shall be prepared where patterns in the wall tiling are required.

Tiles shall be fixed with true horizontal and vertical joints of an even width of 1-2 mm to a true vertical
plane.

Tiles adhesive shall be approved in writing by the Engineer prior to the commencement of this work.

Adequate time shall be allowed to enable complete setting of the tile bedding before joints are
grouted. Grout of a plastic mix of neat cement, colour to Engineer's selection, shall be used in
grouting up the joints. The whole of the tiled surface is to be thoroughly cleaned down on completion
and left in perfect condition.

Any cut tiles are to be nearly and cleanly cut using an approved method and cut tales are to be used
only at internal corners or in other locations to be approved by the Engineer. All service points in wall
tiling shall be of drilled holes if the tiles in which they are located are central to the tile.

10.25 FLOOR TILING

Prior to commencing the floor tiling the Contractor shall satisfy himself that the surface on which the
tiles are to be laid is satisfactory to receive the tiles. It is the responsibility of the contractor to provide
a satisfactory surface and or bedding and any remedial work necessary is to be carried out at the
contractor's expense.

All tile adhesive and tile grouting product should be SikaCeram®Range

Before laying commences, the base to be free from dust, loose material grease, plaster, and the like.

Care is to be taken in cutting and fitting and the setting out of tile and colour patterns are to be as
shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Shop drawings are required where patters in
the floor tiling are required. Any adhesive on tile surface or any other finished surface is to be
completely cleaned off, the tiles shall be laid with true aligned joints of an even width of 1-2 mm and
grouted up on completion.

The work shall be set out from the center of rooms using whole tiles and working outwards. Rates are
to include for the all cut margins and make up pieces at limits and boundaries.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 114
 VOLUME III
The flatness of tiled or paved floors must be such that a two meter rule moved in all directions shows
no bump or hollow of over 4 mm.

The contractor is to store ceramic floor tiles in such a way that they are protected from moisture until
laying, Ceramic floor tiles shall be laid in manner as previously described in this section on to a
cement and sand bed, with even joints of not wider than 2mm.

Care being taken to adequately fill and remove all air pockets from beneath the tiles. The tiles are to
be grouted with a tinted mortar mix to match the tiles, a minimum of twelve hours after completion of
the tiling.

All floor tiling in wet area such as bathrooms, toilets, kitchen, washing area, mechanical rooms and
the like above ground floor level shall be laid over a self-adhesive waterproof membrane on the
concrete subbase. Provide continuous skirting up walls at least 300 mm high. Floor tiling shall be
laid to falls towards drainage outlet of respective rooms.

Protect floor tiling with slurry or like material on completion and clean off and prepare flooring to
satisfaction of engineer.

10.26 MARBLE AND GRANITE WORK

Marble or granite shall be obtained from a source/quarry that has the capacity to provide quantity,
quality and sizes required for the Works.

All tile adhesive and tile grouting product should be SikaCeram®Range

Samples of all marble and granite to be used in the Works are to be submitted to the Engineer for
approval prior to commencement of same on site. Actual materials used in the works shall match the
approved samples.

Marble or granite shall be of the best quality (Italian origin) Rosa Porino, Red Alakanti, Dark
Embroider, Cream Marvel (Marble from Italian Origin only will be acceptable) smooth, uniform in
colour and texture, free from voids, holes, vents, cracks, earth veins, objectionable irregularities and
laminations or structural weakness.

Where vein colours are acceptable, they shall, insofar as they from a distinct pattern, be laid to
complete the pattern or in the direction of the vein.

The Contractor is to ensure that all marble and granite delivered to site is stored on a raised platform
in a water free area and is protected with suitable sheeting.

The Marble or granite cutting should be smooth and clear, suitable method of cutting should be used
as per the approved pattern. Water jet cutting method is to be followed if the pattern requires the
same, otherwise cut to size method to be followed.

Any chipped or stained pieces are to be removed from site and replaced at the Contractor's expense.

Marble or granite for use as wall cladding is first to be shown on working drawings submitted for the
Engineer's approval. These drawings shall give site dimensions, relationship with other materials,
detail the key members of each slab together with details of anchorages and the like. No marble or
granite shall be worked until these drawings are approved. Layout of marble of granite as flooring
shall be similarly presented. All patterns shall be individually presented for the Engineer's approval.
Work in this section shall be completed to the tolerance set out in CP 298 and BS 5390.

The contractor is to supply all necessary stainless steel fixings, dowels and continuous stainless steel
supports at the base of wall, linings as required, and all in accordance with CP 298. All fixings are to
be concealed when the work is complete.
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 115
 VOLUME III
All external angles are to be rebated jointed. Where marble or granite abuts door frames and the like
the edges shall be chamfered.

The contractor is to use the following tables as a guide to the minimum number of anchors required to
support each slab:

Slab size No of anchors per slab

Not exceeding 0.06M2
over 0.60 not exceeding 1.20 m2
over 1.20 not exceeding3.60 m2
over 3.60 not exceeding 6.00 m2
Over 6.00 m One extra anchor for each additional square
meter of slab

The Contractor is to be solely responsible for the provision of sufficient fixings.

The marble or granite finish shall be as described and as samples approved by the Engineer before
ordering of the material commences.

Unless otherwise instructed wall linings are to be set 30 mm clear of the structural backing and the
rear of each slab is to be coated with sealant paint from SIKA to prevent staining form behind.
In addition to anchors and the like, internal work is to be bedded on plaster of paris or non-staining
cement mortar spots, and the points are to be neatly pointed in non-staining cement mortar. External
work is to be set as internal work, but non-staining, quick-setting cement is to be used. Provide slurry
backing to all marble and granite wall cladding up to 1500 mm finished floor level. Sealants, where
used, shall match in colour the stone colour around it.

Marble and granite flooring slabs are to be tamped onto a cement and sand screed with a suitable
mallet, until firmly bedded, the slabs are then to be lifted and the backs parged with wet cement,
before relaying to the correct level. Flooring shall be laid to a tolerance of +/- 3 mm over a 3 meter
straight edge. The floor is then to be roped off for 24 hour, after which the slabs are to be grouted
with water and neat non-staining coloured cement.

Marble and granite cladding is to be protected at the corners with non-staining wood form work, and
floors are to be protected by suitable boarding or slurry plus approved polystyrene 1000 gage if
required as approved by the Engineer.

On completion of work,, all marble and granite is to be thoroughly cleaned by scrubbing with fibre
brushes and mild alkaline solution, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.

All thresholds shall be one piece fixed at floor openings of the material type approved by the
Engineer. The threshold shall be bedded in cement and sand mortar and be the same width as the
opening in which they are being fixed. Shape and finish to Engineer's approval.

10.27 LIGHT GLUED FLOOR COVERINGS

1. Surface Preparation

The light glued floor coverings shall be laid on a screed to the thickness shown on the
drawings. All screed materials shall conform to the requirements of previous clauses of these
sections. The screed thickness shall include taking out all irregularities in the concrete slab
and be finished true and level so that a 2 meter ruler laid on the floor shows no dip or dump of
more than 3 mm. Prior to the installation of the floor covering a levelling screed shall be laid
to ensure a perfectly smooth surface. The product shall be selected from a range that is

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 116
 VOLUME III
compatible with the adhesive to be used. Products with a caseine or plaster base shall not be
used.If the screed is not levelled to the satisfaction of the engineer, Self-levelling material
shall be used to the engineer approval.

2. Laying of Plastic Flooring (Vinyl PVC etc.)

This work shall not commence until the levelness and surface of the levelling screed is
approved in writing by the engineer. Further preparatory work shall be at the Contractor's
expense.

The adhesive used shall be that as specified by the tile/sheet manufacturer and applied in
accordance with the written instructions. All surfaces to receive adhesive shall be clean and
free form dirt to avoid poor adhesion and unevenness of finished surface. The flooring shall
be laid by double gluing unless otherwise stated in the technical instructions. All joints shall
be welded perfectly in line and all cutting and fitting at corners, junctions and the like shall be
carried out in a workmanlike manner. Skirting tiles shall be fixed as detailed to room
perimeters ensuring a neat joint at the junction with the flooring. Excess adhesive shall be
carefully removed to ensure no damage to the flooring.

The tiles shall be laid symmetrically about the centre line of the room and accurately cut with
a proper tool, against the walls or any obstruction. The tiles shall be fixed with an approved
adhesive used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

100 mm high curved vinyl tile skirting shall be provided where shown.

Screeds for vinyl tiling shall be perfectly smooth. Where the surface of the screed is
considered by the Engineer to be unsuitable, a coating of latex compound shall be applied, at
the contractor's expense, before tile laying is commenced. No tiling shall be executed until the
screed is completely dried out.

On completion, surplus adhesive shall be removed and the floor allowed to harden before
finally washing down with a proprietary cleaner. At final completion an approved sealer shall
be applied and the floor polished with an approved floor wax. Both sealer and floor wax shall
be as recommended by the manufacturer of the vinyl tiles.

All section of the flooring that show poor adhesion, swelling, bumps and hollows greater than
approved by the Engineer, inaccurate joint alignment. Open joints, poor workmanship cutting
and the like shall be removed and redone at the Contractor's expense.

3. Laying of Textile Flooring

The surface shall be prepared as for the plastic flooring and these works shall be carried out
in accordance with BS 5325 by experienced operatives. This work shall not commence until
the building is water tight and all wet trades including painting and the mechanical and
electrical works are completed.

10.28 SUSPENDED CEILINGS

1. General

The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the service and suspended
ceilings, including checking the ceiling heights and setting to module which shall be to the
exact locations required by the Engineer, who shall confirm and approve the setting out and
location of all fittings, luminaries, switches smoke detectors, security alarms and detectors, air
conditioning grilles and controls and the like. Suspended ceilings shall be installed by
specialists. They shall be capable of outstanding normal air pressure and suction forces
action both below the ceiling and within the ceiling void.
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 117
 VOLUME III
The Contractor shall prepare, and submit for approval, fully dimensioned working drawing
prepared form the general working drawing shall coordinate the service and ceiling
installation. Setting out points common to all trades including service shall be established
early in the manner described and shown on the working drawings.

Under no circumstances shall work of other sections be concealed by suspended ceilings

until same has been inspected and approved by the Engineer.

Rod type suspension system hangers and hook bolts for suspension systems shall be fixed to
structural concrete soffits. Self - drilling threaded metal sockets of an approved type shall be
used for fixing to concrete. Suspension and framing shall be of metal sections only. No
timber framing will be accepted.

Finished ceiling heights shall be rigorously respected; they shall be measured from the
finished floor levels.

The ceiling shall be left perfectly flat and shall not show a deviation of more than 3 mm from a
3 meter straight edge. The Contractor shall take all possible precaution to eliminate any
defects.

Price shall include cutting and fitting ceilings around obstacles and neatly finishing the edges
of the work.

Proprietary suspended ceiling system shall be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, by workmen skilled in this work in a rigid and secure manner so
that the final surface is free of any waves, buckles or sap.

Tiles and ceiling forming a grid or pattern shall be set out on the axis of the room in both
directions.

Suspended ceilings shall not be erected until the window have been glazed, the building
closed in, the plaster work dried out, all wet work completed and the building suitably air
conditioned relative humidity must not exceed 70% and the temperature must be maintained
within the rage 15-30 oC.

The design of and dimensional tolerances set by the manufacturer for accessory items such
as formed wire hangers, spring spacer clips, tile retains and space bars shall be such as to
assure satisfactory performance of their intended function in the suspension system.

Failure attributable to such accessories to control alignment, prevent undesirable rotation or

other unsatisfactory performance which results in unfavourable appearance will be cause for
their rejection.

General installation procedures shall be as follows:

 The area to receive treatment shall be dry and be satisfactorily closed against
excessive traffic and be protected against weather before work is started.

 Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications except as

modified by this specification.

 Install units in a true and even plane, in straight line course laid out symmetrically
about centre line of ceiling or pane, continuing pattern through wall openings or as
indicated. Border tile shall not be less than 15 cm wide.

 Fit border units neatly against vertical surfaces.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 118
 VOLUME III

 Seal joints in units around pipes, ducts and electrical outlets with acoustical sealant

 Carefully coordinate and fit units to grilles lighting fixtures and other related items of
work. In determining spacing and locations of work. In spacing and locations of
hangers for main runners and carrying channels, take into consideration the weight of
grilles, fixtures, etc that are to be installed in conjunction with ceilings.

2. Gypsum Plaster Ceilings

Gypsum plaster ceiling comprising flat tiles, units, moldings cornices and the like shall be
fabricated in accordance with relevant standards and Practices. Before commencing
manufacture of the components the contractor shall submit full detailed shop drawings. These
drawings shall indicate overall dimensions of the unit together with fixing details and the
interrelation ship with other components. On receipt of the written approval of the Engineer,
the Contractor may commence work on this section.

Gypsum plaster shall be procured form an approved European source and comply with the
requirements of BS 1191 Parts 1 and 2 ensure the highest standard workmanship. All
gypsum components shall be reinforced using 13 mm diameter hollow plastic tubes in a grid
pattern with plastic mesh infill. At junction and union between tiles and cornices, molding and
the like natural fibres shall be used to reinforce the joints. All exposed surfaces shall be sued
to perfectly flat and smooth, free from blemish and scar. All units with an external angel shall
be moulded to achieve perfectly straight and slightly rounded arises. The components shall
be fixed on to a rigid framework so as to provide a level and even surface with all points and
irregularities made good with gypsum plaster. The contractor shall submit his mix proportions
for approval which shall include gypsum, vermiculite and fibreglass crystals. The minimum
thickness of the gypsum components shall be 20mm irrespective of their purpose. All finishes
shall be left clean and smooth to receive the specified finish.

3. Fibre & Metal Tile Ceilings

The fibre tile suspended ceiling shall be 600 x600 x12 mm mineral fibre tiles obtained from a
manufacturer approved by the Engineer.

The metal tile suspended ceiling shall be 600 x600 x12 mm obtained from a manufacturer
approved by the Engineer.

The ceiling shall be fixed on a proprietary concealed grid suspension system strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

The ceiling shall be set out symmetrically around the centre of the room. Perimeters are to be
neatly trimmed with angle securely fixed to the walls. Bulkheads shall be constructed where
necessary.

Prior to installation the contractor shall provide the engineer with shop drawings showing the
proposed layout of suspension members including extra members necessary to support light
fittings etc.

The ceilings are to be fixed by competent tradesmen so that the whole is secure and free
from waves buckles sags and other defects. Tiles shall be neatly cut and fitted around light
fitting etc.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 119
 VOLUME III

11. Finishes – External & Internal

Note : SIKA Products must be used where ever specified. Contractors scope is limited to
application / installation as per manufacturers guidelines and approved method statements.

11.1 External Finishes

1. E (1) : SIKAGUARD PAINTING SYSTEM (For Interior & Exterior)

2. E (2) : Ziplock Cladding System
3. E (3) : Aluminum Structural Glazing/ Curtain wall. Door/ windows/sliding door
4. E (4) : Aluminum Glazed Fixed Window (Coloured)

11.2 E (1) : PAINTING SYSTEM

Elastomeric, Crack-Bridging, Anti-carbonation protective coating system for Internal & External walls /
ceilings using approved manufacturer.

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Documents

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 Summary
A. Provide a cold fluid-applied, water-resistive, vapor-permeable elastomeric acrylic coating
system with crack bridging (if required) and anti-carbonation properties on concrete and
other acceptable substrates.

1. Work includes substrate preparation including crack and joint treatment.

2. Work includes bridging and sealing air leakage and water intrusion pathways and gaps
including connections of wall and roof membrane, and penetrations of the building
envelope including piping, conduit, ducts and similar items

B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under
the designated Sections:
1. Section 03 30 00 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
2. Section 04 42 00 – UNIT MASONRY.
3. Section 07 24 00 – EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS.
4. Section 07 57 00 – FLUID-APPLIED ROOFING.
5. Section 07 60 00 – FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.
6. Section 07 92 13 – ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
7. Section 09 24 00 – PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING

1.3 Standards reference:

BS EN 1062-7 Paints and varnishes. Coating materials and coating systems for
exterior masonry and concrete. Determination of crack bridging
properties.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 120
 VOLUME III

BS EN ISO 2409 Paints and varnishes. Cross cut test.

BS EN 1062-3 Paints and varnishes. Coating materials and coating systems for
exterior masonry and concrete. Determination of liquid water
permeability.

BS EN 1542 Products and systems for the protection and repair of concrete
structures. Test methods. Measurement of bond strength by pull-off.

BS EN 13687-part 1 & 2 Products and systems. Methods of testing adhesion after thermal
compatibility.

BS EN 1062-11 Paints and varnishes. Method of testing Artificial weathering.

1.4 Performance Requirements

A. Cold fluid-applied, water-resistive, vapor-permeable elastomeric acrylic coating system is
intended to perform as a continuous barrier against liquid water and carbonation intrusion,
and to flash or discharge incidental water off the exterior. Coating system shall
accommodate movements of building materials as required with accessory sealant
materials at such locations, changes in substrate, perimeter conditions and penetrations.

1. System shall perform as a continuous barrier against liquid water and carbonation
intrusion.
2. Manufacturer shall provide all primary cold fluid applied, water resistive, vapor
permeable elastomeric acrylic coating materials that are physically and chemically
compatible when installed in accordance with manufacturer’s current application
requirements.

1.5 Submittals
A. Submittals: Comply with project requirements for submittals as specified in Division 01.
B. Product Data:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
C. Samples: For color verification, provide actual Samples of each type of product proposed
for use.
D. Site mockup: For confirmation of color selection, construction sequencing and standard of
acceptance. Complete prior to commencing with the project.
E. Pre-Construction Field Adhesion Testing: Written results of field tests, including summary
of joint preparation, products used and installation techniques.
F. Sustainable Design Submittals: For projects seeking USGBC LEED certification or
Estidama certification, submit manufacturer’s printed statement of VOC content and
manufacturing location relative to project site for product used.

1.6 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturing qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified product shall be ISO
9001:2008 certified and have in existence a recognized ongoing quality assurance
program, independently audited on a regular basis.

B. Installer qualifications: Installer shall have at least three year experience in installing
materials of types specified and shall have successfully completed at least three projects
of similar scope and complexity. Installer shall designate a single individual as project
foreman who shall be on site at all times during installation.

C. Applicable Regulations: Comply with local code and requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. Do not exceed VOC regulations as established by the State in which they are

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 121
 VOLUME III

being installed; including total VOC content, in grams per liter, for all system components
(i.e. primers, adhesives, coatings, and similar items).

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. Elastomeric acrylic coating materials must be delivered in original, unopened containers
with the manufacturer's name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. Damaged
material must be removed from the site immediately.
B. Store elastomeric acrylic coating materials off the ground and protect from rain, freezing
or excessive heat until ready for use.
C. Condition the specified product as recommended by the manufacturer.

1.8 Job Conditions

A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply material if it is raining or if such conditions appear
to be imminent. Minimum application temperature should be 45ºF (8ºC) and rising.
B. Protection: Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to any surfaces near work zone
due to mixing and handling of the specified material.

1.9 Warranty
A. A project specific warranty for the performance of the specified product should be agreed
and confirmed in writing from the specialist applicator, backed by the product
manufacturer's standard product supply warranty for the same period'. This warranty should
form part of the tender bid documents.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Storage)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 122
 VOLUME III

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufactures
A. All material shall be sourced from a single manufacturer.
B. The selected manufacturer must prove compatibility between all products in direct contact
with each other.

2.2 Crack-Bridging Protective Coating System Built-up

A. Elastomeric, Crack Bridging Acrylic Coating: Sikagard®-550W Elastic system comprised
of the following layers:

1. Sikagard®-550 W Elastic (Crack Bridging Protective Coating): One component,

plasto-elastic coating based on UV-curing acrylic dispersion with excellent crack-
bridging properties even at temperatures below 0°C.
2. Sikagard®-552 W Aquaprimer (Primer): One part water dispersed adhesion
promoting primer for water dispersed polymer paint coatings.

B. Applied Total Film Thickness:

1. Minimum required dry film thickness to achieve the required characteristics (CO2
equivalent air thickness of 50 m) ≈ 160 microns.

2. Minimum required dry film thickness to achieve full durability characteristics (CO2
diffusion, adhesion after thermal cycling and crack bridging) ≈ 340 microns.

2.3 Crack-Bridging Protective Coating System Properties:

A. Crack Bridging Protective Coating system: Physical properties complying with the following:
Sikagard®-550 W Elastic (Crack Bridging/ Anti-Carbonation Protective Coating): Crack
bridging, anti-carbonation, protective coating for concrete, applied on 2-3 coats at a
theoretical coverage rate of 0.25 – 0.35 kg/m2 with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Chemical Base Acrylate dispersion
Density ~ 1.39 kg/lt at 20OC
Solid Content ~ 66.1%

Carbon Dioxide Dry film thickness

d = 160 μm
Diffusion Coefficient Equivalent air layer
(µCO2) SD, CO2 = 51 m
thickness
μCO2 = 3,1 x 105
Diffusion coefficient CO2
SD, CO2 ≥ 50 m
Requirements for protection
Water Vapour Dry film thickness
d = 230 μm
Diffusion Coefficient Equivalent air layer
(µH2O) SD, H2O = 0.35 m
thickness
μH2O = 1,5 x 103
Diffusion coefficient H2O
SD, H2O ≤ 5 m
Requirements for protection

Elongation at Tear Elongation at break at room 120%

temperature (not exposed
to weathering):
Elongation at break at - 70%
20°C:

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 123
 VOLUME III
Crack-Bridging Ability EN 1062-7 Class A1 (-20°C)
Cross Cut EN ISO 2409 GT 0
Capillary Absorption EN 1062-3 w = 0,02 kg/(m2 h0.5)
Pull-Off Strength EN 1542 2,9 (2,8) N/mm2
Adhesion after EN 13687-part 1 & part 2 For Outside Application with
Thermal Compatibility DeIcing Salt Influence: 2,9 (2,1)
N/mm2
Artificial Weather EN 1062-11 Pass after 2000 hours

Sikagard®-552 W Aquaprimer (Primer): Water dispersed adhesion promoting primer,

applied in 1 coat (depending on the substrate condition) at a theoretical coverage rate of
0.1 – 0.12 kg/m2 with the following properties:
Technical Data Main requirement
Chemical Base Acrylate dispersion
Density ~ 1.0 kg/l (at +20°C)
Solid Content ~ 20% by volume
Overcoat time 5 hours at +20°C
2.5 hours at +35°C
Curing Treatment No special curing required but must be protected from rain for at
least 30 minutes at +20°C.

B. Elastomeric Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer of elastomeric coating. For

exterior and interior joints in vertical surfaces such as, but not limited to control and/or
expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete or unit masonry, joints between architectural pre-
cast concrete units, joints between dissimilar materials or perimeter joints at frames of
doors, windows, storefronts, louvers and similar openings apply a low-modulus, single-
component or multi-component non-sag sealant incompliance with ASTM C920, Type S or
M, Grade NS, Class 25, Class 35, Class +50/-50, Class +100/-50. Acceptable products:

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 124
 VOLUME III

Sikaflex®-Construction+ (Flexible sealant for concrete and masonry facades): One-part,

moisture curing, elastic joint sealant suitable for movement and connection joints in
Facades with movement capacity of ±35 according to ASTM C719, with the following
properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Approvals Conforms to EN15651 class 25 HM
/Standards Conforms to ISO 11600 F 25 HM
Conforms to ASTM C920 class 35
EMICODE EC 1PLUS R, very low
emission
Chemical Base i-Cure® technology polyurethane
Density CQP 006-4, ISO 1183- ~ 1.44 kg/lt. (colour grey)
1

Skinning Time CQP 019-1 ~ 65 minutes (+23°C / 50% r.h.)

Movement ISO 9047 25%
Capacity ASTM C719 ± 35%

Sag Flow CQP 061-4, ISO 7390 0 mm, very good

Shore A Hardness CQP 023-1, ISO 868 ~ 28 (after 28 days at 23°C / 50% r.h.)
Tensile Strength CQP 036-1, ISO 37 ~ 0.9 N/mm2 (+23°C / 50% r.h.)
Tear Propagation CQP 045-1, ISO 34 ~ 5.0 N/mm (after 28 days at 23°C / 50%
Resistance r.h.)

E-Modulus CQP 555-1, ISO 8339 ~ 0.45 N/mm2 at 100% elongation

(+23°C / 50% r.h.)
Elongation at CQP 036-1, ISO 37 ~ 800% (+23°C / 50% r.h.)
Break

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 125
 VOLUME III
Elastic Recovery ISO 7389 B > 90% (+23°C / 50% r.h.)
Curing Rate CQP 049-2 ~ 3.0 mm/24hr (+23°C / 50% r.h.)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 Examination:
A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the Work of this section.
B. Verify surfaces are clean, dry, sound and free of voids, deformations, protrusions and
contaminants that may inhibit application or performance of the elastomeric coatings
C. Notify Architect in writing of any discrepancies.
D. Commencement of the Work in an area shall mean Installer’s acceptance of the substrate.

3.2 Surface Preparation

A. Verify that the surfaces are clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections
and horizontal surfaces are properly sloped to drains. Fill voids, gaps and spalled areas
in substrate to provide a uniform even surface.
B. Verify that all openings or penetrations through the work area are appropriately treated
and secured back to solid blocking.
C. Ensure all preparatory Work including curbs and upturn details are complete prior to
applying the coating.
D. Substrates must be clean, sound, and free of surface contaminants or other contaminants
deleterious to the adhesion or bond of the coating. Remove dust, laitance, and grease,
oils, curing compounds, form release agents and all foreign particles by mechanical
means. Substrate shall be in accordance with ICRI Guideline No. 03732 for coatings and
fall within CSP1 to CSP3.

3.3 Application of concrete repair and patching materials

A. Fill all visible hairline cracks and surface defects with appropriate Sika repair mortar,
leveling mortar or surface filler prior to applying coating primer. Irregularities of substrate
shall be leveled with specified leveling mortar or surface fillers as appropriate.

3.4 Crack treatment for masonry and concrete

A. For non-structural, moving cracks, 12 mils or less and static cracks 30 mils or less, apply
2 coats of a crack bridging coating in accordance with the latest local Product Data Sheet.
B. For non-structural, moving cracks, greater than 12 mils and static cracks greater than 30
mils, rout and seal the crack to a 1/4 inch by 1/4 inch profile and properly seal with a
flexible, specified elastomeric joint sealant.
C. For structural static cracks, inject with a suitable epoxy

3.5 Application of primer

A. Apply primer coat to concrete and mineral substrates, very porous substrates or when
over-coating existing coatings which are firmly bonded.
B. Surfaces to be primed must be dry, clean, sound, and free of curing compound residues
and other bond inhibiting material. Any areas of exposed glass shall be protected by
masking.
C. Concrete and masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with high pressure water blast or use
other approved mechanical means to achieve a roughened substrate.
D. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Stir thoroughly using a slow
speed (400-600 rpm) drill and paddle prior to application. Apply primer by brush, roller or
spray equipment as mentioned in the latest local Product Data Sheet.
E. Apply two coats on very absorbent surfaces. Allow a minimum of 4 hours prior to re-
coating
3.6 Application of elastomeric acrylic coating
A. Mix elastomeric coating thoroughly with a low speed (400-600rpm) mixing drill and paddle
prior to application.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 126
 VOLUME III
B. Apply by bristle brush, roller or spray equipment. Apply a continuous and uniform coat
over the entire area moving in one direction at a coverage rate per the latest local Product
Data Sheet. Allow a minimum of 2 hours prior to the application of subsequent coats.
C. Apply a second continuous and uniform coat over the entire area moving in one direction,
at a coverage rate per the latest local Product Data Sheet.
D. Apply coating in a ‘wet on wet’ fashion over entire work area. Discontinue applications at
predetermined points such as an edge, corner, or joint. Apply the top coat at a 45 degree
angle to edges, corners, or joints.
E. For existing coated substrates apply 1 coat of acrylic coating primer and surface
conditioner by brush, roller, or spray at a rate not to exceed 300 sq. ft. per gallon prior to
application of the anti-carbonation coating.
F. Adhere to all limitations and cautions for the polymer-modified cement coating in the
manufacturer's printed literature.

3.7 Application of sealants

A. Provide the approved sealant system where shown on the Drawings, and in strict accord
with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Architect.
B. Install sealants immediately after joint preparation.
C. Install sealants to fill joints completely from the back, without voids or entrapped air, using
proven techniques, proper nozzles and sufficient force that result in sealants directly
contacting and fully wetting joint surfaces.
D. Install sealants to uniform cross-sectional shapes with depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
E. Tool sealants in manner that forces sealant against back of joint, ensures firm, full contact at
joint interfaces and leaves a finish that is smooth, uniform and free of ridges, wrinkles,
sags, air pockets and embedded impurities.
F. Remove sealant from adjacent surfaces in accord with sealant and substrate
manufacturer recommendations as work progresses.
G. Protect joint sealants from contact with contaminating substances and from damages.
Cut out, remove and replace contaminated or damaged sealants, immediately, so that
they are without contamination or damage at time of substantial completion.

3.8 Field quality control

A. Notify Architect when sections of work are complete to allow review prior to covering
completed Work.
B. Cooperate with Owner’s inspection agency as applicable, who will observe substrate and
coating installation and provide written documentation of observations.

3.9 Cleaning
A. Remove uncured materials from tools or other surfaces with an approved solvent.
Remove cured materials can by mechanical means.
B. Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of
spillovers onto adjacent areas.

3.10 Protection
A. Cap and protect exposed back-up walls against moisture and wet weather conditions
during and after application of membrane.
B. Protect uncured Work against wet weather conditions for a minimum of 24 hours.
C. Protect waterproof protective coating from damage and inclement weather during the
construction phase.

11.3 E (2) : ZIPLOCK CLADDING SYSTEM FOR WAREHOUSE NEW EXENSION

Roof and walls shall be Ziplock system cladding to comply with BS EN ISO 9001: 1994 as follows:

Outer skin: Ziplock standing seam roofing system shall be steel covered width of 500 mm or as per

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 127
 VOLUME III
the existing building sheet. Ziplock shall be of thickness 0.7 mm thickness of minimum of 7.5 Kg/ m2
of weight. Ziplock roofing system shall be class O fire rating and shall confirm to BS 476: part 3:1975
for external fire exposure roof test and also comply with BS476 part 3 19754 to determine the
classification of the surface spread of flame of the system which shall be class 1.

Ziplock system metal top sheet shall be pre-painted Z275 galvanized steel with finishing coat of
PVF2.

Insulation: 70mm thick fix mineral wool insulation with density of density less than 35 kg/m³.

Inner skin Linear sheet: Base material shall be confirms to BS 4300/6 N31, temper H16 (yield stress
207N/mm2).

Sheet thickness shall be 0.7 mm minimum.

Standard sheet profile shall be 0.5 mm colour coated Aluminum. Power coated paint shall be super
polyester 80 microns or PVF2 25 microns on the exposed side and 12 microns clear lacquer on reverse
side.

Open shed cladding:

Base material shall be confirms to BS 4300/6 N31, temper H16 (yield stress 207N/mm2).

Sheet thickness shall be 1.2mm minimum.

Standard sheet profile shall be 0.7 mm colour coated Aluminum. Power coated paint shall be super
polyester 80 microns or PVF2 25 microns on the exposed side and 12 microns clear lacquer on reverse
side.

Also, contractor shall submit ultimate load and moments for Engineer's approval. Shop drawing for
holding purlins shall be submitted for Engineer's approval

E (3) : Aluminum Structural Glazing/ Curtain wall. Door/ windows/sliding door. (Refer to specs
below)

E (4) : Aluminum Glazed Fixed Window (Coloured) (Refer to specs below)

H. Insulating reflective glass shall consist of two litres of glass with a hermetically and permanently sealed
air space, and shall conform to ASTM E 774.

1. Exterior lite shall be 6.0mm thick Grey tinted silver reflective (eclipse grey) and light reducing
glass (tint and reflectiveness to be approved by the Engineer)

2. Interior lite shall be 6.0mm thick clear float glass

3. Air space shall be 12mm

4. Low E glass pyrolitic coating shall be on No. 2 surface

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 128
 VOLUME III
5. Shading coefficient shall be no greater than 0.32 silver reflective.

6. U-Valve shall be 1.8 w/m2k

I Insulating clear glass for exterior doors shall consist of two lites of glass with a hermetically and
permanently sealed air space and shall conform to ASTM E 774.

1. Exterior lite shall be 4.7mm thick, clear float glass

2. Interior lite shall 4.7mm thick, clear float pyrolitic Low E glass

3. Air space shall be 6.0mm

4. Low E glass pyrolitic coating shall be on No. 2 surface.

5. Shading coefficient shall be no greater than 0.50.

6. U-Valve shall be 0.37 Btu/hr/ft2/degree F.

J Translucent glass / approved for railing shall be laminated glass 6.0mm thick, consisting of two lites of
equal glass thickness with a 1.0mm thick white translucent polyvinyl butyl interlayer.

K Decorative Wall Mirror Glass: Grade 1 mirror glass manufactured from 6.0mm thick No. 1, plate glass
of mirror glazing quality with silver coating to BS 952.

1. Edges shall be beveled and polished.

2. Large, unframed mirrors not supported by backsplash shall be provided with continuous
stainless steel “J” channel at lower edge and anchored to wall or fixed with chrome dome capped
stainless steel mirror screws with spacer.

A Aluminum Frames.
(i) Frames include all doorframes, sidelights, borrow lights and view windows as shown on the
drawings.
(ii) Frames shall be custom aluminum extrusions with 3.0mm minimum wall thickness, of profiles
shown on the drawings.
(iii) All breaks, angles and arises shall be uniform, straight, sharply defined and true. Corners shall
be mitered, accurately fitted, welded, and properly finished with smooth, rigid invisible joints.
(iv) Jamb anchors shall be manufacturer’s standard type to suit wall construction. A bent steel plate
adjustable clip bolted to frames and of a material as specified for jambs on the floor construction
shall be extended for proper anchorage at bottom of jambs and secured with 10 x 50mm
expansion bolts or shot in studs.
(v) All frames shall be provided with temporary spreader channel at bottom.
(vi) Frame reinforcement shall be aluminum as follows:
a) Provide 10mm minimum hinge reinforcement at each hinge location as detailed herein.
b) Closer and holder arm reinforcement shall be 10mm thick minimum
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 129
 VOLUME III

c) Other reinforcement shall be 4.0mm minimum unless greater reinforcing is recommended

by the manufacturer.
(vii) All interior frames shall be furnished with premolded door silencers securely attached to frame,
location and quantity as per manufacturer’s specifications.
(viii) Provide removable 3.0mm metal glass stop for all glazed openings.

C. Aluminum Louvers

Louvers shall be continuous horizontal static single banks comprising cold roll formed Aluminum alloy
louvres mounted at 50mm or 100mm pitch on concealed mullions and incorporating head, jamb and chill
sections with mullion shoes, all in aluminum alloy.

Fixing shall be by means of stainless steel bolts through mullion shoes with isolating grommets and
washers.

Gaps between louvre frames and structural openings shall be sealed both sides with approved sealant, as
specified.

Fly screens shall be of approved aluminum alloy or stainless steel gauze.

The Contractor shall store, assemble and fix aluminum louvres and fly screens in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and shall leave them clean and in perfect working order on completion.

Infill Panels shall be with aluminum composite flat panels installed with backing tray and insulation in
between. The panels and the trays shall be colour coated with approved colour.

Panels shall be 'Hulabond' or equal and approved.

The sheets to be cut carefully by mechanical means to give clean, true lines with no distortion. Sheets to be
thoroughly cleaned to remove burrs and any lubricant.

The openings on the sheets for pipes etc to be cut to the minimum size necessary. All the holes required
shall be drilled. Holes for main fixings to be 1.5mm larger than the diameter of fastening unless self-drilling
type with pilot point is used.

All the drilling swarf, dust and any other foreign matter to be removed before placing any membrane or
insulation. The sheets to be protected during the fixing against mechanical damage, corrosion and
disfigurement.

D. Sand Trap Louvers

Sand Trap Louvers shall be constructed from aluminum sheet, 1.5mm thick for blades and 2.0mm thickfor
casing, with mill finish.
The base member of the box shall incorporate sand drain holes.
The louvers shall be of the labyrinth type designed to achieve velocity changes of the air passing
through it inducing the sand to drop out.
The louvers shall incorporate a galvanised wire mesh insect screen at the rear.
The Contractor shall store, assemble and fix aluminum louvers and fly screens in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and shall leave them clean and in perfect working order on completion.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 130
 VOLUME III

E. Ironmongery shall be installed under this Section and except as specified herein, shall be furnished
under Section 781 IRONMONGERY.
F. Finish.
(i) Exposed aluminum shall be coated with Polyvinylidene fluoride resins (PVDF) (ASTM 605.2)
Color to be selected by the Engineer from full color range or an approved stoved polyester
powder coating complying with BS 6496. Min film thickness 60 - 120 microns. Clean, degrease
and prime with two pack etch primer before coating.

G. Coal tar epoxy coating shall be submitted for the Engineer approval.

H. The Contractor shall store, assemble and fix aluminum works and fly screens in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and shall leave them clean and in perfect working order on completion

E : Glazed railing with stainless steel frame

Glazed Steel handrail with semi-transparent laminated glass.

Colour and design to be approved by the consultant /client .

E (5) : Decorative horizontal Aluminum channels.

Powder coated channels to match with the approved colour/finish of Aluminum frame and glazing
works as per specification and approved shop drawings.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 131
 VOLUME III

11.4 ( F ) – FLOOR FINISHES - INTERNAL

Refer to drawings

C FC
F S W
Ser. ARE CEIL FALSE
NOTES
A FLOORING SKIRTING WALLS
ING CEILING

SHOW ROOM
Ground Floor

1 Entrance / Reception F03 S2 W1 FC4

2 Showroom F04A S2 W1 FC3

3 Application Room F07 - W2 - FC2

4 Storage F06 - W1A FC2

5 Cutting/Sp Room F07 - W2 - FC2

6 Tel room(Service Room) F04B - W1 C1

7 Toilets F08 - W2,W3 FC1

8 Workshop F07 - W2 - FC2

9 Staircase GF & MF F04D S2 W1 C1

SHOW ROOM
First Floor

17 Media And Sample Area F03 S2 W1 FC4

18 Office F04A S2 W1 FC3

19 Meeting rooms F02 S2 W1 FC3

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 132
 VOLUME III

20 Corridor F04A S2 W1 FC4

21 Manager offices F02A S2 W1 FC3

22 Server & IT room F05 S2 W1 FC2

24 Toilet F08 - W2,W3 FC1

WAREHOUSE
Ground floor

28 Air-conditioned F06 -- W1 FC5

warehouse

29 Warehouse F09 - W1A

35 Control Office office F04B S2 W1 FC2

Toilets F08 - W2,W3 FC1

SERVICE BLOCK

42 Transformer room, F04B - W2 C1

Electrical room,

GUARD ROOM

44 Guard room & Toilet F08 S1 W1 FC2

DRIVERS ROOM
44 Driver room & Toilet F08 S1 W1 FC2

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 133
 VOLUME III

LEGEND

FLOOR FINISHES ( As Applicable In The Table)

F01- Decofloor with Flakes

F02- Comfort Floor System

F02A- Comfort Floor System Option-02

F03 Decorative Epoxy Terrazo finish system

F04A Epoxy Deco floor with flakes

F04B Epoxy SL System

F04C Epoxy coating System

F04D Epoxy BC System

F04E Epoxy screed

F05 Epoxy Antistatic floor system

F06 Polyurethane SL system

F07 PureCem SL System

F08 Porcelain Tiles

F08A Ceramic Tiles

F09 Surface Hardner

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 134
 VOLUME III

WALL FINISHES( As Applicable In The Table)

W1 Approved manufacturers

W1A Acrylic coat CR

W2 Epoxy coating

W3 Porcelain Tiles

W3A Ceramic Tiles

FALSE CEILING

FC1 – Suspended Ceiling with 60 x 60 cm Gypsum Fibre ceiling tiles

FC2 – Suspended Ceiling with 60 x 60 cm Aluminum ceiling

FC3 – Perforated Aluminum 60 x 60 cm Acoustic ceiling tile for offices

FC4 – Gypsum board ceiling for corridor

FC5 – 7mm Aluminum sheet to cover Steel in AC Warehouse

EXPOSED CEILING( As Applicable In The Table)

C1 – Plaster and Acrylic Coat Painted Ceiling

SKIRTING( As Applicable In The Table)

S1 – CERAMIC SKIRTING

S2 – PVC SKIRTING

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 135
 VOLUME III

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS (FINISHES)

F01- COMFORT FLOORING SYSTEM – TYPE (A) FOR RECEPTION (MEZZANINE

FLOOR) AND CUSTOMER SERVICE AREAS.

SELF-SMOOTHING ELASTIC SEAMLESS COMFORT FLOOR SYSTEM SUITABLE FOR

INDOOR FLOORING APPLICATION USED IN RECEPTION AND CUSTOMER SERVICE
AREAS OF TYPE SIKAFLOOR®COMFORTFLOOR®DECORATIVE SYSTEM TO
PROVIDE EASY APPLICATION AND A DURABLE SOLUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Documents

A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.

1.2 Summary
A. This specification describes the application of a 2-part, elastic, aliphatic, self-
smoothing, seamless, resilient, decorative polyurethane floor finish system with a
4 or 6mm Regupol resilient rubber mat, onto new concrete or screeded floors.

B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified
under the designated Sections:
16. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete.
17. Section 07 92 13: Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

1.3 Standards reference:

EU REGULATION VOC content
2004/42

VOC - DECOPAINT VOC content

DIRECTIVE

ISO-16000 Eurofins Emission testing according to the AgBB-scheme and

guidelines of the DiBt (AgBB – Committee for Health-related
Evaluation of Building Products, DiBt – German Institute for
Building Technology).

CSM STATEMENT OF Cleanrooms and associated controlled environments.

QUALIFICATION Classification of air cleanliness

LEED RATING EQ credit 4.2: Low Emitting Materials: Paints & Coatings

EPA REFERENCE Test Method 24 - VOC content

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 136
 VOLUME III

ISO 846 Biological resistance certificate, CSM Statement of

Qualification – very good

ISO-16000 Eurofins Emission testing according to the AgBB-scheme and

guidelines of the DiBt (AgBB – Committee for Health-related
Evaluation of Building Products, DiBt – German Institute for
Building Technology).

1.4 Submittals
A. Submit two copies of manufacturer's literature including but not limited to: Product
Data Sheets (PDS), Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), and appropriate Method
Statement (MS).
B. Mock-ups: Provide a mock-up on site to demonstrate workmanship and final
appearance. Locate in an area acceptable to the Architect. Accepted mock-up may
remain in place.

1.5 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturing qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified product shall be
ISO 9001:2008 certified and have in existence a recognized ongoing quality
assurance program, independently audited on a regular basis.
B. Contractor qualifications: We recommend the use of a Specialist Applicator,
qualified in the field of specialist flooring with a successful track record of 5 years
or more. The contractor shall maintain qualified personnel who have received
product training by a Sika representative.
C. Materials should be installed in accordance with all safety and weather conditions
required by manufacturer or as modified by applicable rules and regulations of
local, state and federal authorities having jurisdiction. Consult Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) for complete handling recommendations.

1.6 Job Conditions

A. Environmental Conditions: Beware of humidity and surface temperature as
indicated in the latest local data sheet for the material. Minimum application
temperature should be 45ºF (7ºC) and rising.
B. Protection: Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to the new floor finish
until full mechanical & chemical properties have been achieved.
C. Application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. All materials must be delivered in original, unopened containers with the
manufacturer's name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. Damaged
material must be removed from the site immediately.
B. Store all materials in a cool, dry, preferably air conditioned environment, off the
ground and protect from rain or excessive heat until ready for use.
C. Keep equipment that will be in contact with the product cool and away from direct
sunlight.
D. Avoid application during the hottest time of day.

1.8 Warranty

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 137
 VOLUME III

A. A project specific warranty for the performance of the specified product should be
agreed and confirmed in writing from the specialist applicator, backed by the
product manufacturer's standard product supply warranty for the same period'. This
warranty should form part of the tender bid documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufactures
A. All material shall be sourced from a single manufacturer.
B. The selected manufacturer must prove compatibility between all products in direct
contact with each other.

2.2 Sikafloor® ComfortFloor® System components:

1. Sikadur®-PF (Epoxy Putty): Two component, epoxy putty for minor repairs in
the substrate as supplied by SIKA UAE to conform specification requirements.
2. Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): Two component, low viscosity epoxy resin
primer, as supplied by SIKA UAE to conform specification requirements.
3. Sikafloor®-Comfort Adhesive & Rugupol & Porefiller: as supplied by SIKA
UAE to conform specification requirements.
4. Sikafloor®-300 N: as supplied by SIKA UAE to conform specification
requirements.
5. Sikafloor®-304 W: as supplied by SIKA UAE to conform specification
requirements.
6. Sikaflex® PRO 3 (Polyurethane joint sealant): One part, moisture curing,
elastic joint sealant with high mechanical resistance for construction &
movement joints.

B. Applied Total Film Thickness Exclusive of Aggregates (if any):

3. Polyurethane System: 6 - 8 mm (DFT).

C. Physical properties for flooring materials shall comply with the following:

Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): of coverage 0.25 – 0.3 kg/m2 to give 180 – 210
microns wet film thickness, with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main Requirement
Density DIN EN ISO 2811-1 1.4 kg/litre mixed resin
Solid Content 100% by volume & weight
Compressive EN 13892-2 45 N/mm2
Strength
Flexural EN 13892-2 15 N/mm2
Strength

Bond Strength ISO 4624 > 1.5 N/mm2

Shore D DIN 53 505 76
Hardness

LEED Rating EQ credit 4.2: Low 91

Emitting Materials:
Paints & Coatings
VOC Contenet SCAQMD Method 304-

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 138
 VOLUME III

Conforms
< 100 g/litre

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 139
 VOLUME III

Sikafloor®-263 SL (Epoxy self-leveling coating): of coverage 1.90 kg/m2/mm

thickness for average of 1.5mm to 3.0 mm thickness. The epoxy coating shall be a
two-part, high-build, solvent free, coloured epoxy resin with aggregate with the
following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Mixed Density DIN EN ISO 2811-
1.84kg / litre (+23OC)
1

Solid Content 100% by weight & volume

Compressive EN 196-1 ~ 60 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)
Strength
Flexural ASTM C580-02 ~ 45 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)
Strength

Tensile Strength ASTM D638 ~ 17 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)

Bond Strength ISO 4624 >1.5 N/mm2 (failure in concrete)
Shore D DIN 53 505 76 after 7days (+23OC)
Hardness
Abrasion DIN 53 109 70 mg (Taber Abrader test) CS10 /
Resistance 1000gr / 1000 cycles after 8days
(+23OC)

Sikafloor®-300 N (Polyurethane Self-leveling coating): at coverage of ~ 2.60 kg/m2

and shall conform to the requirement of LEED EQ Credit 4.2 (Low-Emitting
Materials) with VOC content < 500g/litre and shall be a two-part, high-build,
coloured resin with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Mixed Density DIN EN ISO 2811-
1.40kg / litre (+23OC)
1

Solid Content 100% by weight & volume

Elongation at DIN 53 504 70 %
Break
Tear Growth ISO 34-1 6.0 N/mm2 after 14 days (+23OC)
Strength RESIN

Tensile Strength DIN 53 504 >6.0 N/mm2 after 14 days (+23OC)

RESIN
Bond Strength EN 13892-8 >1.5 N/mm2 (failure in concrete)
Shore A DIN 53 505 85 after 7days (+23OC) RESIN
Hardness

D. Physical properties for flooring accessories for the comfort floors:

Resilient rubber shockpad adhesive: Sikafloor®-Comfort Adhesive

i. Mixed density: 1.5 kg / litre

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 140
 VOLUME III

ii. Solid content: 100% by weight & volume

iii. Tensile strength: Resin: 9.0 N/mm2 (14 days @ 23 oC) – DIN 53 504
iv. Bond strength: > 1.5 N/mm2 (concrete failure) – EN 13892-8

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 141
 VOLUME III

v. Shore A Hardness: Resin: 93 – DIN 53 505

vi. Elongation at break: 50% (14 days @ 23 oC) – DIN 53 504
vii. Coverage rate: 0.45 – 0.90 kg/m2.
viii. EU Regulation 2004/42: maximum VOC content < 500 g / litre for the ready to
use product.

Resilient rubber shockpad: Sikafloor®-Comfort Regupol 4580

i. Colour: Varied colours with black rubber-dust & PUR binder
ii. Thickness: 4 mm

iii. Roll width: 1.0 m

iv. Roll length: 45 m
v. Roll area: 45 m2
vi. Net weight: 1.8 kg / m2
vii. Gross weight: 81 kg / roll

Resilient mat filler: Sikafloor®-Comfort Porefiller

i. Mixed density: 1.3 kg / litre
ii. Solid content: 100% by weight & volume
iii. Tensile strength: Resin: 5.0 N/mm2 (14 days @ 23 oC) – DIN 53 504
iv. Shore A Hardness: Resin: 89 – DIN 53 505
v. Elongation at break: 60% (14 days @ 23 oC) – DIN 53 504
vi. Coverage rate: 0.20 – 0.80 kg/m2.
vii. EU Regulation 2004/42: maximum VOC content < 500 g / litre for the ready to
use product.

Water based, clear PUR sealer coat: Sikafloor®-304 W

i. Mixed density: 1.07 kg / litre
ii. Coverage rate: 0.13 kg/m2.
iii. Conforms to the requirements of LEED EQ Credit 4.2: Low Emitting Materials:
Paints & Coatings.
iv. EU Regulation 2004/42: maximum VOC content < 140 g / litre for the ready to
use product.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 Examination:
A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.
Notify Architect in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the work in an
area shall mean Installer’s acceptance of the substrate.
B. Areas of use:
10. Commercial & public buildings
11. Residential
12. Schools, colleges & universities
13. Retail outlets
14. Museums
15. Libraries
16. Leisure
17. Hospital & clinics
18. Hotels.

3.2 Surface Preparation

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 142
 VOLUME III

3.2.1 Concrete surfaces particularly if new, should be at least 7 days old, clean, dry,
free from contamination & with a minimum compressive strength of 25 MPa.
Testing using a rebound hammer or similar equipment is highly recommended.
3.2.2 Prepare concrete surfaces by mechanical methods such as grinding or captive
blasting to remove laitance, curing compounds and other loose materials, to
provide a mechanical key for the floor system.
3.2.3 Grind any high spots, and fill any low spots, blow holes & surface imperfections
with Sikadur® PF.
3.2.4 Prime the prepared surfaces using Sikafloor®-161 (see separate data sheet),
applied by brush or roller to the prepared floor area, at a rate of 0.35 – 0.55
kg/m2, to achieve a nominal wet film thickness of 250 – 390 microns.
3.2.5 A second priming coat may be required if the substrate is particularly porous.

3.3 Application
3.3.1 Mixing & application in a temperature controlled environment is highly
recommended.
3.3.2 Recommended minimum ambient application temperature is 45ºF (7ºC) and
rising, with a substrate temperature at least 3 ºC above dew point.
3.3.3 The maximum moisture content of the substrate should be ≤ 3%. If the substrate
is above this, we recommend the use of Sikagard®-81 EpoCem® as a moisture
barrier.
3.3.4 After preparation & priming, mix and apply the Sikafloor®-Comfort Adhesive by
serrated trowel or squeegee to the prepared floor area, at a rate of 0.45 – 0.90
kg/m2.
3.3.5 Roll out the Sikafloor®-Comfort Regupol 4580 shockpad into the wet adhesive &
press down with a Linoroller (55kg) during the tack-phase.
3.3.6 Mix & apply Sikafloor®-Comfort Porefiller to provide a smooth surface for the
subsequent finish, observing the minimum & maximum overcoat windows of the
previous layer in the product data sheet (PDS).
3.3.7 Mix & apply Sikafloor®-300 N to provide a smooth, seamless surface, observing
the minimum & maximum overcoat windows of the previous layer in the product
data sheet (PDS).
3.3.8 Finally seal the Sikafloor® using Sikafloor®-304 W to provide a clear, durable
finish to the Sikafloor®-ComfortFloor® system.
3.3.9 After the Sikafloor®-ComfortFloor® system has fully cured, re-cut all joints
inserting a compressible closed cell polyethylene joint filler such as Sika Backing
Rod® to the appropriate depth, to define the finished joint sealant thickness, then
seal the joint with Sikaflex®PRO-3 i-Cure.
3.3.10 All joints should be reflected through the final finished floor in accordance with
good concrete practice & joint design.
3.3.11 All products should be mixed and applied in accordance with the current Product
Data Sheets (PDS) and General Method Statements (GMS).

3.4 Cleaning
3.4.1 Clean all tools and equipment with Thinner C immediately after use. All hardened
or cured material can only be removed mechanically.
3.4.2 Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of
spillovers onto adjacent areas.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 143
 VOLUME III

3.5 Remedial & repairs

3.5.1 Remedial works to the finished system should be carried out only by trained
specialist contractors, preferably the same as the original installer.
3.5.2 Please observe overcoat windows and chemical reaction times when
performing remedial works.
3.5.3 Preparation & application must be done in accordance with the current Product
Data Sheets (PDS), Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and General Method
Statements (GMS).

F02- COMFORT FLOORING SYSTEM – TYPE (B) FOR MANAGER OFFICES &
MEETING ROOMS

SELF-SMOOTHING ELASTIC SEAMLESS DECORATIVE COMFORT FLOOR SYSTEM

SUITABLE FOR INDOOR FLOORING APPLICATION USED IN MAIN MEETING ROOM
& MANAGER OFFICES TYPE SIKAFLOOR®COMFORT FLOOR
®DECORATIVE SYSTEM TO PROVIDE EASY APPLICATION AND A DURABLE SOLUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Documents

A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.

1.2 Summary
A. This specification describes the application of a 2-part, elastic, aliphatic, self-
smoothing, seamless, resilient, decorative polyurethane floor finish system with a
4 or 6mm Regupol resilient rubber mat, onto new concrete or screeded floors.

B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified
under the designated Sections:
18. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete.
19. Section 07 92 13: Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

1.3 Standards reference:

EU REGULATION VOC content
2004/42

VOC - DECOPAINT VOC content

DIRECTIVE

ISO-16000 Eurofins Emission testing according to the AgBB-scheme and

guidelines of the DiBt (AgBB – Committee for Health-related
Evaluation of Building Products, DiBt – German Institute for
Building Technology).

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 144
 VOLUME III

CSM STATEMENT OF Cleanrooms and associated controlled environments.

QUALIFICATION Classification of air cleanliness

LEED RATING EQ credit 4.2: Low Emitting Materials: Paints & Coatings

EPA REFERENCE Test Method 24 - VOC content

ISO 846 Biological resistance certificate, CSM Statement of

Qualification – very good

ISO-16000 Eurofins Emission testing according to the AgBB-scheme and

guidelines of the DiBt (AgBB – Committee for Health-related
Evaluation of Building Products, DiBt – German Institute for
Building Technology).

1.4 Submittals
A. Submit two copies of manufacturer's literature including but not limited to: Product
Data Sheets (PDS), Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), and appropriate Method
Statement (MS).
B. Mock-ups: Provide a mock-up on site to demonstrate workmanship and final
appearance. Locate in an area acceptable to the Architect. Accepted mock-up may
remain in place.

1.5 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturing qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified product shall be
ISO 9001:2008 certified and have in existence a recognized ongoing quality
assurance program, independently audited on a regular basis.
B. Contractor qualifications: We recommend the use of a Specialist Applicator,
qualified in the field of specialist flooring with a successful track record of 5 years
or more. The contractor shall maintain qualified personnel who have received
product training by a Sika representative.
C. Materials should be installed in accordance with all safety and weather conditions
required by manufacturer or as modified by applicable rules and regulations of
local, state and federal authorities having jurisdiction. Consult Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) for complete handling recommendations.

1.6 Job Conditions

A. Environmental Conditions: Beware of humidity and surface temperature as
indicated in the latest local data sheet for the material. Minimum application
temperature should be 45ºF (7ºC) and rising.
B. Protection: Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to the new floor finish
until full mechanical & chemical properties have been achieved.
C. Application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. All materials must be delivered in original, unopened containers with the
manufacturer's name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. Damaged
material must be removed from the site immediately.
B. Store all materials in a cool, dry, preferably air conditioned environment, off the

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 145
 VOLUME III

ground and protect from rain or excessive heat until ready for use.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 146
 VOLUME III

C. Keep equipment that will be in contact with the product cool and away from direct
sunlight.
D. Avoid application during the hottest time of day.

1.8 Warranty
A. A project specific warranty for the performance of the specified product should be
agreed and confirmed in writing from the specialist applicator, backed by the
product manufacturer's standard product supply warranty for the same period'. This
warranty should form part of the tender bid documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufactures
A. All material shall be sourced from a single manufacturer.
B. The selected manufacturer must prove compatibility between all products in direct
contact with each other.

2.2 Sikafloor® ComfortFloor® Decorative System components:

System 1: Self-leveling Polyurethane system:
7. Sikadur®-PF (Epoxy Putty): Two component, epoxy putty for minor repairs in
the substrate as supplied by SIKA UAE to conform specification requirements.
8. Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): Two component, low viscosity epoxy resin
primer, as supplied by SIKA UAE to conform specification requirements.
9. Sikafloor®-Comfort Accessories (when applicable): as supplied by SIKA
UAE to conform specification requirements.
10. Sikafloor®-300 N: as supplied by SIKA UAE to conform specification
requirements.
11. Sikafloor®-Colorchips: as supplied by SIKA UAE to conform specification
requirements.
12. Sikafloor®-304 W: as supplied by SIKA UAE to conform specification
requirements.
13. Sikaflex® PRO 3 (Polyurethane joint sealant): One part, moisture curing,
elastic joint sealant with high mechanical resistance for construction &
movement joints.

System 2: Self-leveling Epoxy system:

1. Sikadur®-PF (Epoxy Putty): Two component, epoxy putty for minor repairs in
the substrate as supplied by SIKA UAE to conform specification requirements.
2. Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): Two component, low viscosity epoxy resin
primer, as supplied by SIKA UAE to conform specification requirements.
3. Sikafloor®-Comfort Accessories (when applicable): as supplied by SIKA
UAE to conform specification requirements.
4. Sikafloor®-263 SL: as supplied by SIKA UAE to conform specification
requirements.
5. Sikafloor®-Colorchips: as supplied by SIKA UAE to conform specification
requirements.

B. Applied Total Film Thickness Exclusive of Aggregates (if any):

4. Epoxy System: 1.8 mm (DFT).
5. Polyurethane System: 6 - 8 mm (DFT).

C. Physical properties for flooring materials shall comply with the following:

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 147
 VOLUME III

Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): of coverage 0.25 – 0.3 kg/m2 to give 180 – 210
microns wet film thickness, with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Density DIN EN ISO 2811-1 1.4 kg/litre mixed resin
Solid Content 100% by volume & weight
Compressive EN 13892-2 45 N/mm2
Strength
Flexural EN 13892-2 15 N/mm2
Strength

Bond Strength ISO 4624 > 1.5 N/mm2

Shore D DIN 53 505 76
Hardness

LEED Rating EQ credit 4.2: Low Conforms

Emitting Materials:
Paints & Coatings
VOC Contenet SCAQMD Method 304- < 100 g/litre
91

Sikafloor®-263 SL (Epoxy self-leveling coating): of coverage 1.90 kg/m2/mm

thickness for average of 1.5mm to 3.0 mm thickness. The epoxy coating shall be a
two-part, high-build, solvent free, coloured epoxy resin with aggregate with the
following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Mixed Density DIN EN ISO 2811-
1.84kg / litre (+23OC)
1

Solid Content 100% by weight & volume

Compressive EN 196-1 ~ 60 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)
Strength
Flexural ASTM C580-02 ~ 45 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)
Strength

Tensile Strength ASTM D638 ~ 17 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)

Bond Strength ISO 4624 >1.5 N/mm2 (failure in concrete)
Shore D DIN 53 505 76 after 7days (+23OC)
Hardness
Abrasion DIN 53 109 70 mg (Taber Abrader test) CS10 /
Resistance 1000gr / 1000 cycles after 8days
(+23OC)

Sikafloor®-300 N (Polyurethane Self-leveling coating): at coverage of ~ 2.60 kg/m2

and shall conform to the requirement of LEED EQ Credit 4.2 (Low-Emitting
Materials) with VOC content < 500g/litre and shall be a two-part, high-build,
coloured resin with the following properties:

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 148
 VOLUME III

Technical Data Standard Main requirement

Mixed Density DIN EN ISO 2811-
1.40kg / litre (+23OC)
1

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 149
 VOLUME III

Solid Content 100% by weight & volume

Elongation at DIN 53 504 70 %
Break
Tear Growth ISO 34-1 6.0 N/mm2 after 14 days (+23OC)
Strength RESIN

Tensile Strength DIN 53 504 >6.0 N/mm2 after 14 days (+23OC)

RESIN
Bond Strength EN 13892-8 >1.5 N/mm2 (failure in concrete)
Shore A DIN 53 505 85 after 7days (+23OC) RESIN
Hardness

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 Examination:
A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.
Notify Architect in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the work in an
area shall mean Installer’s acceptance of the substrate.
B. Areas of use:
19. Commercial & public buildings
20. Residential
21. Schools, colleges & universities
22. Retail outlets
23. Museums
24. Libraries
25. Leisure
26. Hospital & clinics
27. Hotels.

3.2 Surface Preparation

3.2.1 Concrete surfaces particularly if new, should be at least 7 days old, clean, dry,
free from contamination & with a minimum compressive strength of 25 MPa.
Testing using a rebound hammer or similar equipment is highly recommended.

3.2.2 Prepare concrete surfaces by mechanical methods such as grinding or captive

blasting to remove laitance, curing compounds and other loose materials, to
provide a mechanical key for the floor system.

3.2.3 Grind any high spots, and fill any low spots, blow holes & surface imperfections
with Sikadur® PF.

3.2.4 Prime the prepared surfaces using Sikafloor®-161 (see separate data sheet),
applied by brush or roller to the prepared floor area, at a rate of 0.35 – 0.55
kg/m2, to achieve a nominal wet film thickness of 250 – 390 microns.

3.2.5 A second priming coat may be required if the substrate is particularly porous.

3.3 Application
3.3.1 Mixing & application in a temperature controlled environment is highly

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 150
 VOLUME III

recommended.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 151
 VOLUME III

3.3.2 Recommended minimum ambient application temperature is 45ºF (7ºC) and

rising, with a substrate temperature at least 3 ºC above dew point.

3.3.3 The maximum moisture content of the substrate should be ≤ 3%. If the substrate
is above this, we recommend the use of Sikagard®-81 EpoCem® as a moisture
barrier.

3.3.4 After priming is done to the prepared subastrate and when applicable the
application of further layers for Sikafloor®-ComfortFloor shall take place.

3.3.5 Mix & apply Sikafloor®-300 N to provide a smooth, seamless surface, observing
the minimum & maximum overcoat windows of the previous layer in the product
data sheet (PDS).

3.3.6 Whilst wet, sprinkle the Sikafloor®-Colorchips into the surface to the desired
colour finish. Sweep clean any excess colorchips after curing.

3.3.7 Finally seal the Sikafloor®-Colorchips using Sikafloor®-304 W to provide a clear,

durable finish to the Sikafloor®-ComfortFloor® Decorative system.

3.3.8 After the Sikafloor®-ComfortFloor® Decorative system has fully cured, re-cut all
joints inserting a compressible closed cell polyethylene joint filler such as Sika
Backing Rod® to the appropriate depth, to define the finished joint sealant
thickness, then seal the joint with Sikaflex®PRO-3 i-Cure.

3.3.9 All joints should be reflected through the final finished floor in accordance with
good concrete practice & joint design.

3.3.10 All products should be mixed and applied in accordance with the current Product
Data Sheets (PDS) and General Method Statements (GMS).

3.4 Cleaning
3.4.1 Clean all tools and equipment with Thinner C immediately after use. All hardened
or cured material can only be removed mechanically.

3.4.2 Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of
spillovers onto adjacent areas.

3.5 Remedial & repairs

3.5.1 Remedial works to the finished system should be carried out only by trained
specialist contractors, preferably the same as the original installer.

3.5.2 Please observe overcoat windows and chemical reaction times when
performing remedial works.

3.5.3 Preparation & application must be done in accordance with the current Product
Data Sheets (PDS), Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and General Method
Statements (GMS).

F03- DECORATIVE EPOXY TERRAZO FLOOR FINISH SYSTEM FOR RECEPTION

AND MAIN ENTRANCE LOBBY (GROUND FLOOR)

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 152
 VOLUME III

DECORATIVE EPOXY TERRAZZO FLOOR FINISH SYSTEM FOR DECORATIVE

FLOORING SUITABLE FOR ENTRANCE LOBBY AND RECEPTION AREAS WITH
COMPANY LOGO USING SIKAFLOOR® TERRAZZO SYSTEM TO PROVIDE EASY
APPLICATION AND A DURABLE SOLUTION

Part 1 - General

1.01 Summary
A. This specification describes the application of a heavy duty, seamless, decorative
epoxy resin flooring system on concrete floors or proprietary floor screed.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants.

1.02 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturing qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified product shall be
ISO 9001:2008 certified and have in existence a recognized ongoing quality
assurance program, independently audited on a regular basis.

B. Contractor qualifications: We recommend the use of a Specialist Applicator,

qualified in the field of specialist flooring with a successful track record of 5 years
or more. The contractor shall maintain qualified personnel who have received
product training by a Sika representative.

C. Materials should be installed in accordance with all safety and weather conditions
required by manufacturer or as modified by applicable rules and regulations of
local, state and federal authorities having jurisdiction. Consult Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) for complete handling recommendations.

1.03 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. All materials must be delivered in original, unopened containers with the
manufacturer's name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. Damaged
material must be removed from the site immediately.
B. Store all materials in a cool, dry, preferably air conditioned environment, off the
ground and protect from rain or excessive heat until ready for use.
C. Keep equipment that will be in contact with the product cool and away from direct
sunlight.

1.04 Job Conditions

A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply material if it is raining or if such conditions
appear to be imminent. Minimum application temperature should be 45ºF (7ºC) and
rising.
B. Protection: Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to the new floor finish
until full mechanical & chemical properties have been achieved.
C. Application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.

1.05 Submittals
A. Submit two copies of manufacturer's literature including but not limited to: Product
Data Sheets (PDS), and appropriate Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 153
 VOLUME III

1.06 Warranty
A. A project specific warranty for the performance of the specified product should be
agreed and confirmed in writing from the specialist applicator, backed by the
product manufacturer's standard product supply warranty for the same period'. This
warranty should form part of the tender bid documents.

1.07 Standards reference:

EN 196-1 Methods of testing cement: Determination of compressive
strength.

EN 196-1 Methods of testing cement: Determination of flexural

strength.

DIN 53 505 Shore D Hardness.

Part 2 - Products

2.01 Manufactures
A. All material shall be sourced from a single manufacturer.
B. The selected manufacturer must prove compatibility between all products in direct
contact with each other.

2.01 Materials
A. Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): Two component, low viscosity epoxy resin primer.
B. Sikafloor®-265 (Optional Flexible Epoxy Membrane): Two coats required as a
waterproofing medium.
C. Sikadur®- 507: 0.4mm – 0.7mm broadcast to create mechanical key for
Sikafloor® Terrazzo.
D. Sikafloor®- 264: Epoxy binder.
E. Sikafloor®- Terrazzo: Selected aggregates
F. Sikafloor®- Terrazzo: Grout
G. Sikafloor®- Terrazzo: UV Resistant aliphatic seal coat
H. Sikaflex® Pro-3: joint sealant for construction & movement joints

2.02 Specification:
A. Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): Two component, low viscosity epoxy resin
primer applied by roller or brush with coverage rate of 0.25 – 0. 3 kg/m2 to give
180 – 210 microns wet film thickness, with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Density DIN EN ISO 2811-1 1.4 kg/litre mixed resin
Solid Content 100% by volume & weight
Compressive EN 13892-2 45 N/mm2
Strength
Flexural EN 13892-2 15 N/mm2
Strength

Bond Strength ISO 4624 > 1.5 N/mm2

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 154
 VOLUME III

Shore D DIN 53 505 76

Hardness

LEED Rating EQ credit 4.2: Low Conforms

Emitting Materials: Paints
& Coatings

VOC Contenet SCAQMD Method 304-91 < 100 g/litre

B. Sikafloor®-265 (Optional Crack suppression & isolation membrane): Two

component, high solids and flexible, seamless, epoxy membrane, with the following
properties:

Technical Data Standard Main requirement

Shore D Hardness ASTM D2240 40
Bond strength 520 lbs / in2 (concrete
ASTM D4541
failure)
Impact resistance ASTM D2794
>160 in – lb (18.1 N-m)
(Gardener Impact Tester)

Flammability ASTM D635 Self extinguishing

Tensile strength ASTM D638 1050 psi (7.2 MPa)
Tensile elongation ASTM D638 125%
Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D638
246,000 psi (1697 MPa)
Tear strength ASTM D1938 90 lbs (0.4003399)

C. Sikafloor®-Terrazzo (Decorative Epoxy Terrazzo floor finish): The decorative

epoxy terrazzo floor finish onto new concrete floors shall be Sikafloor®-Terrazzo,
a three-component, solvent-free, terrazzo mortar screed based on epoxy resins
with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Solid content 100% by weight & volume
Shore D Hardness ASTM D2240 72
Bond strength ASTM D4541 520 lbs / in2 (concrete failure)
Impact resistance ASTM D2794 >160 in – lb (18.1 N-m)
(Gardener Impact Tester)
Flammability ASTM D635 Self extinguishing
Compressive strength ASTM D695 68 N/mm2 after 7 days
Tensile strength ASTM D638 29 N/mm2 after 7 days
Tensile elongation ASTM D638 125%
Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D638 246,000 psi (1697 MPa)

Tear strength ASTM D1938 90 lbs (0.4003399)

strength
Resin compressive

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 155
 VOLUME III

after 28 days
EN 196-1 60 N/mm2

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 156
 VOLUME III

Resin flexural strength EN 196-1 30 N/mm2 after 28 days

Thickness Applied at 12mm thickness &

ground back to 9 - 10mm

Part 3 – Execution

3.1 Areas of use:

Typically used to form non-slip, abrasion-resistant, epoxy terrazzo flooring at a
nominal thickness of 12 mm in:
A. Railway & Metro Stations.
B. Airport & Bus Terminals.
C. Hospitals.
D. Industrial floorings subject to moderate or heavy loading.
E. Stairs.
F. Restaurants.
G. Hotel receptions.
H. Shopping centres.
I. Libraries.
J. Schools.
K. Public & commercial buildings.

3.2 Surface Preparation

3.2.1 Concrete and/or proprietary screed surfaces particularly if new, should be at least
7 days old, clean, dry, free from contamination & with a minimum compressive
strength of 25 MPa. Testing using a rebound hammer or similar equipment is
highly recommended.
3.2.2 Concrete subfloor and/or proprietary screed to be flat (maximum variation not to
exceed 7 mm in a 3 m span) and to have a steel trowel finished surface. Do
not over trowel to dark sheen. No curing agents or other additives should be
used.

3.2.3 The slab or proprietary screed should have an efficient moisture barrier
conforming to ASTM E-1745 Class "A" directly beneath and in direct contact with
the concrete slab when placed directly on grade.

3.2.4 Saw cutting of control joints must be done between 12 to 24 hours after placement
of the structural concrete.

3.2.5 The concrete or screed to receive epoxy terrazzo shall be of flatness minimum7
mm in a 3 m span (not cumulative) as per NTMA recommendations, unless the
design team requires a higher degree of flatness for the terrazzo, then the
concrete or proprietary screed shall be of the same flatness.

3.2.6 If lightweight aggregate concrete is specified consult epoxy resin manufacturer

for precautions and moisture sensitivity.
3.2.7 Area to receive terrazzo shall be broom cleaned of all foreign matter.
3.2.8 Sufficient water, temporary heat, lighting and adequate electric service with
suitable outlets connected and distributed for use within 30 m of any working
space.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 157
 VOLUME III

3.2.9 Ambient and slab temperature shall be maintained by others as per

manufacturer's recommendation: minimum 15 ºC degrees and maximum
35ºC.
3.2.10 Prepare concrete surfaces by mechanical methods such as grinding or captive
blasting to remove laitance, curing compounds and other loose materials, to
provide a mechanical key for the floor system.
3.2.11 Small chips & minor imperfections can be filled with Sikadur® PF, prior to
priming. Allow 18-24 hours to cure.
After preparation, porous surfaces should be primed using Sikafloor®-161 (see
separate data sheet), applied by brush or roller to the prepared floor area, at a
rate of 0.35 – 0.55 kg/m2 , to achieve a nominal wet film thickness of 250 –
390 microns.
3.2.12 After priming, install control joints divider strips in accordance with NTMA
Guidelines for Crack Details and Joint Treatment.
3.2.13 Install divider strips as shown on drawings or as required by slab conditions.
The adhesive for bonding divider strips shall be epoxy approved by resin
producer. A continuous bead of epoxy should be used to embed dividers.

3.3 Mixing and Application

A. Mixing & application in a temperature controlled environment is highly
recommended.
B. Recommended minimum ambient application temperature is 45ºF (7ºC) and
rising, with a substrate temperature at least 3 ºC above dew point.
C. After preparation & priming, mix and apply Sikafloor®-Terrazzo by trowel to a
nominal thickness of 12mm.
D. Finishing:
1. Rough grinding:
a. Grind with 24 or finer grit stones or with comparable abrasives.
b. Follow initial grind with 60/80 grit stones or with comparable abrasives
2. Grouting:
a. Cleanse terrazzo with clean water and rinse. Allow to dry.
b. Apply epoxy grout per manufacturer's instructions.
c. Allow grout to cure.

3. Fine grinding:
a. Grind with 80/120 grit or with comparable abrasives until all grout is removed from
surface.
b. Upon completion, terrazzo commonly reveals approximately 70% of chips and
generally matches
terrazzo contractor approved submittal sample(s).

E. Cleaning and sealing:

1. Wash and rinse all surfaces with fresh potable water.
2. Allow surface to dry.
3. Apply basic sealer(s) in accordance with manufacturer's directions. The eventual
custodial products and process are the responsibility of the owner or designee.
F. After polishing & sealing the Sikafloor®-Terrazzo, seal all joints with
Sikaflex®PRO-3 (i-Cure). All joints should be reflected through the final finished
floor in accordance with good concrete practice & joint design.
G. All products should be mixed and applied in accordance with the current Product
Data Sheets (PDS) and General Method Statements (GMS).

3.04 Cleaning

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 158
 VOLUME III

A. Clean all tools and equipment with Thinner C immediately after use. All hardened
or cured material can only be removed mechanically.
B. Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of
spillovers onto adjacent areas.

3.05 Remedials & repairs

A. Remedial works to the finished system should be carried out only by trained
specialist contractors, preferably the same as the original installer.
B. Please observe overcoat windows and chemical reaction times when performing
remedial works.
C. Preparation & application must be done in accordance with the current Product
Data Sheets (PDS) and General Method Statements (GMS).

3.06 Aftercare – Cleaning & Maintenance

Clean regularly using a single or double headed rotary scrubber drier in conjuction with
a neutral detergent and burnish. Maintain the surface appearance with a suitable
high solids metalized floor polish as required (dependant on levels of traffic).

3.4 Cleaning
3.2.1 Clean all tools and equipment with Proprietary Solvent immediately after use. All
hardened or cured material can only be removed mechanically.

3.2.2 Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of
spillovers onto adjacent areas.

3.5 Remedials & repairs

3.2.1 Remedial works to the finished system should be carried out only by trained
specialist contractors, preferably the same as the original installer.

3.2.2 Please observe overcoat windows and chemical reaction times when performing
remedial works.

3.2.3 Preparation & application must be done in accordance with the current Product
Data Sheets (PDS) and General Method Statements (GMS).

F04 - EPOXY COATING SYSTEM FOR OFFICES, OPEN OFFICE SPACE,

CORRIDORS & STAIRCASES, & EPOXY COATING SYSTEM FOR TEL ROOM,
ELECTRIC ROOM, ARCHIVE ROOM, OPEN OFFICE SPACE, CORRIDORS &
STAIRCASES, MEETING ROOMS

F04A – EP DECOFLOOR WITH FLAKES

F04B – EP SL SYSTEM
F04C – EP COATING SYSTEM
F04D – EP BC SYSTEM
F04E – EP SCREED

SELF-SMOOTHING AND COATING SYSTEMS FOR CONCRETE AND CEMENT SCREEDS WITH
NORMAL UP TO MEDIUM HEAVY WEAR FLOORING SYSTEM SUITABLE FOR INDOOR
FLOORING APPLICATION USING SIKAFLOOR® PRODUCTS WITH JOINT TREATMENT TO
PROVIDE EASY APPLICATION AND A DURABLE SOLUTION

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 159
 VOLUME III

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Documents

A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 Summary
A. This specification describes the epoxy self-leveling and broadcast systems as specified and
as indicated on the drawings, for concrete and cement screeds with medium heavy wear
floors, consisting of a three-part, coloured self-leveling epoxy resin based flooring system
for internal use.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under
the designated Sections:
20. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete.
21. Section 07 60 00: Flashing and Sheet Metal.
22. Section 07 92 13: Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
23. Section 22 14 26: Plaza Drains.

1.3 Standards reference:

LEED Conforms to EQ Credit 4.2: Low-Emitting Materials: Paints &
Coatings & SCAQMD Method 304-91 VOC Content < 100 g/lt

DIN EN ISO 2811-1 Paints and varnishes. Determination of density

ASTM C579 Compressive Strength test

ASTM C580-02 Flexural Strength test

ASTM D638 Tensile Strength test

ISO 4624 Bond Strength

DIN 53 109 Abrasion Resistance test

1.4 Submittals
A. Submit two copies of manufacturer's literature including but not limited to: Product Data
Sheets (PDS), Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), and appropriate Method Statement
(MS).
B. Mock-ups: Provide a mock-up on site to demonstrate workmanship and final appearance.
Locate in an area acceptable to the Architect. Accepted mock-up may remain in place.

1.5 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturing qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified product shall be ISO
9001:2008 certified and have in existence a recognized ongoing quality assurance
program, independently audited on a regular basis.
B. Contractor qualifications: We recommend the use of a Specialist Applicator, qualified in the
field of specialist flooring with a successful track record of 5 years or more. The contractor
shall maintain qualified personnel who have received product training by a Sika
representative.
C. Materials should be installed in accordance with all safety and weather conditions required
by manufacturer or as modified by applicable rules and regulations of local, state and
federal authorities having jurisdiction. Consult Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for
complete handling recommendations.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 160
 VOLUME III

1.6 Job Conditions

A. Environmental Conditions: Beware of humidity and surface temperature as indicated in the
latest local data sheet for the material. Minimum application temperature should be 45ºF
(7ºC) and rising.
B. Protection: Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to the new floor finish until full
mechanical & chemical properties have been achieved.
C. Application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. All materials must be delivered in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's
name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. Damaged material must be
removed from the site immediately.
B. Store all materials in a cool, dry, preferably air conditioned environment, off the ground and
protect from rain or excessive heat until ready for use.
C. Keep equipment that will be in contact with the product cool and away from direct sunlight.
D. Avoid application during the hottest time of day.

1.8 Warranty
A. A project specific warranty for the performance of the specified product should be agreed
and confirmed in writing from the specialist applicator, backed by the product
manufacturer's standard product supply warranty for the same period'. This warranty should
form part of the tender bid documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufactures
A. All material shall be sourced from a single manufacturer.
B. The selected manufacturer must prove compatibility between all products in direct contact
with each other.

2.2 Internal flooring Coating (Sikafloor® systems)

A. Option 1: Built-up layers:
Self-leveling Coating system: Sikafloor®-263 SL system:
14. Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): Two component, low viscosity epoxy resin primer.
15. Sikafloor®-263 SL (Epoxy Self-Leveling Coating): Two-part, multipurpose binder
based on epoxy resin.
16. Sikaflex® PRO 3 (Polyurethane joint sealant): One part, moisture curing, elastic joint
sealant with high mechanical resistance for construction & movement joints.

B. Option 2: Built-up layers:

High Build Coating system: Sikafloor®-264 SG system:
1. Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): Two component, low viscosity epoxy resin primer.
2. Sikafloor®-264 SG (Epoxy Coating): Two-part, high-build, solvent free, coloured
epoxy resin roller coating.
3. Sikaflex® PRO 3 (Polyurethane joint sealant): One part, moisture curing, elastic joint
sealant with high mechanical resistance for construction & movement joints.

C. Applied Total Film Thickness Exclusive of Aggregates (if any):

6. Pedestrian Traffic: 0.4 - 0.6 mm (DFT).
7. Medium-wear Traffic: 0.6 - 1.0 mm (DFT).
8. High-wear Traffic: 1.0 - 1.5 mm (DFT)

D. Aggregate: Clean, rounded, oven dried quartz sand with a graded size grain of (0.08 - 0.25
mm) or (0.1 - 0.3 mm) for vehicular traffic areas for a final anti-slip surface.
E. Physical properties for flooring materials shall comply with the following:

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 161
 VOLUME III

Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): of coverage 0.25 – 0.3 kg/m2 to give 180 – 210 microns
wet film thickness, with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Density DIN EN ISO 2811-1 1.4 kg/litre mixed resin
Solid Content 100% by volume & weight
Compressive EN 13892-2 45 N/mm2
Strength

Flexural Strength EN 13892-2 15 N/mm2

Bond Strength ISO 4624 > 1.5 N/mm2
Shore D Hardness DIN 53 505 76
LEED Rating EQ credit 4.2: Low Conforms
Emitting Materials: Paints
& Coatings

VOC Contenet SCAQMD Method 304-91 < 100 g/litre

Sikafloor®-263 SL (Epoxy self-leveling coating): of coverage 1.90 kg/m2/mm thickness for

average of 1.5mm to 3.0 mm thickness. The epoxy coating shall be a two-part, high-build,
solvent free, coloured epoxy resin with aggregate with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Mixed Density DIN EN ISO 2811-1 1.84kg / litre (+23OC)
Solid Content 100% by weight & volume
Compressive EN 196-1 ~ 60 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)
Strength

Flexural Strength ASTM C580-02 ~ 45 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)

Tensile Strength ASTM D638 ~ 17 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)
Bond Strength ISO 4624 >1.5 N/mm2 (failure in concrete)
Shore D Hardness DIN 53 505 76 after 7days (+23OC)
Abrasion DIN 53 109 70 mg (Taber Abrader test) CS10 / 1000gr
Resistance / 1000 cycles after 8days (+23OC)

Sikafloor®-264 SG (Epoxy coating): of coverage 0.50 kg/m2 for average of 0.5mm

thickness. The epoxy coating shall be a two-part, high-build, solvent free, coloured epoxy
resin with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Mixed Density DIN EN ISO 2811-1 1.55kg / litre (+23OC)
Solid Content 100% by weight & volume
Compressive ASTM C579 >70 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)
Strength

Flexural Strength ASTM C580-02 >45 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)

Tensile Strength ASTM D638 >18 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)
Bond Strength ISO 4624 >1.5 N/mm2 (failure in concrete)
Shore D Hardness 80 after 7days (+23OC)
Abrasion Resistance

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 162
 VOLUME III

DIN 53 109 50 mg (Taber Abrader test) CS10 / 1000gr

/ 1000 cycles after 8days (+23OC)

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 163
 VOLUME III

F. Polyurethane Joint Sealant for construction & movement joints: Physical properties
complying with the following:

Sikaflex®-PRO 3 (Joint Sealant): One component, high performance, moisture curing,

elastic polyurethane joint sealant for internal & external, construction and expansion joints
with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Sealant EN 15651-1 Conforms
classification
Sealant ISO 11600 F 25 HM Conforms
classification

Emissions EMICODE EC 1PLUS EC1Plus rating

Safe for contact ISEGA Certificate Complies
with foodstuff
Safe for contact BS 6920 Approved
with potable water

Biological CSM Biological Conforms

resistance resistance

Diesel & jet fuel DIBT guidelines Conforms

resistance

LEED rating EQ credit 4.1: Low Conforms

Emitting Materials:
Adhesives and Sealants.

VOC Content CSM TVOC Conforms

VOC Content SCAQMD Rule 1168 Passes
VOC Content BAAQMD Reg. 8, Rule Passes
51

Density DIN 53 479-B 1.35 kg/litre

Sag flow DIN EN ISO 7390 0 mm. Very good
Tear strength DIN 53 515 8 N/mm2
Shore A hardness DIN 53 505 37 @ 28 days
E modulus DIN EN ISO 8340 0.6 N/mm2 @ 28 days
Elongation at DIN 53 504 > 700% after 28 days
break

Elastic recovery DIN EN ISO 7389 B > 80% after 28 days

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 Examination:
A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. Notify
Architect in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the work in an area shall
mean Installer’s acceptance of the substrate.
B. Areas of use:

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 164
 VOLUME III

28. Internal Car decks.

29. Mechanical Rooms.
30. Storage areas.
31. Staircases and Corridors.

3.2 Surface Preparation

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 165
 VOLUME III

3.2.1 Concrete surfaces particularly if new, should be fully cured with a maximum residual
relative humidity (RH) of 75%, be clean and free from contamination.
3.2.2 Prepare concrete surfaces preferably by mechanical methods such as angle grinding to
remove laitance, curing compounds and other loose materials to provide a mechanical
key for the coating system. The substrate shall be in accordance with ICRI Guideline No.
03732 for coatings and fall within CSP1 to CSP3.
3.2.3 After preparation, fill all blow holes and surface imperfections using a proprietary epoxy
filler material to provide a smooth even surface prior to priming or over coating.
3.2.4 Treat small defects and cracks (non-structural) from 250 – 500 microns wide with a
proprietary epoxy filler material trowelled into the cracks until completely full.
3.2.5 A second priming coat may be required if the substrate is particularly porous.

3.3 Priming
3.3.1 Mixing & application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.

3.3.2 Recommended minimum ambient application temperature is 45ºF (7ºC) and rising, with
a substrate temperature at least 3 ºC above dew point.

3.3.3 After surface preparation, mix and apply the primer coat by brush or roller to the prepared
floor area at a rate of 0.35- 0.55 kg/m2 to achieve a nominal wet film thickness of 250 –
390 microns as mentioned in the latest Product Data Sheet.

3.3.4 For filling holes and imperfections, if any, mix and apply an epoxy pore sealer as a scratch
coat to the primed floor area at a rate of 1.6 kg/m2/mm thickness, to achieve a nominal
thickness of 0.5 –1.0mm.
3.3.5 Mix and apply, within the over painting time allowed, the epoxy resin coating using a
short-piled roller onto the primed surface at a rate of 0.25 kg/m2/coat with at least two
coats applied within the over coating time.

3.3.6 Make sure that a continuous pore free coat covers the substrate.

3.3 Base & Top Coats

3.3.1 Mixing & application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.

3.3.2 Recommended minimum ambient application temperature is 45ºF (7ºC) and rising, with
a substrate temperature at least 3 ºC above dew point.

3.3.3 After preparation & priming, mix the self-leveling material with accordance to the latest
Product data sheet.

3.3.4 Prior to mixing, stir part A mechanically. When all of part B has been added to part A, mix
continuously for 2 minutes until a uniform mix has been achieved. Then add the quartz
sand 0.08 - 0.25 mm and mix for a further 2 minutes until a uniform mix has been
achieved.

3.3.5 Make sure, that the application of the self-leveling epoxy layer is still within the over-
coating time of the primer.

3.3.6 The application of the self-leveling epoxy layer is done by pouring then being spread evenly by
means of a serrated trowel (4mm notch).

3.3.7 After spreading the material evenly, turn the serrated trowel and smooth the surface in
order to remove air bubbles. Then roll immediately (within 10 minutes of application) in
two directions with a spiked roller to ensure even thickness and to remove entrapped
air.

3.3.8 Follow the curing time and procedures in the latest Product Data sheet.

3.3.9 In case of Coating only:

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 166
 VOLUME III

On the applied primer and within the over painting time allowed, apply the epoxy resin
coating of type Sikafloor®-264 SG using a short-piled roller at a rate of 0.2-0.3 kg/m² for
the first coat. Then broadcast to excess with quartz sand of type Sikadur® 507 (grade
0.3-0.7mm).

3.3.10 Next day, sweep off the excess sand and then apply the second coat of Sikafloor®-264
SG the same way as the first coat.

3.3.11 All products should be mixed and applied in accordance with the latest local Product
Data Sheets (PDS) and Method Statements (MS).

3.4 Treatment of Joints

3.4.1 After the epoxy coating has fully cured, re-cut all joints (construction & expansion) and
then insert the compressible polyethylene joint filler to fill the lower part of the joint.

3.4.2 Seal the joint with the one part polyurethane elastic joint sealant of type Sikaflex®-PRO
3.

3.4.3 All joints should be reflected through the final finished floor in accordance with good
concrete practice & joint design.

3.5 Cleaning
3.5.1 Clean all tools and equipment with Proprietary Solvent immediately after use. All
hardened or cured material can only be removed mechanically.

3.5.2 Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of
spillovers onto adjacent areas.

3.6 Remedial & repairs

3.6.1 Remedial works to the finished system should be carried out only by trained specialist
contractors, preferably the same as the original installer.

3.6.2 Please observe overcoat windows and chemical reaction times when performing
remedial works.

3.6.3 Preparation & application must be done in accordance with the current Product Data
Sheets (PDS), Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and General Method Statements
(GMS).

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 167
 VOLUME III

F05- HIGH BUILD EPOXY FOR ELECTROSTATIC CONDUCTIVE FLOORS IN SERVER

ROOMS

HIGH BUILD EPOXY FOR ELECTROSTATIC CONDUCTIVE SELF-SMOOTHING

FLOORING COATING SUITABLE FOR AREAS WITH SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENTS USED IN SERVER ROOM WITH SIKAFLOOR® AS PRODUCTS TO
PROVIDE EASY APPLICATION AND A DURABLE SOLUTION

Part 1 - General

1.01 Summary
A. This specification describes the high-build roller coating system for concrete and cement
screeds with normal up to medium heavy wear floors, consisting of a two-part, solvent free,
coloured epoxy resin based coating system for use in car parks and garages.
B. Sections Included:
1. Section 09 67 00: Fluid-Applied Flooring,
2. Section 09 67 13: Elastomeric Liquid Flooring.
3. Section 09 67 13.33: Conductive Elastomeric Liquid Flooring.

1.02 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturing qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified product shall be ISO
9001:2008 certified and have in existence a recognized ongoing quality assurance
program, independently audited on a regular basis.
B. Contractor qualifications: We recommend the use of a Specialist Applicator, qualified in the
field of specialist flooring with a successful track record of 5 years or more. The contractor
shall maintain qualified personnel who have received product training by a Sika
representative.
C. Materials should be installed in accordance with all safety and weather conditions required
by manufacturer or as modified by applicable rules and regulations of local, state and
federal authorities having jurisdiction. Consult Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for
complete handling recommendations.

1.03 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. All materials must be delivered in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's
name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. Damaged material must be
removed from the site immediately.
B. Store all materials in a cool, dry, preferably air conditioned environment, off the ground and
protect from rain or excessive heat until ready for use.
C. Keep equipment that will be in contact with the product cool and away from direct sunlight.

1.04 Job Conditions

A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply material if it is raining or if such conditions appear
to be imminent. Minimum application temperature should be 45ºF (7ºC) and rising.
B. Protection: Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to the new floor finish until full
mechanical & chemical properties have been achieved.
C. Application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.

1.05 Submittals
A. Submit two copies of manufacturer's literature including but not limited to: Product Data
Sheets (PDS), and appropriate Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 168
 VOLUME III

1.06 Warranty
A. A project specific warranty for the performance of the specified product should be agreed
and confirmed in writing from the specialist applicator, backed by the product
manufacturer's standard product supply warranty for the same period'. This warranty should
form part of the tender bid documents.

1.07 Standards reference:

DIN EN ISO 2811-1 Paints and varnishes. Determination of density.

IEC 61340-4-1 / DIN EN Electrostatic Behavior to measure Resistance to ground.

1081

EN 196-1 Compressive Strength test / Flexural Strength test.

ISO 4624 Bond Strength.

DIN 53 505 Shore D Hardness.

DIN 53 109 Abrasion Resistance test.

USGBC - LEED Rating Conforms to the requirements of LEED

(EQ Credit 4.2: Low-Emitting Materials: Paints & Coatings

SCAQMD Method 304-91 VOC Content < 100 g/lt)

Part 2 - Products

2.01 Manufactures
A. All material shall be sourced from a single manufacturer.
B. The selected manufacturer must prove compatibility between all products in direct contact
with each other.
2.01 Materials
I. Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): Two component, low viscosity epoxy resin primer.
J. Sikafloor®-220 W Conductive (Conductive Water-dispersed Epoxy Coating): Two part,
water dispersed, epoxy resin with a high electrostatic conductivity.
K. Sikafloor®-262 AS N (Epoxy Electrostatic Conductive Self-smoothing Coating): Two-part,
electrostatic conductive, self-smoothing, coloured epoxy resin coating.
L. Sikafloor® Earthing Kit (Earthing Kit):

2.02 Specification:
A. Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): Two component, low viscosity epoxy resin primer
applied by roller or brush with coverage rate of 0.25 – 0. 3 kg/m2 to give 180 – 210
microns wet film thickness, with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Density DIN EN ISO 2811-1 1.4 kg/litre mixed resin
Solid Content 100% by volume & weight
Compressive EN 13892-2 45 N/mm2
Strength

Flexural Strength EN 13892-2 15 N/mm2

Bond Strength ISO 4624 > 1.5 N/mm2

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 169
 VOLUME III

Shore D Hardness DIN 53 505 76

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 170
 VOLUME III

LEED Rating EQ credit 4.2: Low Emitting Conforms

Materials: Paints & Coatings

VOC Contenet SCAQMD Method 304-91 < 100 g/litre

B. Sikafloor®-220 W Conductive (Conductive Water-dispersed Epoxy coating): Two part,

water dispersed, epoxy resin with a high electrostatic conductivity to be applied as a
conductive primer underneath all Sikafloor® conductive wearing courses, by roller at
coverage rate of 0.08 – 0.10 kg/m2 with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Mixed Density DIN EN ISO 2811-1 1.04kg / litre (+23OC)
Solid Content ~ 34% (by volume)
~ 44% (by weight)
Electrostatic DIN EN 1081 Typical average resistance to
Behavior ground: 103 ≤ Rg ≤ 104 Ω

C. Sikafloor®-262 AS N (Epoxy Electrostatic Conductive Self-smoothing coating): Two-part,

electrostatic conductive, self-smoothing, coloured epoxy resin coating applied with roller at
1.5mm thickness with coverage rate of 2.5 kg/m2 at mixing ratio of (Binder + Quartz sand)
equals (1 : 0.1pbw – 1 : 0.3pbw) with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Mixed Density DIN EN ISO 2811-1 Mixed Resin: 1.53kg / litre
(+23OC)
Filled Resin: 1.69kg / litre (+23OC)
Solid Content ~ 97% by weight & volume
Electrostatic IEC 61340-4-1 Resistance to ground: Rg < 109 Ω
Behavior DIN EN 1081 Typical average resistance to
ground: Rg ≤ 106 Ω
Compressive EN 196-1 Filled Resin: ~ 80 N/mm2
Strength (28 days / +23°C)

Flexural Strength EN 196-1 Filled Resin: ~ 40 N/mm2

(28 days / +23°C)
Bond Strength ISO 4624 >1.5 N/mm2 (failure in concrete)
Shore D Hardness DIN 53 505 77 (3days / +23OC)
Abrasion DIN 53 109 100 mg (7days / +23OC)
Resistance Taber Abrader Test (CS 10 / 1000gr / 1000 cycles)

Part 3 – Execution

3.1 Areas of use:

Suitable as a wearing course in industries for areas with electrostatic conductive sensitivity,
such as:
a) Automotive.
b) Electronics.
c) Pharmaceutical.
d) CNC machinery.
e) Computer rooms.
f) Aircraft maintenance sheds.
g) Battery-charging rooms.
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 171
 VOLUME III

h) Areas subjected to high explosion risks.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 172
 VOLUME III

3.2 Surface Preparation

3.2.1 Concrete surfaces particularly if new, should be fully cured with a maximum residual
relative humidity (RH) of 75%, be clean and free from contamination.
3.2.2 Prepare concrete surfaces preferably by mechanical methods such as angle grinding to
remove laitance, curing compounds and other loose materials to provide a mechanical
key for the coating system. The substrate shall be in accordance with ICRI Guideline No.
03732 for coatings and fall within CSP1 to CSP3.
3.2.3 The concrete substrate must be sound and of sufficient compressive strength (minimum
30 N/mm2) with a minimum pull off strength of 1.5 N/mm2.
3.2.4 After preparation, fill all blow holes and surface imperfections using a proprietary epoxy
filler material to provide a smooth even surface prior to priming or over coating.
3.2.5 Treat small defects and cracks (non-structural) from 250 – 500 microns wide with a
proprietary epoxy filler material trowelled into the cracks until completely full.
3.2.6 A second priming coat may be required if the substrate is particularly porous.

3.3 Mixing and Application

3.3.1 Mixing & application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.
3.3.2 Prior to application, make sure that the substrate and ambient temperature between
+10OC to +30OC with substrate humidity < 4% pbw moisture content and relative air
humidity 80% maximum. Also the substrate and uncured floor must be at least 3 OC above
Dew point to reduce the risk of condensation on the floor finish.
3.3.3 Mix and apply the Primer coat on the prepared substrate. The primer coat is applied by
brush or roller with the coverage mentioned in the latest Product Data Sheet.
3.3.4 For filling holes and imperfections, mix and apply an epoxy pore sealer as a scratch coat
to the primed floor area at a rate of 1.6 kg/m2/mm thickness, to achieve a nominal
thickness of 0.5 –1.0mm.
3.3.5 Placing of earthing points:
Only use the original Sikafloor® Earthing Kit in order to connect the earthing points. Every
earthing point is able to conduct approx. 300 m2, The earthing points have to be
connected to the ring-mains, which has to be carried out and approved by an electrical
engineer and in accordance with any relevant regulations or standards.
3.3.6 Numbers of earthing points:
At least 2 earthing points per room. The optimum number of earth connections depends
on the local conditions and should be specified with documents.
3.3.7 Installation of the earthing points has to be in accordance to the manufacturer latest
product data sheet and the latest method of application.
3.3.8 Prior to mixing of the conductive water-dispersed epoxy coat material, stir part A
mechanically. When all of part B has been added to part A, mix continuously for 2 minutes
until a uniform mix has been achieved. To ensure thorough mixing pour materials into
another container and mix again to achieve a consistent mixture.
3.3.9 Mixing must be done using a low speed electric stirrer (300 – 400 rpm) or other suitable
equipment. Over mixing must be avoided to minimize air entrainment.
3.3.10 Apply the conductive water-dispersed epoxy coat using a short pile nylon roller (12mm).
3.3.11 Make sure you mix and apply the epoxy electrostatic conductive self-levelling coat over
the conductive water-dispersed epoxy coat within the over-coating time mentioned in the
latest product data sheet.
3.3.12 Prior to mixing of the epoxy electrostatic conductive self-leveling coat, stir part A
mechanically. When all of part B has been added to part A, mix continuously for 2 minutes
until a uniform mix has been achieved.
3.3.13 When parts A and B have been mixed, add quartz sand (0.1 - 0.3 mm) and mix for a
further 2 minutes until a uniform mix has been achieved. To ensure thorough mixing pour
materials into another container and mix again to achieve a consistent mix.
3.3.14 Mixing must be done using a low speed electric stirrer (300 – 400 rpm) or other suitable
equipment. Over mixing must be avoided to minimize air entrainment.
3.3.15 Apply the epoxy electrostatic conductive self-levelling coat using a serrated trowel and
smooth the surface in order to achieve an aesthetically higher grade of finish. Roll
immediately in two directions with spiked roller to ensure even thickness.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 173
 VOLUME III

3.3.16 All products should be mixed and applied in accordance with the current Product Data
Sheets (PDS) and Method Statements (MS).

3.4 Cleaning
3.4.1 Clean all tools and equipment with Proprietary Solvent immediately after use. All
hardened or cured material can only be removed mechanically.
3.4.2 Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of
spillovers onto adjacent areas.

3.5 Remedials & repairs

3.5.1 Remedial works to the finished system should be carried out only by trained specialist
contractors, preferably the same as the original installer.
3.5.2 Please observe overcoat windows and chemical reaction times when performing
remedial works.
3.5.3 Preparation & application must be done in accordance with the current Product Data
Sheets (PDS) and General Method Statements (GMS).

F06- FLEXIBLE AND CRACK BRIDGING POLYURETHANE BASED FLOORING

SYSTEMSUITABLE FOR MECHANICAL ROOMS & STORAGE & COLD-STORES

FLEXIBLE AND CRACK BRIDGING POLYURETHANE BASED FLOORING SYSTEM

SUITABLE FOR MECHANICAL ROOMS AND STORAGE AND COLD-STORES USING
SIKAFLOOR® 325 SYSTEM WITH JOINT TREATMENT TO PROVIDE EASY APPLICATION
AND A DURABLE SOLUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Documents

A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 Summary
A. This specification describes the tough-elastic self-smoothing floor polyurethane system as
specified and as indicated on the drawings, for concrete and cement screeds with medium
heavy wear floors, consisting of a three-part, coloured polyurethane resin based coating
system with a final aesthetic finish.

B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under
the designated Sections:
24. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete.
25. Section 07 60 00: Flashing and Sheet Metal.
26. Section 07 92 13: Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
27. Section 22 14 26: Plaza Drains.

1.3 Standards reference:

ISO 16000 Emission test according to the German AgBB-scheme and guidelines
of the DiBt.

ISO 16000 Emission test according to the French AFSSET-scheme and

guidelines.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 174
 VOLUME III

ISEGA – EN 1186, Safe for contact with foodstuff (According to the Standards and the test
report by ISEGA.
EN 13130

ISO 4 Particle (vs.PA6) emission certificate: Cleanroom Suitable Materials

CSM Statement of Qualification, class ISO 4.

ISO AMCm class 7.3 Outgassing VOC emission certificate: Cleanroom Suitable Materials
CSM Statement of Qualification.

ISO 846 Biological Resistance Class “Very Good “–Cleanroom Suitable

Materials Evaluation of the biological resistance.

1.4 Submittals
A. Submit two copies of manufacturer's literature including but not limited to: Product Data
Sheets (PDS), Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), and appropriate Method Statement
(MS).
B. Mock-ups: Provide a mock-up on site to demonstrate workmanship and final appearance.
Locate in an area acceptable to the Architect. Accepted mock-up may remain in place.

1.5 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturing qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified product shall be ISO
9001:2008 certified and have in existence a recognized ongoing quality assurance
program, independently audited on a regular basis.
B. Contractor qualifications: We recommend the use of a Specialist Applicator, qualified in the
field of specialist flooring with a successful track record of 5 years or more. The contractor
shall maintain qualified personnel who have received product training by a Sika
representative.
C. Materials should be installed in accordance with all safety and weather conditions required
by manufacturer or as modified by applicable rules and regulations of local, state and
federal authorities having jurisdiction. Consult Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for
complete handling recommendations.

1.6 Job Conditions

A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply material if it is raining or if such conditions appear
to be imminent. Minimum application temperature should be 45ºF (7ºC) and rising.
B. Protection: Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to the new floor finish until full
mechanical & chemical properties have been achieved.
C. Application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. All materials must be delivered in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's
name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. Damaged material must be
removed from the site immediately.
B. Store all materials in a cool, dry, preferably air conditioned environment, off the ground and
protect from rain or excessive heat until ready for use.
C. Keep equipment that will be in contact with the product cool and away from direct sunlight.
D. Avoid application during the hottest time of day.
1.8 Warranty
A. A project specific warranty for the performance of the specified product should be agreed
and confirmed in writing from the specialist applicator, backed by the product
manufacturer's standard product supply warranty for the same period'. This warranty should
form part of the tender bid documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 175
 VOLUME III

2.1 Manufactures
A. All material shall be sourced from a single manufacturer.
B. The selected manufacturer must prove compatibility between all products in direct contact
with each other.

2.2 Flexible and Crack-bridging Coating (Sikafloor®-325 system)

A. Vehicular Traffic Coatings: Sikafloor®-325 system comprised of the following layers:
1. Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): Two component, low viscosity epoxy resin primer.
2. Sikafloor®-325 (Polyurethane Base Coat): Two-part, solvent free, coloured self-
smoothing PUR resin with tough-elastic properties.
3. Sikaflex® PRO 3 (Polyurethane joint sealant): One part, moisture curing, elastic joint
sealant with high mechanical resistance for construction & movement joints.

B. Applied Total Film Thickness Exclusive of Aggregates (if any):

9. Mechanical & Storage rooms: 0.5 - 0.7 mm (DFT).
10. Cold-Stores & S&B stores: 0.7 - 0.9 mm (DFT).

C. Aggregate: Clean, rounded, oven dried quartz sand with a graded size grain of (0.08 - 0.25
mm) or (0.1 - 0.3 mm) for vehicular traffic areas for a final anti-slip surface.

D. Primer Coat: Physical properties complying with the following:

Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): of coverage 0.25 – 0.3 kg/m2 to give 180 – 210 microns
wet film thickness, with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Density DIN EN ISO 2811-1 1.4 kg/litre mixed resin
Solid Content 100% by volume & weight
Compressive EN 13892-2 45 N/mm2
Strength

Flexural Strength EN 13892-2 15 N/mm2

Bond Strength ISO 4624 > 1.5 N/mm2
Shore D Hardness DIN 53 505 76
LEED Rating EQ credit 4.2: Low Emitting Conforms
Materials: Paints & Coatings

VOC Contenet SCAQMD Method 304-91 < 100 g/litre

E. Base Coat: Physical properties complying with the following:

Sikafloor®-325 (Polyurethane Base Coat): of applied theoretical coverage 0.4-0.6 kg/m2
with minimum over-coating time of 16 hours at 30OC and shall comply with the following
properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Mixed Density DIN EN ISO 2811-1 1.6kg / litre (+23OC)
Filing 1:0.7 with quartz sand 0.08-0.25mm
Solid Content 100% by weight & volume
Compressive EN 196-1 ~ 70 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)
Strength

Flexural Strength EN 196-1 ~ 40 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)

Tensile Strength DIN 53504 Resin ~ 20 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)
Resin Filled (1:0.7): ~ 20 N/mm2 after 28
days (+23OC)

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 176
 VOLUME III

Bond Strength EN 4624 >1.5 N/mm2 (failure in concrete)

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 177
 VOLUME III

Tear Strength DIN 53504 Resin ~ 49 N/mm after 28 days (+23OC)

Resin Filled (1:0.7): ~ 33 N/mm2 after 28
days (+23OC)
Shore D Hardness DIN 53505 73 after (28days/ +23OC/ 50% r.h)
Elongation at DIN 53504 Resin ~ 40% (14 days/ +23OC/ 50% r.h.)
Break Resin filled (1:0.7): ~ 19% (14 days/ +23OC/
50% r.h.)
Abrasion ASTM D 4060 ~ 55 mg (Taber Abrader test) CS 10 /
Resistance 1000gr / 1000 cycles
Crack Bridging 0.6 mm (static laoding, 28 days/ +23OC)
Capacity

G. Polyurethane Joint Sealant for construction & movement joints: Physical properties complying
with the following:
Sikaflex®-PRO 3 (Joint Sealant): One component, high performance, moisture curing,
elastic polyurethane joint sealant for internal & external, construction and expansion joints
with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Sealant EN 15651-1 Conforms
classification
Sealant ISO 11600 F 25 HM Conforms
classification

Emissions EMICODE EC 1PLUS EC1Plus rating

Safe for contact ISEGA Certificate Complies
with foodstuff
Safe for contact BS 6920 Approved
with potable water
Biological CSM Biological resistance Conforms
resistance
Diesel & jet fuel DIBT guidelines Conforms
resistance

LEED rating EQ credit 4.1: Low Emitting Conforms

Materials: Adhesives and
Sealants.

VOC Content CSM TVOC Conforms

VOC Content SCAQMD Rule 1168 Passes
VOC Content BAAQMD Reg. 8, Rule 51 Passes
Density DIN 53 479-B 1.35 kg/litre
Sag flow DIN EN ISO 7390 0 mm. Very good
Tear strength DIN 53 515 8 N/mm2
Shore A hardness DIN 53 505 37 @ 28 days
E modulus DIN EN ISO 8340 0.6 N/mm2 @ 28 days
Elongation at DIN 53 504 > 700% after 28 days
break

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 178
 VOLUME III

Elastic recovery DIN EN ISO 7389 B > 80% after 28 days

PART 3 – EXECUTION

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 179
 VOLUME III

3.1 Examination:
A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. Notify
Architect in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the work in an area shall
mean Installer’s acceptance of the substrate.

B. Areas of use:
32. Indoors Loading Ramps & decks.
33. Areas with high concentrations of carbon dioxide, particularly from traffic exhaust
fumes.
34. Warehouses & storage areas.
35. Food & Beverage Industry.
36. Cold Storage up to -10OC

3.2 Surface Preparation

3.2.1 Concrete surfaces particularly if new, should be fully cured with a maximum residual
relative humidity (RH) of 75%, be clean and free from contamination.

3.2.2 Prepare concrete surfaces preferably by mechanical methods such as angle grinding to
remove laitance, curing compounds and other loose materials to provide a mechanical
key for the coating system. The substrate shall be in accordance with ICRI Guideline No.
03732 for coatings and fall within CSP1 to CSP3.

3.2.3 After preparation, fill all blow holes and surface imperfections using a proprietary epoxy
filler material to provide a smooth even surface prior to priming or over coating.

3.2.4 Treat small defects and cracks (non-structural) from 250 – 500 microns wide with a
proprietary epoxy filler material trowelled into the cracks until completely full.

3.2.5 A second priming coat may be required if the substrate is particularly porous.

3.3 Priming
3.3.1 Mixing & application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.

3.3.2 Recommended minimum ambient application temperature is 45ºF (7ºC) and rising, with
a substrate temperature at least 3 ºC above dew point.

3.3.3 After surface preparation, mix and apply the primer coat by brush or roller to the prepared
floor area at a rate of 0.35- 0.55 kg/m2 to achieve a nominal wet film thickness of 250 –
390 microns as mentioned in the latest Product Data Sheet.

3.3.4 For filling holes and imperfections, if any, mix and apply an epoxy pore sealer as a scratch
coat to the primed floor area at a rate of 1.6 kg/m2/mm thickness, to achieve a nominal
thickness of 0.5 –1.0mm.

3.3.5 Mix and apply, within the over painting time allowed, the epoxy resin coating using a
short-piled roller onto the primed surface at a rate of 0.25 kg/m2/coat with at least two
coats applied within the over coating time.

3.3.6 Make sure that a continuous pore free coat covers the substrate.

3.3 Base Coat

3.3.1 Mixing & application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.
3.3.2 Recommended minimum ambient application temperature is 45ºF (7ºC) and rising, with
a substrate temperature at least 3 ºC above dew point.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 180
 VOLUME III

3.3.3 After preparation & priming, mix the polyurethane material with accordance to the latest
Product data sheet.
3.3.4 Prior to mixing, stir part A mechanically. When all of part B has been added to part A, mix
continuously for 2 minutes until a uniform mix has been achieved. Then add the quartz
sand 0.08 - 0.25 mm and mix for a further 2 minutes until a uniform mix has been
achieved.
3.3.5 Make sure, that the application of the polyurethane layer is still within the over-coating
time of the primer.
3.3.6 The application of the polyurethane layer is done by pouring then being spread evenly by
means of a serrated trowel (4mm notch).
3.3.7 After spreading the material evenly, turn the serrated trowel and smooth the surface in
order to remove air bubbles. Then roll immediately (within 10 minutes of application) in
two directions with a spiked roller to ensure even thickness and to remove entrapped air.
3.3.8 Follow the curing time and procedures in the latest Product Data sheet.

3.4 Cleaning
3.4.1 Clean all tools and equipment with Proprietary Solvent immediately after use. All
hardened or cured material can only be removed mechanically.
3.4.2 Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of
spillovers onto adjacent areas.

3.5 Remedial & repairs

3.5.1 Remedial works to the finished system should be carried out only by trained specialist
contractors, preferably the same as the original installer.
3.5.2 Please observe overcoat windows and chemical reaction times when performing
remedial works.
3.5.3 Preparation & application must be done in accordance with the current Product Data
Sheets (PDS), Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and General Method Statements
(GMS).

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 181
 VOLUME III
F07 - MEDIUM TO HEAVY DUTY SELF-SMOOTHING POLYURETHANE MODIFIED
SCREED FLOORING SYSTEM SUITABLE FOR WORKSHOP DRY AREAS OF TYPR
SIKAFLOOR® 21N PURCEM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Documents

A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 Summary
A. This specification describes the high strength trowel grade coloured polyurethane self-
smoothing modified cement screed suitable for floors subject to medium duty loading,
abrasion and chemical exposure in dry areas. It is typically installed at 4.5 to 6 mm thick.

B. Sections Included:
28. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete.
29. Section 07 60 00: Flashing and Sheet Metal.
30. Section 07 92 13: Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

1.3 Standards reference:

EN 1186 & EN 13130 Contact with Foodstuff

EN 13501-1 Fire classification from Warrington Fire Research Centre

EN ISO 2811-1 Density determination test

EN 1062-3 Capillary Absorption test

BS EN 13501-1 Fire Rating test

BS 8204 Part 2 Class “Special” Severe abrasion resistance

1.4 Submittals
A. Submit two copies of manufacturer's literature including but not limited to: Product Data
Sheets (PDS), and appropriate Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

1.5 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturing qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified product shall be ISO
9001:2008 certified and have in existence a recognized ongoing quality assurance
program, independently audited on a regular basis.
B. Contractor qualifications: We recommend the use of a Specialist Applicator, qualified in the
field of specialist flooring with a successful track record of 5 years or more. The contractor
shall maintain qualified personnel who have received product training by a Sika
representative.
C. Materials should be installed in accordance with all safety and weather conditions required
by manufacturer or as modified by applicable rules and regulations of local, state and
federal authorities having jurisdiction. Consult Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for
complete handling recommendations.

1.6 Job Conditions

A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply material if it is raining or if such conditions appear
to be imminent. Minimum application temperature should be 45ºF (7ºC) and rising.
B. Protection: Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to the new floor finish until full
mechanical & chemical properties have been achieved.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 182
 VOLUME III
C. Application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. All materials must be delivered in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's
name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. Damaged material must be
removed from the site immediately.

B. Store all materials in a cool, dry, preferably air conditioned environment, off the ground and
protect from rain or excessive heat until ready for use.

C. Keep equipment that will be in contact with the product cool and away from direct sunlight.

1.8 Warranty
A. A project specific warranty for the performance of the specified product should be agreed
and confirmed in writing from the specialist applicator, backed by the product
manufacturer's standard product supply warranty for the same period'. This warranty should
form part of the tender bid documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufactures
A. All material shall be sourced from a single manufacturer.
B. The selected manufacturer must prove compatibility between all products in direct contact
with each other.

2.2 Medium to Heavy Duty Self-smoothing Screed system (Sikafloor®-21 N PurCem)

A. Medium to Heavy Duty PU modified screed: Sikafloor®-21 N PurCem system comprised

of the following layers:
4. Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): Two component, low viscosity epoxy resin primer.
5. Sikafloor®-21 N PurCem® (Self-smoothing polyurethane modified screed): Three
parts, water dispersed medium to high strength coloured polyurethane modified,
cement and aggregate screed with self-smoothing properties.
6. Sikafloor®-29 N PurCem® (Coving & detailing mortar): Three parts, water dispersed,
vertical grade, coloured polyurethane modified, cement and aggregate mortar for
detailing work and vertical rendering.

B. Applied Total Film Thickness:

11. Dry workshops & cold areas: 4.5 mm (DFT).

C. Primer Coat (if needed): Physical properties complying with the following:
Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): of coverage 0.25 – 0. 3 kg/m2 to give 180 – 210 microns
wet film thickness, with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Density DIN EN ISO 2811-1 1.4 kg/litre mixed resin
Solid Content 100% by volume & weight
Compressive EN 13892-2 45 N/mm2
Strength

Flexural Strength EN 13892-2 15 N/mm2

Bond Strength ISO 4624 > 1.5 N/mm2
Shore D Hardness DIN 53 505 76
LEED Rating EQ credit 4.2: Low Emitting Conforms
Materials: Paints & Coatings

VOC Contenet SCAQMD Method 304-91 < 100 g/litre

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 183
 VOLUME III

D. Sikafloor®-21 N PurCem® (Self-smoothing polyurethane screed): of coverage 1.9

kg/m2/mm thickness for 4.5-6 mm layer thickness. The self-smoothing screed shall be a
three part, water dispersed medium to high strength coloured polyurethane modified,
cement and aggregate screed with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Mixed Density EN ISO 2811-1
(A+B+C) 1.93 kg/litre ± 0.03 (+23OC)
ASTM C 905

Capillary Absorption EN 1062-3 0.37 g/h/m2 (3mm)

Thermal Expansion ASTM E 381 α ~ 1.5 x 10-5 per °C
Coefficient ASTM D 696 (-20OC to +60OC)
ISO 11359
Water Absorption ASTM C 413 0.18%
Permeability to water vapour ASTM E-96 0.115 g/h/m2 (4.8mm)
Fire Rating BS EN 13501-1 Class B(fl)
Compressive Strength ASTM C 579 > 44 MPa after 28days
(+23°C/50% r.h.)
BS EN 13892-2 > 50 N/mm2 after 28days
(+23°C/50% r.h.)

Flexural Strength ASTM C 580 > 14.7 MPa after 28days

(+23°C/50% r.h.)
BS EN 13892-2 > 10 N/mm2 after 28days
(+23°C/50% r.h.)
Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 > 6.5 N/mm2 after 28days
(+23°C/50% r.h.)
Bond Strength EN 1542 > 1.75 N/mm2 or failure in concrete
Shore D Hardness ASTM D 2240 80 - 85
Flexural Modulus ASTM C 580 3500 MPa
Coefficient of Friction ASTM D 1894- Steel: 0.3
61T Rubber: 0.5

Slip Resistance BS 8204 Part 2 Wet SRV 60

Dry SRV 70
Abrasion Resistance EN 13892-4 AR 0.5 (less than 0.5mm wear)
ASTM D 4060- 2360 mg
01
Indentation MIL – PFR ~ 0%
24613
Impact Resistance BS 8204 Part 1 Class A (less than 1mm depth)
ASTM D 2794 2pounds/ 30 inches (3mm thick)

Resistance to Thermal ASTM C 884 Pass

Shock

Softening Point 130OC (266OF)

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
BS EN INDUSTRIAL
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI 13892-2 > 10 N/mm
PARK,
2 after 28days
DUBAI Page 184
 VOLUME III

E. Sikafloor®-29 N PurCem® (Coving & detailing mortar): Three part, water dispersed,
vertical grade, coloured polyurethane modified, cement and aggregate mortar for detailing
work and vertical rendering suitable for thickness from 3mm to 9mm, that shall apply to the
following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Mixed Density EN ISO 2811-1
(A+B+C) 2.14 kg/litre ± 0.03 (+20OC)
ASTM C 905

Capillary Absorption EN 1062-3 0.92 g/h/m2 (3mm)

Thermal Expansion ASTM E 381 α ~ 1.3 x 10-5 per °C
Coefficient ASTM D 696 (-20OC to +60OC)
ISO 11359

Water Absorption ASTM C 413 0.18%

Permeability to water vapour ASTM E-96 0.104 g/h/m2 (4.3mm)
Fire Rating BS EN 13501-1 Class B(fl)
Compressive Strength ASTM C 579 > 39 MPa after 28days
(+23°C/50% r.h.)
BS EN 13892-2 > 44 N/mm2 after 28days
(+23°C/50% r.h.)
Flexural Strength ASTM C 580 > 8.1 MPa after 28days
(+23°C/50% r.h.)
BS EN 13892-2 > 10 N/mm2 after 28days
(+23°C/50% r.h.)

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 185
 VOLUME III

Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 > 2.5 N/mm2 after 28days

(+23°C/50% r.h.)
Bond Strength EN 1542 > 1.75 N/mm2 or failure in concrete
Shore D Hardness ASTM D 2240 80 - 85
Flexural Modulus ASTM C 580 4050 MPa
Coefficient of Friction ASTM D 1894- Steel: 0.7
61T Rubber: 0.8
Abrasion Resistance EN 13892-4 AR 0.5 (less than 0.05 mm wear)
ASTM D 4060- 4010 mg
01
Indentation MIL – PFR ~ 0%
24613
Impact Resistance BS 8204 Part 1 Class A (less than 1mm depth)
ASTM D 2794 2pounds/ 40 inched (3mm thick)

Resistance to Thermal ASTM C 884 Pass

Shock
Softening Point 130OC (266OF)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 Examination:
A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. Notify
Architect in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the work in an area shall mean
Installer’s acceptance of the substrate.

B. Areas of use:
i) Food processing plants, in dry process areas, freezers and coolers, thermal shock
areas.
j) Chemical plants.
k) Laboratories.
l) Workshops.

3.2 Surface Preparation

3.2.1 Concrete surfaces particularly if new, should be fully cured with a maximum residual
relative humidity (RH) of 75%, be clean and free from contamination.

3.2.2 Prepare concrete surfaces preferably by mechanical methods such as angle grinding to
remove laitance, curing compounds and other loose materials to provide a mechanical
key for the coating system. The substrate shall be in accordance with ICRI Guideline No.
03732 for coatings and fall within CSP3 to CSP6.

3.2.3 After preparation, fill all blow holes and surface imperfections using a proprietary epoxy
filler material to provide a smooth even surface prior to priming or over coating.

3.2.4 Treat small defects and cracks (non-structural) from 250 – 500 microns wide with a
proprietary epoxy filler material trowelled into the cracks until completely full.

3.2.5 A second priming coat may be required if the substrate is particularly porous.

3.3 Mixing and Application

3.3.1 Mixing & application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 186
 VOLUME III

3.3.2 Recommended minimum ambient application temperature is 45ºF (7ºC) and rising, with
a substrate temperature at least 3 ºC above dew point.

3.3.3 After surface preparation, mix and apply the primer coat only on areas for detailing and
coving areas. The primer is applied by brush or roller with the coverage mentioned in the
latest Product Data Sheet.

3.3.4 Mix and apply a scratch coat of Sikafloor®-21 N PurCem® using steel trowels to spread
the materials to approximately 1.5 mm thickness. This application will seal the concrete
surface and fill the surface irregularities including pock marks, non-moving control joints
and cracks. Allow overnight cure (16 hours at +20ºC) before application of the body coat.

3.3.5 Pour the mixed Sikafloor®-21 N PurCem® onto the substrate and work with a toothed
trowel or pin screed to the desired thickness, achieving a flat surface. Take care to spread
newly placed materials across the transition of previously applied mixes before the
surface begins to set.

3.3.6 Remove air with a spike roller immediately (less than two minutes after placing). Roller
spikes must be at least three times longer than the product thickness applied.

3.3.7 Allow a minimum 14 hour cure period at 20ºC before light traffic.

For Coving & Detailing Areas:

3.3.12 Apply the detailing and coving mortar of Sikafloor®-29N PurCem® after proper mixing
onto the ready primed substrate and compact to the appropriate thickness, then finish the
detailing profile with a coving trowel or steel float.

3.3.13 Apply Sikafloor®-29N PurCem® while the primer is still tacky. If the primer becomes tack
free, reapply the primer. A light brushing while the mortar is still workable will close any
surface voids. Allow a minimum 10 hour cure period at 20ºC. For maximum sealing of the
cove, application must be performed with one or two coats of Sikafloor®-31NPurCem®
to seal the surface and improve aesthetics

3.3.14 All joints should be reflected through the final finished floor in accordance with good
concrete practice & joint design.

3.3.15 All products should be mixed and applied in accordance with the current Product Data
Sheets (PDS) and Method Statements (MS).

3.4 Cleaning
3.4.1 Clean all tools and equipment with Proprietary Solvent immediately after use. All
hardened or cured material can only be removed mechanically.

3.4.2 Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of
spillovers onto adjacent areas.

F08 - PORCELAIN FLOOR TILES, 600x600x15mm / B.C Dhs.60/m2

600mm X 600mm X 10-15 mm (thick) Granitee / Porcelain tiles (Beige or Crema shades or as per
approved / sizes as approved), first quality from approved manufacturer on mortar and sand and
matching grouting.

Tile grout from approved source should be of matching colour to the tiles.

F-08A - CERAMIC FLOOR TILES. Sand, 250*250*8-10mm/B.C Dhs.30/m2

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 187
 VOLUME III

250mm X 250mm X 8-10 mm(thick) Anti slip, matt finish, unglazed (homogeneous) Ceramic tiles, stain
resistance, (Beige or Crema shades or as per approved) from approved manufacturer on mortar and
sand over waterproofing membrane as specified.

Tiling design, Horizontal border using mosaic tiles etc to be approved before installation.

Tiles to be laid to falls and cross falls as per drainage points. Drains shall be fixed to the center of the
tile to the Approval of the Engineer. Allow for 2 colour variation of tiles. Tile grout to be epoxy type from
approved source and matching colour to the tiles.

The Engineer has the right to instruct the contractor to fix the tiles on 45 degree inclination.

F09 – SURFACE HARDNER

F10 - FLEXIBLE AND CRACK BRIDGING POLYURETHANE BASED FLOORING SYSTEM

SUITABLE FOR EXPOSED CAR PARKS USING SIKAFLOOR® PRODUCTS WITH JOINT
TREATMENT TO PROVIDE EASY APPLICATION AND A DURABLE SOLUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Documents

A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 Summary
A. This specification describes the tough-elastic self-smoothing floor polyurethane system as
specified and as indicated on the drawings, for concrete and cement screeds with medium
to heavy wear floors, consisting of a three-part, coloured polyurethane resin based coating
system for vehicular areas with a final aesthetic finish.

B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under
the designated Sections:
31. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete.
32. Section 07 60 00: Flashing and Sheet Metal.
33. Section 07 92 13: Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
34. Section 22 14 26: Plaza Drains.

1.3 Standards reference:

ISO 16000 Emission test according to the German AgBB-scheme and guidelines
of the DiBt.

ISO 16000 Emission test according to the French AFSSET-scheme and

guidelines.

ISEGA – EN 1186, Safe for contact with foodstuff (According to the Standards and the test
report by ISEGA.
EN 13130

ISO 4 Particle (vs.PA6) emission certificate: Cleanroom Suitable Materials

CSM Statement of Qualification, class ISO 4.

ISO AMCm class 7.3 Outgassing VOC emission certificate: Cleanroom Suitable Materials
CSM Statement of Qualification.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 188
 VOLUME III

ISO 846 Biological Resistance Class “Very Good “–Cleanroom Suitable

Materials Evaluation of the biological resistance.

STANDARSDS FOR THE FINAL COAT

DafStb Rili-SIB 2001 OS 11a German Standard, Report - No. P 4703-2, Polymer Institute,
Germany, February 2007

DafStb Rili-SIB 2001 OS 11b German Standard, Report - No. P 4704, Polymer Institute,
Germany, February 2007

DIN 51130 & BGR 181 Class R11/V4, R12/V6 and R12/V10 (Skid/Slip resistance)

EN 1350-1 Fire classification

1.4 Submittals
A. Submit two copies of manufacturer's literature including but not limited to: Product Data
Sheets (PDS), Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), and appropriate Method Statement
(MS).
B. Mock-ups: Provide a mock-up on site to demonstrate workmanship and final appearance.
Locate in an area acceptable to the Architect. Accepted mock-up may remain in place.

1.5 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturing qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified product shall be ISO
9001:2008 certified and have in existence a recognized ongoing quality assurance
program, independently audited on a regular basis.
B. Contractor qualifications: We recommend the use of a Specialist Applicator, qualified in the
field of specialist flooring with a successful track record of 5 years or more. The contractor
shall maintain qualified personnel who have received product training by a Sika
representative.
C. Materials should be installed in accordance with all safety and weather conditions required
by manufacturer or as modified by applicable rules and regulations of local, state and
federal authorities having jurisdiction. Consult Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for
complete handling recommendations.

1.6 Job Conditions

A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply material if it is raining or if such conditions appear
to be imminent. Minimum application temperature should be 45ºF (7ºC) and rising.
B. Protection: Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to the new floor finish until full
mechanical & chemical properties have been achieved.
C. Application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. All materials must be delivered in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's
name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. Damaged material must be
removed from the site immediately.
B. Store all materials in a cool, dry, preferably air conditioned environment, off the ground and
protect from rain or excessive heat until ready for use.
C. Keep equipment that will be in contact with the product cool and away from direct sunlight.
D. Avoid application during the hottest time of day.

1.8 Warranty
A. A project specific warranty for the performance of the specified product should be agreed
and confirmed in writing from the specialist applicator, backed by the product

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 189
 VOLUME III

manufacturer's standard product supply warranty for the same period'. This warranty
should form part of the tender bid documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufactures
A. All material shall be sourced from a single manufacturer.
B. The selected manufacturer must prove compatibility between all products in direct contact
with each other.

2.2 Exposed Traffic Coatings (Sikafloor®-325 system)

A. Vehicular Traffic Coatings: Sikafloor®-325 system comprised of the following layers:
7. Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): Two component, low viscosity epoxy resin primer.
8. Sikafloor®-325 (Polyurethane Intermediate Coat): Two-part, solvent free, coloured
self-smoothing PUR resin with tough-elastic properties.
9. Sikafloor® 359 SG (Polyurethane seal coat for exposed Ramps): Two part, tough-
elastic, coloured, UV resistant, non-yellowing, polyurethane seal coat for smooth and
broadcast finishes.
10. Sikaflex® PRO 3 (Polyurethane joint sealant): One part, moisture curing, elastic joint
sealant with high mechanical resistance for construction & movement joints.

B. Applied Total Film Thickness Exclusive of Aggregates (if any):

12. Parking Area & Walkways Areas: 0.5 - 0.7 mm (DFT).
13. Ramps & Turnings Areas: 0.7 - 0.9 mm (DFT).

C. Aggregate: Clean, rounded, oven dried quartz sand with a graded size grain of (0.08 - 0.25
mm) or (0.1 - 0.3 mm) for vehicular traffic areas for a final anti-slip surface.

D. Primer Coat: Physical properties complying with the following:

Sikafloor®-161 (Epoxy Primer): of coverage 0.25 – 0.3 kg/m2 to give 180 – 210 microns
wet film thickness, with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Density DIN EN ISO 2811-1 1.4 kg/litre mixed resin
Solid Content 100% by volume & weight
Compressive EN 13892-2 45 N/mm2
Strength

Flexural Strength EN 13892-2 15 N/mm2

Bond Strength ISO 4624 > 1.5 N/mm2
Shore D Hardness DIN 53 505 76
LEED Rating EQ credit 4.2: Low Conforms
Emitting Materials: Paints
& Coatings

VOC Contenet SCAQMD Method 304-91 < 100 g/litre

E. Base & Intermediate Coats: Physical properties complying with the following:

Sikafloor®-325 (Polyurethane Intermediate Coat): of applied theoretical coverage 0.4-0.6

kg/m2 with minimum over-coating time of 16 hours at 30OC and shall comply with the
requirements of LEED EQ Credit 4.2: Low-Emitting Materials: Paints & Coatings, SCAQMD
Method 304-91 VOC Content <100 g/it. Also shall comply with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 190
 VOLUME III

Mixed Density DIN EN ISO 2811-1 1.6kg / litre (+23OC)

Filing 1:0.7 with quartz sand 0.08-0.25mm
Solid Content 100% by weight & volume
Compressive EN 196-1 ~ 70 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)
Strength

Flexural Strength EN 196-1 ~ 40 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)

Tensile Strength DIN 53504 Resin ~ 20 N/mm2 after 28 days (+23OC)
Resin Filled (1:0.7): ~ 20 N/mm2 after 28
days (+23OC)
Bond Strength EN 4624 >1.5 N/mm2 (failure in concrete)
Tear Strength DIN 53504 Resin ~ 49 N/mm after 28 days (+23OC)
Resin Filled (1:0.7): ~ 33 N/mm2 after 28
days (+23OC)
Shore D Hardness DIN 53505 73 after (28days/ +23OC/ 50% r.h)
Elongation at DIN 53504 Resin ~ 40% (14 days/ +23OC/ 50% r.h.)
Break Resin filled (1:0.7): ~ 19% (14 days/ +23OC/
50% r.h.)
Abrasion ASTM D 4060 ~ 55 mg (Taber Abrader test) CS 10 /
Resistance 1000gr / 1000 cycles
Crack Bridging 0.6 mm (static laoding, 28 days/ +23OC)
Capacity

F. UV-Stable Top Coat (Optional): Physical properties complying with the following:

Sikafloor®-359 SG (Polyurethane seal coat): the UV resistant floor seal coat shall be of a
theoretical coverage rate of 0.2-0.3 kg/m2, with minimum over-coating time of 8 hours at
35OC with the following properties
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Mixed Density 1.25kg / litre
Solid Content ~ 65% by weight
Bond Strength ISO 4624 > 1.5 N/mm2
Shore D Hardness DIN 53 505 52 after 7days (+23OC)
Abrasion Resistance DIN 53 109 160 mg (Taber Abrader test)
CS 10 / 1000gr / 1000 cycles
after 7days (+23OC)

G. Polyurethane Joint Sealant for construction & movement joints: Physical properties
complying with the following:

Sikaflex®-PRO 3 (Joint Sealant): One component, high performance, moisture curing,

elastic polyurethane joint sealant for internal & external, construction and expansion joints
with the following properties:
Technical Data Standard Main requirement
Sealant EN 15651-1 Conforms
classification
Sealant ISO 11600 F 25 HM Conforms
classification

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 191
 VOLUME III

Emissions EMICODE EC 1PLUS EC1Plus rating

Safe for contact ISEGA Certificate Complies
with foodstuff
Safe for contact BS 6920 Approved
with potable water
Biological CSM Biological resistance Conforms
resistance
Diesel & jet fuel DIBT guidelines Conforms
resistance

LEED rating EQ credit 4.1: Low Emitting Conforms

Materials: Adhesives and
Sealants.
VOC Content CSM TVOC Conforms
VOC Content SCAQMD Rule 1168 Passes
VOC Content BAAQMD Reg. 8, Rule 51 Passes
Density DIN 53 479-B 1.35 kg/litre
Sag flow DIN EN ISO 7390 0 mm. Very good
Tear strength DIN 53 515 8 N/mm2
Shore A hardness DIN 53 505 37 @ 28 days
E modulus DIN EN ISO 8340 0.6 N/mm2 @ 28 days
Elongation at DIN 53 504 > 700% after 28 days
break

Elastic recovery DIN EN ISO 7389 B > 80% after 28 days

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 Examination:
A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. Notify
Architect in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the work in an area shall
mean Installer’s acceptance of the substrate.

B. Areas of use:
37. Exposed Car park ramps & decks.
38. Loading Ramps & decks.
39. Areas with high concentrations of carbon dioxide, particularly from traffic exhaust
fumes.
40. Warehouses & storage areas.
41. Food & Beverage Industry.

3.2 Surface Preparation

3.2.1 Concrete surfaces particularly if new, should be fully cured with a maximum residual
relative humidity (RH) of 75%, be clean and free from contamination.

3.2.2 Prepare concrete surfaces preferably by mechanical methods such as angle grinding to
remove laitance, curing compounds and other loose materials to provide a mechanical
key for the coating system. The substrate shall be in accordance with ICRI Guideline No.
03732 for coatings and fall within CSP1 to CSP3.

3.2.3 After preparation, fill all blow holes and surface imperfections using a proprietary epoxy
filler material to provide a smooth even surface prior to priming or over coating.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 192
 VOLUME III

3.2.4 Treat small defects and cracks (non-structural) from 250 – 500 microns wide with a
proprietary epoxy filler material trowelled into the cracks until completely full.

3.2.5 A second priming coat may be required if the substrate is particularly porous.

3.3 Priming
3.3.1 Mixing & application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.

3.3.2 Recommended minimum ambient application temperature is 45ºF (7ºC) and rising, with
a substrate temperature at least 3 ºC above dew point.

3.3.3 After surface preparation, mix and apply the primer coat by brush or roller to the prepared
floor area at a rate of 0.35- 0.55 kg/m2 to achieve a nominal wet film thickness of 250 –
390 microns as mentioned in the latest Product Data Sheet.

3.3.4 For filling holes and imperfections, if any, mix and apply an epoxy pore sealer as a scratch
coat to the primed floor area at a rate of 1.6 kg/m2/mm thickness, to achieve a nominal
thickness of 0.5 –1.0mm.

3.3.5 Mix and apply, within the over painting time allowed, the epoxy resin coating using a
short-piled roller onto the primed surface at a rate of 0.25 kg/m2/coat with at least two
coats applied within the over coating time.

3.3.6 Make sure that a continuous pore free coat covers the substrate.

3.3 Exposed System: Base and Intermediate Coats

3.3.1 Mixing & application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.

3.3.2 Recommended minimum ambient application temperature is 45ºF (7ºC) and rising, with
a substrate temperature at least 3 ºC above dew point.

3.3.3 After preparation & priming, mix the polyurethane material with accordance to the latest
Product data sheet.

3.3.4 Prior to mixing, stir part A mechanically. When all of part B has been added to part A, mix
continuously for 2 minutes until a uniform mix has been achieved. Then add the quartz
sand 0.08 - 0.25 mm and mix for a further 2 minutes until a uniform mix has been
achieved.

3.3.5 Make sure, that the application of the polyurethane layer is still within the over-coating
time of the primer.
3.3.6 The application of the polyurethane layer is done by pouring then being spread evenly by
means of a serrated trowel (4mm notch).

3.3.7 After spreading the material evenly, turn the serrated trowel and smooth the surface in
order to remove air bubbles. Then roll immediately (within 10 minutes of application) in
two directions with a spiked roller to ensure even thickness and to remove entrapped air.

3.3.8 Follow the curing time and procedures in the latest Product Data sheet.

3.4 Exposed System: UV-Stable Top Coat

3.4.1 Mixing & application in a temperature controlled environment is highly recommended.

3.4.2 On the polyurethane layer and prior to full cure, broadcast the wet polyurethane coat to
excess with quartz sand of size (grade 0.3-0.7mm) at a rate of 1-2 kg/m2 to achieve a
non-slip profile.

3.4.3 Next day, sweep off the excess sand and then apply the UV-Stable top coat.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 193
 VOLUME III

3.4.4 Mix and apply the final UV-Stable top coat by roller or squeegee onto the broadcast floor
area, at a rate of 0.20-0.30 kg/m2.

3.4.5 Once the top coat (in exposed areas) and/or the base coat (in covered areas) has fully
cured; re-cut all joints inserting a compressible polyethylene joint filler, then seal the joint
with a polyurethane flexible joint sealant. All joints should be reflected through the final
finished floor in accordance with good concrete practice & joint design.

3.4.6 All products should be mixed and applied in accordance with the latest local Product Data
Sheets (PDS), Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and Method Statements (MS).

3.5 Treatment of Joints

3.5.1 After the epoxy coating has fully cured, re-cut all joints (construction & expansion) and
then insert the compressible polyethylene joint filler to fill the lower part of the joint.

3.5.2 Seal the joint with the one part polyurethane elastic joint sealant of type Sikaflex®-PRO
3.
3.5.3 All joints should be reflected through the final finished floor in accordance with good
concrete practice & joint design.

3.6 Cleaning
3.6.1 Clean all tools and equipment with Proprietary Solvent immediately after use. All
hardened or cured material can only be removed mechanically.

3.6.2 Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of
spillovers onto adjacent areas.

3.7 Remedial & repairs

3.7.1 Remedial works to the finished system should be carried out only by trained specialist
contractors, preferably the same as the original installer.

3.7.2 Please observe overcoat windows and chemical reaction times when performing
remedial works.

3.7.3 Preparation & application must be done in accordance with the current Product Data
Sheets (PDS), Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and General Method Statements
(GMS).

F11 – INTERLOCK PAVING

1. Interlocking Block Paving 80mm thick for drive way

Red colour, 200x100x60/80 hydraulically pressed, precast Brick 90 degree herringbone

pattern, They shall be heavy duty, suitable for vehicular traffic and laid on a 50 mm thick well
compacted sand bed over a 200 mm thick layer of road base aggregate.

Interlock paving block shall be using 80mm thick paving blocks, it shall be at the areas where
shown on the drawings. Parking and foot path area toward the road side as per the drawings
& as per Municipality requirements using 80 mm. thick hydraulically pressed, precast
concrete blocks to approved shape and colour. They shall be heavy duty, suitable for
vehicular traffic and laid on a 50 mm thick well compacted washed black sand bed over a 250
mm thick layer of road base aggregate compacted to 95% MDD. Paving shall be laid to
patterns approved by the Engineer.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 194
 VOLUME III

The Kerbstone & Interlock tiles to be from approved source.

2. Interlocking Block Paving 60mm thick for pedestrian use.

F12: GRANITE : B.C Dhs. 200/m2 (For exposed External steps / Platform)

60 x 60 x 2cm best quality Granite (Juparana, Ivory fantasy, Kashmir Gold, etc with overall pattern of
beige/cream to light/medium broom combination shades) or equal approved as per client / Consultant
and laid in patterns as per drawings and consultant's approval. Flooring including cement sand
bedding to give overall thickness not more than 100mm.

The Contractor shall submit shop drawings as directed by the Engineer and shall submit samples of
material & demonstrate workmanship (mockup) for the approval of Engineer.

Treads, risers of single length for the stair block where as in three length for main Entrance and having
non- slip carborundum inserts in two rows. Granite delivered at site should be presented to Engineer for
selection before fixing.

Thickness of granite shall be as under.

(i) Steps & Riser - 30mm thick

(ii) Tiles at the landing - 20mm thick

(iii) Flamed or polished tiles.- 30mm thick for cladding.

(iv) Cut to size tiles for flooring- 30mm thick.

F: TERRAZZO (Stairs – Option)

250 x 250 x 28 to 30mm thick precast polished terrazzo tiles, Stair treads, risers sizes as per design,
consisting of imported chips but locally manufactured, over cement mortar. The tiles should have 1.5
mm uniform groove all around & the same to be grouted using white cement or as advised by Engineer.

For steps- Treads (30mm) and Risers (30mm) shall be matching to the rest of the tile and in single
length to cover stair width. Treads are to be provided with 2 nos non- slip inserts as per drawings and
specification. The tiles shall be ground and polished after installation. Allow for water proofing in all
areas exposed to the exterior & wet areas.

5 Sq.mt. of tiles to be handed over to client as spare with 10 Nos. of steps and Riser.

11.5 S Skirting finishes

All skirting types to have beveled edges.

S1) CERAMIC 100x8mm thick skirting with round top edge and curved corners for all external and
internal angles. The skirting shall match in colour and range to the floor tiles. The skirting shall be set
5mm inside the wall./B.C Dhs 8/m'

S1) PVC Skirting

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 195
 VOLUME III
11.6 Wall finishes

W01 – SIKAGARD PAINT SYSTEM (Same system as E01 – External Finishes)

W02 Anti-Fungus EPOXY RESIN PAINT SYSTEM over cement sand plaster.W03 COLOURED
PORCELAIN / CERAMIC TILES

25x25x6mm thickness with from approved Manufacturer on plaster to full height of the wall . with
sikagard paint system (W01) above tiles .Tile grout and adhesive shall be waterproof type and grout
shall be matching in colour to the tiles. rounded edge tiles shall be used at all junction including the
junction at floor .

11.7 Ceiling finishes

C1 : Acrylic Emulsion Paint

C2 : Two coats of EPOXY PAINT after surface preparation on plastered ceiling.

FC1 : Gypsum ceiling tile 600 x 600 mm - complete system as per approval

600 x 600 X 12mm water resistant gypsum ceiling tile, non-combustible laminated with special fire
resistant vinyl finish with Aluminum foil of paper backing on premium quality gypsum board.

FC2, FC3 : 60x60 cm Perforated Aluminum Suspended Ceiling Tiles

Concealed clip in metal ceiling tiles with concealed grid system with 600x600mmx 0.7mm perforated
and flat stove enamel Aluminum suspended ceiling tiles, bonded with 0.2mm non-flammable acoustic
textile with gypsum bulkhead inlay from approved manufacturer. Fire rating of Class A, Light
reflectance of 85% for flat tiles and 70% for perforated tiles.

Ceiling type to be mix of perforated and flat Aluminum tiles chamfered at edges. Contractor to submit
ceiling layout prior to installation. Shop drawings showing all the openings, A/C diffusers & lighting for
consultant's approval.

FC4 : Gypsum Board Ceiling

14mm gypsum board ceiling/bulkhead on concealed metal proprietary suspension system with taped
and skimmed joints, fire resistant with shadow line edge trim with three coats of acrylic emulsion
textured paint. Allow for all openings, proprietary lockable framed access panels as required. Design
of ceiling to be as per the drawings

Contractor to submit shop drawings showing all the openings , A/C diffusers & lighting for consultant's
approval.

* Design of ceiling to be as per the drawings, contractor to submit shop drawings showing all the
openings, A/C diffusers & lighting for consultant's approval.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 196
 VOLUME III

12. Painting and Decorating

12.1 GENERAL

The painting materials shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer ( but priority shall be given to
local manufacturer when complying with the required specification) and shall be supplied ready
mixed in the manufacturer's sealed and branded containers.

Each container shall bear the maker's brand name, identification of contents and directions for its
proper use. All material must be thoroughly mixed before use.

All sealers, primers, undercoats and thinners shall be the products recommended by the
manufacturers of paint used for the finishing coat.

Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings colors shall be selected by the Architect.

The term " Paint" as used herein includes full epoxy, emulsion, enamels, lacquers , sealer and other
coating or inorganic finish, whether used as primer, intermediate or finish coats.

The Contractor shall protect all painting and decorating work and shall provide adequate dust sheets,
canvases, etc. In order to protect adjacent work. In case of these areas are spoiled, contractor shall
paint them free of cost.

All painting and decorating shall be applied by skilled workmen experienced in this work.

The Contractor shall repaint at his own expense any work where the paint is found to be incorrectly
applied.

Brushes, pails, kettles, etc. used in carrying out the work shall be clean and free from foreign matter.
They shall be thoroughly cleaned before being used for different types or classes of materials.

The Contractor is to submit to Client/ Engineer’s approval the brand and quality of the paints he
proposes to use. If approval is given to a brand of paint the contractor shall use the primers,
undercoat, etc., manufactured or recommended by the manufacturer of that brand and
notwithstanding anything contained, herein shall prepare the surface and carry out the work in
accordance with the manufactures specification to give the best finish required on the surface to be
painted.

All paints to be used under this Contract shall be delivered to and stored on the site in the sealed
labelled containers a minimum of 30 days prior to application. Upon notification by the Contractor that
the material is at the Site. Samples of each material shall be obtained at random from sealed
containers by the Engineer in the presence of an authorized representative of the Contractor.

Samples shall be clearly identified by commercial name type of paint and intended use. If judged
necessary by request of Engineer the paint sample may be tested for compliance at the Contractor's
expense in a laboratory designated by the Engineer.

Complete colour chart for the paints to be used shall be submitted to Client/ Engineer for approval
and the preparation of the colour schedules.

Paints shall be factory manufactured and delivered to the site in unbroken containers which shall
show the designated name, formula, colour manufacturer's directions and name of manufacturer all of
which shall be plainly legible at the time of use.
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 197
 VOLUME III

Pigmented paints shall be supplied in containers not larger than 25 kg. All paints shall be products
that have a minimum of 5 years satisfactory field service.

All paints shall be thoroughly stiffed before use.

Mixing and applications of paints shall be in accordance with the specification of the manufacturers
concerned and to the approval of the Engineer. The mixing of paints, etc., of different brands (before
or during painting) of materials shall be allowed except strictly as detailed by the manufacturers and
as approved. Spraying will only be allowed with the Engineer's written approval.

12.2 MATERIALS

1. Materials in General

The materials to be used as required by the Schedule of finishes and the drawings shall be of
the best quality and of approved types, obtained from an approved manufacturer.

All paints shall comply with the following requirements:

 The product shall be thoroughly mixed and ground. It shall not be settled, caked or
thickened to such a degree that it cannot be mixed easily with paddle by stirring to a
good uniform brushing consistency.

 The colour of the paint shall match the approved sample.,

 Paint shall show no evidence of cracking shipping, flaking or dusting

 Paint shall not skin (form a thin membrane surface on the top of the liquid) within 48
hours in a filled closed container.

 Paint in the containers during and after application shall not be abnormally pungent,
offensive or disagreeable.

 Paint shall show easy brushing, good flowing and spreading and good levelling
properties. Those properties shall be demonstrated on test specimens at the request
of the Engineer. Coats that gave any noticeable pull under a large brush and that
show poor spreading and flowing will not be acceptable.

 Paint shall dry to a uniform, smooth, flat or semi-gloss appearance under conditions
of illumination and wearing. There shall be no laps, skips, highlighted spots or brush
marks. Tinted paints shall dry to a uniform colour.

 Relocating of a previous painting surface shall produce no lightening softening or

other film irregularities.

2. Knotting

Knotting shall be composed of dissolved shellac or other resin which remains unaffected by
the resinous materials in the wood or the following paint coating, thereby preventing the
resinous materials in the timber leaching into the paint film and causing discolouration or
defective drying, it shall be in accordance with B.S 1336.

3. Filling

Filler shall be suitable for use on interior and exterior surfaces. It should be applied on a dry
and dust free surface. Product used shall be compatible to the approved final paint.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 198
 VOLUME III

4. Stopping

Stopping for woodwork to receive clear finish shall be such to match surrounding woodwork,
to approval.

Stopping for internal woodwork, plywood, hardboard, and fibreboard shall be linseed oil putty
to BS 544. Tined to match the colour of the undercoat.

Stopping for external woodwork shall be white dead paste `and gold wise well mixed.

5. Thinners

Thinners shall be approved turpentine or white spirit to BS245 where paints are specified to
be water thinned, in which case fresh water shall be used for thinning.

6. Stain

Stain for woodwork shall be an approved brand of oil stain complying with B.S 1215.

7. Etch Primer

The etch primer shall be mordant solution, slightly acidic in nature and containing solvents,
for applying to new smooth metallic surfaces to remove grease, organic soaps and provide a
physical key, or other equal and approved.

8. Polyurethane Lacquer

Polyurethane lacquer for wood work shall be of an approved manufacture.

9. Varnish - Varnish for interior woodwork shall be an approved brand, oil varnish. Varnish shall
form a hard flexible, transparent and quick drying film.

10. Linseed Oil

Linseed oil for woodwork shall be refined linseed oil to comply with BS. 246.

11. Priming Paints

Priming paints shall be the primer recommended by the manufacturer of the finishing paint or:

 For woodwork- lead-based or priming paint to comply with B.S 2521 and 2523.
 For steel work-red oxide priming paint to comply with B.S 2524.
 For galvanized, zinc or aluminum work-gray zinc chromate priming paint.
 For concrete, blockwork, plaster, platter board and the like- alkali priming paint.

12. Undercoating - Undercoating shall be:

 Zinc oxide based undercoating paint.

 White lead based undercoating paint in accordance with 'B.S 2525-7 Colours shall
approximately match the finishing paint.
 Synthetic alkali based undercoating in accordance with the recommendations of the
paint manufacturer.

13. Rust inhibiting Primer

The rust inhibiting primer shall be zinc chromate or other equal approved primer.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 199
 VOLUME III

14. Finishing Paints

Unless otherwise indicated, Finishing paints shall have either a matt, eggshell, semi-gloss or
gloss appearance as indicated on the finishing square as per drawings or/ and requested by
Engineer in the Specifications. Allowance must be made for a full colour range.

Entire painting job shall be carried out through supplier approved applicator and under the
supervision of the supplier.

Paints to be used are from approved manufacturer and according to the prescribed manner in
the catalogue.

All paint systems shall be approved prior to any permanent works being carried out. Sample
panels of all paint with the chosen colours shall be provided by the contractor

Paint system specified hereunder to be considered for guidance only system similar to those
listed can be proposed from list of approved manufacture for Engineer approval.

 Vinyl Emulsion Paint

Emulsion paint shall have either a matt, silk or eggshell appearance as indicated on
the drawings or required by Engineer or these Specifications. Allowance must be
made for a full colour range. Application shall consist of:

Primer / Sealer - 1 coat.

Putty filler – 2 coats
Acrylic silk/ matt emulsion – 3 coats

 Epoxy system
External walls and other surfaces indicated on the drawings shall be painted with
Application shall consist of:

Two component high build epoxy coating – 2 coat

Two component epoxy texture – 1 coat
Two component acrylic polyurethane – 2 coats

 Polyurethane paint on galvanized M.S. works

Two components polyamide adduct cured epoxy paint– 1 coat

Two components high build epoxy coating – 1 coat
Two components semi-gloss acrylic polyurethane coating – 2 coats

 Texture Paint on Ceiling

Primer / Sealer - 1 coat

Acrylic filler – 2 coats
Acrylic based texture coat – 2 coats
Acrylic emulsion – 1 coat

12.3 WORKMANSHIP

1. General

The Contractor shall carry out all tests necessary for determining the colours and shades of
the finishes and the appropriate methods of application. Sample panels shall be completed in
accordance with Architect's instructions.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 200
 VOLUME III

All work shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.

Before application of any paint or finish, all surfaces shall be cleaned, dried and prepared as
specified hereinafter, all to the Architect's approval, no work shall commence until this
approval is given in writing to Contractor.

The Contractor shall coordinate work to ensure that factory primed items are primed or
painted as required in Specifications.

All metal fittings such as hardware and fastenings, etc., not required to be painted shall first
be fitted and then removed before the preparatory processes are commenced. When all
painting is completed the fitting shall be cleaned and re-fixed in position.

Before painting, floors must be washed and every possible precaution shall be taken to keep
down dust before and during the painting processes. No paint shall be applied to surfaces
structurally or superficially damp and all surfaces must be ascertained to be free from
condensation, efflorescence, etc., before the application of each coat.

No exterior or exposed painting shall be carried out under adverse weather conditions such
as rain, extreme humidity, dust storms, high temperature of surface etc.

All coats of paint must be thoroughly dry before subsequent coats are applied, and rubbed
down with fine waterproof abrasive where necessary.

All coating shall be well applied, leaving no sags, laps, brushes or other defects. Each coat
must be thoroughly dry before next coat is applied. All work must be carefully cut into a true
line and left smooth and clean.

Details of mixing and application shall be in accordance with the specifications of the
manufacturer concerned and to the approval of the Architect. The mixing of paint, etc., of
different brands before or during application will not be permitted. No dilution of painting
materials shall be allowed strictly except as detailed by the manufacturers and as approved
by the Architect.

On surfaces which are not accessible to paint brushes or rollers, paint shall be applied by
spraying or with sheep skin daubers. All surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly covered
with paint. Method of paint applications shall be approved by the Architect prior to the
commencement of the work.

Brushes, pails kettles and all other tools and equipment used in carrying out the work shall be
maintained in good working condition, and shall be clean and free from foreign matter. They
shall be thoroughly cleaned before being used for different types or classes of materials.

The Contractor will be required to repaint, at his own expense any work on which the paint is
found to be incorrectly applied. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and from
damaging the paint work and all other work during and after operations including the provision
of all necessary dust sheets, covers, etc. All paints dropping shall be cleaned up as the work
proceeds.

All loose and defective paint shall be removed from previously painted surfaces before re-
painting. All burning off must be done by skilled workmen. The blow-lamp must not be used
on surfaces adjoining glass. Damage to adjacent surfaces shall be made good at the
Contractor's expense.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 201
 VOLUME III

Prior to hand over, the Contractor shall carry out all remedial painting work due to damage
caused by others. On completion, leave Work clean and tidy to the Architect's approval.

2. Painting to Concrete, Block work or plaster

Concrete, blockwork and plaster surfaces to be painted or decorated shall have all cracks cut
out and made good to the satisfaction of the Architect.

Plasterboard surfaces shall have taped joints and the surface puttied to the satisfaction of the
Architect. The surface shall be completely dry and shall be brushed free of impurities
immediately prior to the commencement of the painting work.

Efflorescence shall be completely removed by rubbing down with dry coarse cloths followed
by wiping down with fine glass paper and brushed free of dust before applying any form of
decoration.

Concrete blockwork and plastered surfaces which are to receive paint shall be given one thin
coat of oil putty and allowed to dry for at least two days. The surfaces shall then be rubbed
down with fine glass paper and given a second thin coat of oil putty and when completely set
shall be rubbed down again with fine glass paper before applying the painting system.

Emulsion paint shall be applied by brush or roller and shall consist of primer and two full coats
of paint.

Texture paint shall be uniformly applied at a rate of not less than a 4m2 per liter by
overlapping, crisscross rollers or spray in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Where finished surfaces are described as shaving smooth texture finish, the overall thickness
of the applied finish shall be less than 1.5 mm. Where finished surfaces are described as
having rough texture finish, the overall thickness of the applied finish shall be not less than
2mm. Finished surface shall be uniform in colour and texture, free from runs, sags, crawls or
other defects.

Oil paint shall be applied by brush or roller and shall consist of a priming coat, two undercoats
and one finishing coat of paint.

Fire resistant paint shall be applied in three coats over a primer all in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.

All plastered or rendered surfaces shall be twice stopped with approved putty filler. The first
coat of stopping shall be applied after the primer coat has dried out completely. And the
second coat after the first undercoat application. Each coat of stopping shall be allowed to
dry and harder thoroughly and shall then be rubbed by sandpaper until smooth surface is
achieved.

The emulsion is to be applied in three coats, the first a thinned coat and the other two full
coats. Each coat shall be allowed to dry and harder thoroughly before the next coat is
applied.

3. Varnishing

All surfaces to be varnished shall be thoroughly dry and cleaned and sand down and all nail
holes or similar defects shall be filled and levelled up with approved hard stopping. Sanding
shall follow the line of the grain. Knots shall be treated with two coats of knotting.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 202
 VOLUME III

Three coats of clear varnish shall be applied recommended by the manufacturer of the
varnish or as directed by the architect.

4. Painting to metalwork

Steel work delivered to the Site un-primed shall be cleaned of impurities scrapped and wire
brushed to remove rust and painted with one coat of priming paint applied by brush.

Primed steel work delivered to site shall be cleaned of impurities and damage to the priming
paint and made good with priming paint.

Galvanized metalwork to be painted shall be cleaned of impurities. Where rusting has

occurred the rust shall be removed by wire brushing and made good with an approved rust
inhibitor. The surfaces shall be coated with a mordant solution, washed with clean water and
painted with two coats of priming paint applied by brush.

Metal which is concealed shall be prepared and primed as above and shall be painted with
two priming coats and one finishing coat of paint applied by brush.

12.4 Guarantee

For all external and internal painting works, the Contractor shall provide a guarantee for material and
workmanship to be valid for a period of five years from the date of completion certificate or as
specified elsewhere whichever is longer.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 203
 VOLUME III

13. External Works

The provisions of all other sections of these specifications shall be applicable to this section where
relevant.

13.1 Paved areas

3. Interlocking Block Paving 8cm for driveway

Red colour, 200x100x60/80 hydraulically pressed, precast Brick 90 degree herringbone

pattern, They shall be heavy duty, suitable for vehicular traffic and laid on a 50 mm thick well
compacted sand bed over a 200 mm thick layer of road base aggregate.

Interlock paving block shall be using 80mm thick paving blocks, it shall be at the areas where
shown on the drawings. Parking and foot path area toward the road side as per the drawings
& as per Municipality requirements using 80 mm. thick hydraulically pressed, precast
concrete blocks to approved shape and colour. They shall be heavy duty, suitable for
vehicular traffic and laid on a 50 mm thick well compacted washed black sand bed over a 250
mm thick layer of road base aggregate compacted to 95% MDD. Paving shall be laid to
patterns approved by the Engineer.

4. Interlocking Block Paving 6cm for other areas.

The Kerbstone & Interlock tiles to be from approved source.

5. Asphalt paving
Scope: The requirements for Asphalt Paving at the areas as shown on the drawings shall be
as follows:

13.2 Materials

 Aggregates
The aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring crushed or uncrossed materials
which apart from grading requirements comply with BS 882. The salt contents shall
not exceed the following limits.

Acid soluble chlorides 0.06 % by wt. of fine aggregate

0.02 % by wt. of coarse aggregate

Acid soluble sulphates 0.03 % by wt. by of coarse and fine aggregates

 Water

The water shall be clean, potable and free from any deleterious matter having ph
value in the range (7-9) and shall conform to BS 3148 (1990).

 Pigments: Any pigment used shall comply with BS 10014.

13.3 Precast Concrete Kerbs

Shall be used with the following specification:

1. Precast concrete kerbs shall comply with BS 340, be laid and bedded on a mortar bed on a
concrete foundation as shown on the Drawings.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 204
 VOLUME III

The carriage way or foundation shall be thoroughly cleaned and prior to placing the backing,
the line levels and joints of all units shall be approved by the Engineer.

2. Precuts concrete kerbs shall be hydraulically pressed.

3. For radius less than 12m, radius kerbs shall be used.

4. Any units deviating more than 3mm in 3m from line or level shall be taken up and re-laid

5. Where filling placed adjacent to the kerb, the kerbs shall be protected from the fill material by
a method agreed with the Engineer or as shown on the Drawings.

6. Expansion joints will provided at 6m spacing along the kerb run. The Expansion joints shall be
formed of suitable flexible material to the approval of the Engineer.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 205
 VOLUME III

14. Particular Specifications

14.1. General

The particular specification shall be read in conjunction with the General specification & Tender
drawings. Where discrepancies occur between the conditions of the General and particular
specification then the conditions of the particular specification shall take precedence.

The contractor is responsible to execute any item mentioned in the general specifications, particular
specifications, drawings and or bill of quantities.

In case of any ambiguity between the above contract documents, Client/ Consultant reserve the right
to choose any of the specified materials unless the contractor brought it to their notice while
tendering.

14.2. List of Approved Materials & Manufacturers

The following list of approved manufactures has to be followed in order of preference by the
Contractor. The contractor may put forward alternative manufacturers only if the recommended are
not available, subject to the Client\ Consultant's approval, formal materials submissions can then be
made.

Note : SIKA Products must be used where ever specified. Contractors scope for SIKA materials
is limited to application / installation as per manufacturers guidelines

Alternative (1) Alternative (2) Alternative (3) Alternative (4)

Sr.No. Item
ORI
NAME ORIGIN NAME ORIGIN NAME ORIGI NAME
GIN
N
1.0 Civil & Architectural Works

Concrete work

Concrete repair
1.1 SIKA UAE WEBER UAE
material

Hard
United Dubai
Precast
1.2 Precast panel precast- UAE Precast UAE UAE
Building
UPC L.L.C
systems

Joint & Norwa Al-Plex

1.3 SIKA UAE WEBER UAE UBM UK
Construction y

1.4 Flexcel Board SIKA UAE B.C.R UK U.B.M Norway

Protection Texmastic Backere

1.5 Board (6mm SIKA UAE WEBER UAE Crok U.S.A. Bord U.S.A.
thk)

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 206
 VOLUME III

Alternative (1) Alternative (2) Alternative (3) Alternative (4)

Sr.No. Item
ORI
NAME ORIGIN NAME ORIGIN NAME ORIGIN NAME
GIN

Curing
1.6 Compounds SIKA UAE WEBER UAE
Surface
1.7 Hardeners SIKA UAE WEBER UAE

Insulations work

1.8 Cold Bitumen SIKA UAE WEBER UAE

Cosmo Kangaroo Al Ain

1.9 Polythene sheet UAE UAE UAE
Plast Plastics Plastic

1.10 Water Proofing SIKA UAE WEBER UAE

1.11 Water Stop SIKA UAE WEBER UAE

Thermal
1.12 Kingspan UAE Dow USA Rockwool Denmark KIMMCO-
Insulation Kuwait
ISOVER
Fire Stop
1.13 SIKA UAE Hilti Germany 3M UAE GYPROC UAE
Sealants

Joint Sealant
1.14 SIKA UAE WEBER UAE
/Wall /Slab

1.15 Mastic SIKA UAE WEBER UAE

1.16 Joint Sealant SIKA UAE WEBER UAE

Site work

National Al
1.17 Kerb Stone Unimix UAE UAE UAE
RAK Fujairah

Sulfate Resistant
National Al
1.18 Interlocking Unimix UAE UAE UAE
RAK Fujairah
Tiles

Road Marking
1.19 and Curb SIKA UAE WEBER UAE
Marking

Car Parking
1.20 SIKA UAE
Traffic Coating WEBER UAE

1.21 Car Park Shade The Registered And Approved Companies in MOID

Finishes work

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 207
 VOLUME III

Alternative (1) Alternative (2) Alternative (3) Alternative (4)

Sr.No. Item
ORI
NAME ORIGIN NAME ORIGIN NAME ORIGIN NAME
GIN

Block and
1.22 plaster Expamt UAE Catnic UAE Unitech UAE
accessories

Granite, Marble,
1.23 The Registered And Approved Companies in MOID
Stones

Fujairah
Ceramic For Saudi
1.24 R.A.K UAE KSA Ceramic UAE
Wall & Floor Ceramic
Factory

Porcelain For Fujairah

Saudi
1.25 Floor (grinte R.A.K UAE KSA Ceramic UAE
Ceramic
ceramic) Factory

Comfort
1.26 SIKA UAE
flooring

Tile Latex-
1.27 Cementitious SIKA UAE WEBER UAE
forCeramic

Tile Grout- for

1.28 SIKA UAE
Ceramic WEBER UAE

1.29 Tile Adhesive SIKA UAE

WEBER UAE
Anti Dust Epoxy
1.30 SIKA UAE
Flooring WEBER UAE

1.31 Rubber Flooring SIKA UAE

Mostafawi
1.32 Carpet Mehrtage Europe MBM Europe Europe
Ent.

1.33 Raised Floor Intec UAE MBM UAE Norplan UAE

Paint Caparol
1.34 (for interior
Jotun UAE
walls)

Paint
1.35 (for exterior Jotun UAE WEBER UAE
walls)

Paints insulation
1.36 above suspended Jotun UAE Aljazeera KSA
ceilings

Cubicles &
1.37 Al Kamda UAE Gibca UAE Bin Sabt UAE
Cabinets

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 208
 VOLUME III

Alternative (1) Alternative (2) Alternative (3) Alternative (4)

Sr.No. Item
ORI
NAME ORIGIN NAME ORIGIN NAME ORIGIN NAME
GIN

Giffin
1.38 Signage Gibca UAE UAE Pentagon UAE
Traffic

1.39 Kitchen cabinet The Registered And Approved Companies in MOID

Acrylic solid
surface
1.40 materials & Sanitart UAE Cloisall UAE Finmat UAE
Perforated
Corian Panel

Gypsum Board
1.41 Suspended Knauf Germany Gypsemna UAE GYPROC UAE
Ceiling

Aluminum Alumco Gulf Emirates

1.42 UAE UAE UAE
Section LLC Extrusions Extrusions

Alumn.
1.43 Dorma Germany Haffle Germany Geze Germany
Accesories

Glass and Glaver SAINT-

1.44 Pilkington USA Belgium GOBAIN France
Mirrors Bell
GLASS
Carpentry and
1.45 Joinery (Doors The Registered And Approved Companies in MOID
and Fittings)

Hydraulic door
1.46 Geze Germany Hafele Germany Dorma Germany
closer

Hardware/Iron
Mongeries&
1.47 Accessories (for Hager USA Hafele Germany All Good UK
Carpentry and
Joinery)

Paint For
wooden door
1.48 Jotun UAE Aljazeera UAE Gulf Paint UAE
and wooden
work

Al
Non Security Kuhaimi Roots
1.49 Rimal UAE KSA Lebanon
Metal Door Metal Group sal
Industries

Sound Proof Saint-

1.50 Hakan Turkey Wavin Poland Pyrotek Australia Gobain UK
drainage pipes
PAM

1.51 Dry wall Knauf Germany Gypsemna UAE

GYPROC UAE

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI Page 209
 VOLUME III

Alternative (1) Alternative (2) Alternative (3) Alternative (4)

Sr.No. Item
ORI
NAME ORIGIN NAME ORIGIN NAME ORIGIN NAME
GIN

1.52 Floor SIKA UAE

Underlayment WEBER UAE

Wet Areas SIKA WEBER

Waterproofing UAE UAE
1.53

1.54 Sand-Cement SIKA UAE WEBER UAE

Pre-mixed Screed

1.55 EIFS System SIKA UAE WEBER UAE

1.56 Resin Flooring SIKA UAE

1.57 Aluminum
ALUBOND UAE
Cladding

LEGEND:

KSA: KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA DEN: DENMARK

UAE: UNITED ARAB EMIRATES EUR: EUROPE
USA: UNITED STATES OF AMERICA FIN: FINLAND
UK : UNITED KINGDOM FRA: FRANCE
GER: GERMANY KUW: KUWAIT
HOL: HOLLAND SIN: SINGAPORE
ITA: ITALY SPA: SPAIN
JAP: JAPAN SWE: SWEDEN
SWI: SWITZERLAND CAN: CANADA
BEL: BELGIUM

Notes:

1. Manufacturer’s names for products and country of assembly shall be the same
2. In case of non-availability of specified product, then the contractor shall submit proof of non-
availability of the product and justify that his proposed product is on same or superior qualitythan
the specified brand
3. The proposed material / product has to meet technical specifications requirements.
4. In case of discrepancies between different tender documents in material specification, thenmore
stringent specification will be followed.
5. Sika mentioned as manufacturer can supply only materials mentioned by “branded” name with
related accessories (if any). All other general materials, not specifically mentioned under Sika
brand name, e.g. “plaster”, “screed”, “thermal insulation, like EPS, XPS, rockwool”, “tiles”, etc.
must be considered under MC scope of work
6. All Sika materials shall be applied by trained and approved applicators.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

Page 210
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI
 VOLUME III

14.3. Materials and Equipment

a. Structural Works
The materials generally shall comply with the structural specification and drawings.

b. Expansion Joints
Expansion joint material shall comply with drawing details and approved by consultant and by
the joint sealant manufacturer.

c. Underground Waterproofing

I. Substructure:

 Concrete Works:
Concrete work below ground including service manholes and trenches if any,
to be complying to the specification mentioned below in details in section (6.
Roofing and Waterproofing) with all application procedures and preparation
methods.

i. Waterproofing types as mentioned in Section 6:

Waterproofing of substructure – warehouse: Using rubberized bitumen liquid

emulsion damp proofing for footings and under-ground concrete structures of
type Igasol® Emulsion BA-6510.

Waterproofing of substructure – office building: Using fully bonded FPO

sheet membrane waterproofing system for hot climate used for
foundation for the main office building of type Sika Proof® A-12 HC
system with fixation details as mentioned later.

II. Superstructure:

 Roofing and slab Waterproofing:

i. Concrete works above ground including all up-stands and penetration details
to be complying to the specification mentioned below in details in section (6.
Roofing and Waterproofing) with all application procedures and preparation
methods.

ii. The contractor shall allow for a 48hour standing water test once the water
proofing membrane has been properly applied. The contractor shall allow for
the disposal of the water upon completion of the test and all repairs and re-
testing as necessary to the approval of the Engineer.

iii. Waterproofing types as mentioned in Section 6:

iv. Roof Waterproofing system -Sika PVC membrane roofing system: Using loose
laid roofing membrane system for loose-laid roofs of type Sarnafil® G476-15
system with detailing & up-stands as mentioned later.
Waterproofing of wet areas: Using cold applied waterproofing membrane
of one component highly elastic polyurethane coating of type Sikalastic-
WR system as mentioned later in details.
v. Waterproofing of domestic & firefighting tanks: Spray applied
waterproofing system for domestic water tanks using high quality pure
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
Page 211
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI
 VOLUME III
polyuria liquid applied membrane of type Sikalastic®-8800 system as
mentioned later in details.
Waterproofing of Storm Water Drain / Soak Well: Using Polymer
modified cementitious mortar slurry of type SikaTop® Seal-107 system as
mentioned later in details.

d. Wooden Doors:
I. Wooden sub frames
18 mm thick marine ply frame shall be used for the following areas andthe same shall be
treated with anti-termite paint from approved manufacturer.

a. Supply and return openings for the air conditioning.

b. For all wooden door frames.

II. Fire Resistance

Doors shall be fire rated based on EHS requirements and/or shall comply to test in
accordance with BS 476: Part 22 1897. Methods for the determination of the fire
resistance ofnon-load bearing elements of construction. Shutters are to be provided with
smoke seal in addition to intumescent strip to achieve smoke control function to comply
building regulations.Smoke seals are to be tested in accordance with BS-467 part 31
section 31.1. Door performance should comply EHS rules & regulation FD 90 S etc.

III. Wooden frames

All internal wooden door frames shall be in Ash wood using 5cm thick and width
equivalent towall + plaster / tiles etc.

IV. Wooden shutter and architrave molding.

The internal shutters using solid core flush doors with Ash veneer cladding on either side
withAsh wood edging all around and as per the general specification
Architrave molding of 7mm width and the wood shall be similar to those of the frame
All the wood work shall have spray polish finish or lacquer paint ( first quality ) as per the
engineer's approval
Doors and frames shall be manufactured in an approved factory in U.A.E. having done a
number of prestigious works in U.A.E .
Size of frames, architrave's and the like as shown on the door schedule, are the
minimum required, final sizes shall be determined on site, when site dimension and shop
drawings areprepared.
Thickness of door leafs shall be 45mm for normal type and 50mm for the 1.5 hr and
abovefire rated. Allow gap for carpet and other flooring installation.

V. Ironmongery and Miscellaneous Fittings

Ironmongery

 Each of the door shutter shall have 4nos. of stainless steel hinges. and 3nos for less
than 90cm width door

 Dorma or Hewi for handles & door's accessories shall be provided for the individual
door shutter.

The locks shall be from Dorma or Kafley or of an approved manufacturer with master
key system. A proper key board with key tags shall be provided by the Contractor on
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
Page 212
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI
 VOLUME III
completion.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the calculation of the final quantities of
ironmongery required based on the contract Drawings and to the Engineer approval.
Granite Threshold shall be provided for all the doors with 30 mm Th .of which 15 mm
over the floor level.
All external doors and internal doors are to be fitted with a stainless-steel heavy-duty
door closer with hold open device on each shutter.
For more details see item 19 of this section-Ironmongery

e. Aluminum curtain wall, Windows and Doors and glass doors

Refer detailed drawing & general specification in addition to those marked below

I. Principle Work
Glazed doors and windows.

II. Related Work.

Sandwich wall cladding

III. Standards
Comply with British standards for materials, fabrication and installation of component
parts, testing of specimens and performance of the completed works.

Make design modifications of the work shown only as may be necessary to meet
performance requirements. Variations in details and materials which do not affect
appearance, durability or strength may be submitted for approval. Maintain general
exterior design concept.

All Aluminum frames and profiles sections and all glazing must be thermal insulated.

The contractor is obliged to provide the same from approved manufacturer for
Engineer/DPW approval.

Thermal insulated sections should comply with DEWA specifications and contractor
has to provide authorized evidence of thermal insulation efficiency from concerned
departments.

IV. Tolerances

Tolerances shall be in accordance with recognized standards.

1- Vertical position: plus/minus 2 mm;
2- Horizontal position: plus/minus 2 mm;
3- Racking in elevation: nil
4- Deviation from true plumb over full height: maximum 6 mm.
5- Deviation from true straight line of plane, over full length of eachbuilding face;
maximum 6 mm.

Tolerances are not accumulative.

V. Quality Assurance

 Engineering
- All design work shall be engineered and certified by a licensed Professional Engineer.
- Submittals, proposals details, samples, and shop drawings, certifications and
proposed substitutions shall bear the seal and signature of the Professional Engineer.
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
Page 213
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI
 VOLUME III
- Have fabrication and installation of work inspected and certified approved by the
Quality assurance engineer.

 Fabricator's Qualifications
- The fabricator shall be: regularly engaged in engineering, manufacturing, fabricating,
finishing, installing, glazing and sealing of the type of work specified in this section for
minimum of ten years.
- Able to demonstrate satisfactorily completed works of minimum size as this project.
- The Fabricator installation company shall be ISO 9001 registered
- Able to demonstrate a thorough understanding of the principles of rain screen, stack
effect, air seals, dynamic forces, behavior of cast-in-place concrete structures, water
and weather controls as affecting building cladding systems

 Prototype for Inspection and Testing

- Provide a prototype of the curtain wall for inspection and testing as described below:
- Prototype shall be 2 floors high and 5 m wide and shall include framing, glass
spandrels, metal air/vapour barrier, insulation, seals, gaskets, flashings, anchorages
on to structure, baffles, moving joints and all accessories as necessary to provide a
complete curtain wall system.
- Install prototype components in same sequence and utilizing same methods and
personnel as will be used for the project installation.
- Where testing is required the sample Prototype shall be installed, to achieve an
airtight assembly, to the test chamber.
- Should the prototype fail to meet specification performance requirements, make
corrections and modifications for further testing at no cost to the Owner. The curtain
wall Sub-contractor shall be responsible for further costs associated with the
retesting.
 Test to be carried out are :
 Air infiltration test according to ASTM E 283 & AAMA or relevant DIN or BS
standards
 Water Penetration test according to ASTM E331 & AAMA or relevant DIN or
BS standards.
 Structural performance test according to ASTM E330 & AAMA or relevant
DIN or BS standards.
 Water test according to ASTM E331 & AAMA or relevant DIN or BS
standards.
 Structural performance test at 1.5 times the design load.
 There should be no failure or permanent deformation when applying a load of
1.5 times the design load.

 Product Data
- Submit manufacturer’s specifications, fabrication requirements, and installation
instructions, withamendments to obtain requirements of this section of the
specifications.
- Include erection method statements and glazing details
togetherwith maintenance and cleaning instructions.
- Furnish data clearly describing reglazing techniques.
- Furnish maintenance and cleaning instructions.

 Calculations
- Submit calculations, under seal and signature of the Professional Engineer,
Showingfollowing:
- Design load assumptions.
- Detailed engineering of mullions.
- Moment of inertia of mullions.
- Detailed engineering of anchorage hardware, clip angles, washers, anchor
bolts, welds,torque pressures.
- Materials proposed and their allowable sheer and bending stresses.
- Deflections and expansion and contractions.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

Page 214
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI
 VOLUME III
- Prepare calculations in a clear, comprehensive manner to permit easy review.
Incomplete or haphazard calculations will be rejected unreviewed.

 Shop Drawings
- Submit shop drawings as specified.
- Each shop drawing shall bear seal and signature of the Professional Engineer.
- Show:
1. Elevations.
2. Details of dimensions, components, profiles, joint location and sizes, arrangement
of units. Horizontal to vertical connections, thicknesses. Details of special shapes,
reinforcement, drainage details, and flow diagrams,. Pressure equalization
system and air barrier system, baffles, flashings, insulation, and anchorage
system interfacing with building structure. Connections and joints and seals to
adjacent building envelope systems, provisions for thermally induced expansion
and contraction, provisions for absorption of building structuremovements and
creep, thermal break details and locations.
3. Locations of exposed fasteners and joints.
4. Glazing details, methods, if carried out in field or in shop, locations of various
types andthicknesses of glass.
5. Panels, related reinforcements and securement methods.

 Samples
- Submit samples as specified.
- Submit three samples of each material with respective finishes as follows:
- Extrusions: 300 mm long.
- Sheets: 300 mm x 300 mm.
- Gaskets and tapes: 900 mm long section of each type.
- Sealants: 150mm bead strips applied to metal sheet, showing colours.
- Fasteners: Three of each type.
- Glass: 300 mm x 300 mm of each type. Samples shall represent physical and chemical
properties, and colours to be supplied.

 Glass Stress Analysis Reports

Submit glass stress analysis performed by glass manufacturer/supplier of all glass. Identify
locationsof each glass unit on building, its stress factors and statement whether glass unit is
to be annealed, heat strengthened or tempered. The bid price shall include for providing
glass consistent with minimum requirements as determined by the glass stress analysis.

 Certifications
- Submit statements certified by the Professional Engineer stating:
- Work of this section is engineered, supplied and installed as specified herein.
- Submit statements certified by the sealant manufacturers attesting that:
1. Sealants selected are suitable for purposes intended.
2. Sealants will not deteriorate due to exposure to ultra-violet radiation (sunlight).
3. Joint designs are correct.
4. Sealants are compatible with other materials with which they come in contact.
5. Sealants are suitable for temperature and humidity conditions at time of application.
6. Surfaces are properly prepared and primed, if required, to accept sealants.

 Project Close-out Data

Submit Data Books, Operating Instructions Manual and Preventive Maintenance Manual for
work ofthis section and as specified.

 Protection
- Protect work from damage.
- Do not apply transom or Mullion cover caps and spandrels until the building is closed
in, untilthe roofing is installed & until no possibility of alkaline substances can be
washed from the building and building structure onto the work.
- Should work be prefabricated into assembled units complete with glazing, spandrel
panels,insulated metal air barrier, in the factory and installed on the building as
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
Page 215
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI
 VOLUME III
complete units,
- precautions shall be taken to protect units and glass from damage due to alkaline
bearingwater.
- Clean glass as necessary to prevent etching due to alkaline bearing water.

 Warranties
- Submit written warranty in form acceptable to Owner, jointly signed by Contractor and
by Subcontractor for the work, warranting against defective materials, products,
workmanship, water tightness, design, performance and glass breakage, due to
defective engineering fabrication and installation and for five year period following
date of Substantial Performanceof the Work.
- Five year warranty shall include but not necessarily be limited to:

1. Complete watertight and airtight work within specified tolerances.

2. Structural soundness and freedom from distortion, and within elastic
deflection limitsspecified.
3. Glass or snap-on mullion covers will not break or "pop" from frames due to design
wind loads,expansion or contraction movements, or structural loading.
4. Metal finish will not crack, peel, pit, corrode, or dis-colour.
5. Sealants and gaskets shall remain free from deterioration, oxidation or
dislocation due tosunlight and weather conditions.
6. Completed installation shall remain free from rattles, wind whistles, and noise due to
thermaland structural movements and wind pressure.
- Warrant seals on insulated glass units for ten years. Units shall be free from
condensation,fogging, and obstruction of vision due to film on internal surfaces.
- Warrant the painted coatings will be free from peeling, cracking, pitting, corroding,
or non-uniformity of colour, or gloss deterioration beyond manufacturer's
descriptive standards.
- Warrant for five years, the metallic oxide coating on light and heat reflecting glass.
Coatingshall be free of oxidation, delamination, colour change, streaks,
disintegration and:
- Pinholes except those up to 1.2 mm in size. Large clusters of pinholes, as assessed
by theConsultant are not permitted.


 Products
I. Materials
Materials : Inorganic, resistant to rodents, vermin, mildew, fungus and algae, as
necessary to obtaindesign and performance requirements and as follows:
- Framing, Trim and Flashings:

II. Aluminum
a. Extrusions: 6063 alloy, T5 or T6 temper, or Al Mg,Si 0.5 F 22 anodizing quality.
b. Sheet and Plates: 1100-H14 alloy, anodizing quality, and for spandrels, controlled
stretcherleveled optimum flats , stress relieved to 1/2 commercial tolerances.
 Steel: to BS 5950 or relevant DIN or ASTM standards.
 Screws, Bolts, washers, nuts and other fastening devices:200 or 300 series austenitic
gradestainless steel.
 Slip Washers : nylon.
 Thermal Separator (thermal break): Use Polythermid insulator sizes to conform to
extrudedaluminum members.
 Dielectric Separator: Bituminous paint, tape or dielectric coating.
 Bituminous paint: to BS 6949 or relevant DIN or ASTM standards.
 Insulation for packing in frames and between frames and adjacent construction:
lightweight,inorganic mineral wool of 35/50 Kg/m cu.nominal density.

III. Fire stopping

 Mineral fibre fire and smoke insulation: Complete with Minimum 2Hr. fire rating
galvanizedsteel. Fire stopping shall be 25% wider than the space to be filled.
 Fire stopping sealant: one component silicone manufactured by Dow Corning Ltd. or
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
Page 216
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI
 VOLUME III
siliconeas approved by the Institute fur Bautechik.

IV. Sealants
 General: Sealants shall be Non-bleeding, non-drying and capable of supporting
their ownweight.
 For concealed non-moving static joints and fixing device penetrations: One
component butylrubber.
 For moving working joints and exposed locations including edge spacer seals to the
doubleglazed units: One component silicone, U.V. resistant, non-discoloring,
formulated not to attract airborne dirt and pollutants, manufactured by Dow Corning
Ltd. or other approved supplier.
 Sealants, cleaning solvents, fills and primers: Compatible with each other.
 Colours for sealants: As designated by the consultant from the sealant
manufacturer'sstandard colour range.
 Primers: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer to suit conditions.
 Cleaning material: Xylol, methyl-ethyl-ketone, Toluol or as recommended by the
sealantmanufacturer.
 Filler strips for back-up of sealants: Chemically compatible rod stock of butyl or
neoprene, orwhite non-absorbent closed cell foam polyethylene of a diameter sized
25% greater than thejoint width before application.

 Glazing Materials
Entire glazing shall be using sections from approved manufacturer.
Curtain wall: thickness of glass to be as per structural calculations provided by the consultants.

Glass
All the glass is to be tempered with low energy with shading coefficient of X and U
value of 0.64.

Insulated Reflective Vision Glass Unit:

24mm thick hermetically sealed factory-made double-glazing units having 2 panels of

monolithic glass. The inner glass shall be 6mm clear float annealed. The exterior
pane shall be 6mm thick high performance pyrolytic glass. All glass panels need to
be heat strengthened.

Both panes shall be separated by a desiccant filled metal spacer 12mm thick forming
a dehydrated air space hermetically sealed at the periphery with flexible sealer. Entire
assembly to be dual sealed.

External panels of glass to be low energy with the u-value of 0.64.

Manufacturer to provide 10 years guarantee against peeling, fading, discoloration or

deterioration of the coating, obstruction of vision between the interior glass surface of
the double-glazing units, moisture accumulation within the air space, glass slippage
from separator and thermal breakage risks.

 Aluminum Doors.

All sections are to be heat strengthened. Works are to be in compliance with SEWA latest
regulations.
i. The Aluminum sections shall be obtained from approved manufacturers, 45
mm wide for hinged door, 105mm wide full umbrella series for sliding window.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

Page 217
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI
 VOLUME III
ii. All the items must be strengthened, tapped and modified as necessary to
receive ironmongery. All ironmongery shall be of first quality with the sliding
slashes fitted with roller ball bearing type.

iii. Door construction for sandwich panel door using 9 mm thick calcium silicate
board cladded with 2mm thick Aluminum ribbed sheet on both sides.

iv. Entire glazing to have double glass panels.

v. Iron mongery, like door hinges, closer etc are to be provided as per approved
ironmongery schedule.

Finish for door frames and door leaf & windows shall be according to the
drawing.

 Industrial sectional overhead door (ASOD)

Aluminum Sectional Overhead Door shall be constructed using polyester finish
Aluminum sections, 42mm thick with freon free polyurethane core. The sections shall
be manufactured in process lamination procedure. The sheets shall stucco
embossedbefore profile rolling. The mean average U value for the door section shall
be 0.40 W/m2 0K. The door has air tightness shall be 2.5 m3/m2 h at 50 pa pressure
and the panels have density of 48kg/m3. Intermediate sealing between sections, top,
bottom and side seals of EPDM rubber.

 Tile, Slab and Block Finishes General

Ceramic

Ceramic tiles shall be top quality as manufactured by one of the specified or equal approved
suppliedin the sizes approved from the consultant and shall be obtained form an approved
supplier. Glazed tiles to be used for walls and unglazed tiles shall be provided for the floors

Size of the tiles to be as per client\Consultant approval.

Anti-static synthetic rubber floor tiles from approved source similar to HD Hitech from Marley
of size 610*610*2 mm fixed using adhesive from approved source similar to Marley embond
168 . joints should be hot air welded with welding PVC rod from approved source. samples
shall be submitted tothe Engineer for approval and colour choice.

The contractor has to provide extra quantity equal to 3 % of the total quantity for each colour
or size ofthe Ceramic and rubber tiles .

 Suspended Ceilings

All suspended ceilings indicated of the Contract drawings shall be approved from the

consultant.All suspension systems shall be galvanized steel with hangers secured to

the structure including all necessary bracing, access panels and extra supports for light

fittings, etc..

The Contractor's attention is drawn to the sound insulation requirements of the suspended
ceilingsystems and the co-ordination of the ceilings layout with all other services installations.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

Page 218
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI
 VOLUME III

The contractor has to provide extra quantity equal to 2 % of the total quantity for each type of
thesuspended Ceiling.

 External & Internal Plaster.

Cement sand render (internally / externally) shall be provided using 1 part cement & 3 part of
sand with plastisicer to increase the workability. The sand shall have washed black & white
sand in equal volumes. Grooves in plaster shall be provided as per the elevation with width 2
cm & depth of 1 cm. Readymade plaster may be used by the contractor to the Engineer's
approval.

Plaster thickness shall be 15 mm average for both internal and external works.

The render shall be applied over surface prepared with lath, render stopper, angle bead etc.
as per the specification. Key coat from approved supplier is to be applied & cured for a
period of 3 days. The mixing shall be done using machine & cured properly for a period of
one week or as advised by engineer. Plaster work to be carried out as detailed in general
specification. Plaster accessories shallbe S.S for external where as internal using G.I
accessories

.
 Mirror

Mirrors shall be 6 mm thick approved polished plate glass with beveled edges fixed with
chromium plate dome headed mirror screws and plugged to walls.Mirror shall besurrounded
with stainless steeltrim all around as per Engineer approval.

Mirrors to be provided inside the baths with width equal to the counters width and with height
up tothe false ceiling.

 Solid and Hollow blocks

Cement blocks shall be used as per the general specifications. Blocks shall be from approved
supplier.

The required bonding agent between blocks and plaster shall be added as per the
manufacturers' instructions. External block works shall be laid over 4mm thick membrane board
DPC layer.

14.4 SANITARY WARE

Items listed are selected from Armittage Shanks - UK or Ideal Standard UK. to the client/engineer
approval . All colours to the client\engineer selection unless stated otherwise.

SW- 1Wash basin -counter type to the approved size and colour. Wash basin pedestal type for small
area only

SW- 2WC, covers and wall mounted flush mechanism. Water bib hose (Shattaf) to be provided for
each WC.

SW- 3 Bath tube

SW- 4 shower tray

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
Page 219
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI
 VOLUME III

SW- 5 Stainless steel sink 1200 x 500 Double bowl single chain board.

Corian/Avonite or equal approved counter to be used with skirting and front facia as per engineer
approval for counter top wash basins.

Mirror to be as per the specification. Full width and height as marked in the detailed drawing.

Pantry :

Sink with kitchen cabinets as specified and as shown in the drawings to be provided wherever indicated
in the drawing. Cabinet made of Aluminum frame work & HPL of specified thickness- Refer for further
details.

14.5 Sanitary Fittings

a) Wash Basin:

Basin mounted push button tap, with automatic time delayed shut-off 15 ± 5 , self-closing mechanism
internal components in anticorrosion and anti-filming materials, vandal – proof flow control, with security
system to permit continuous flow from ISO qualified manufacturer, Presto or equivalent.

b) Toilet Flush valve:

Use flush valve for concealed installation with push button control, automatic time delayed shut-off, self
cleaning mechanism, internal components in anti corrosion and outlining material, integral anti siphanic
devise from Presto or equivalent with set of anti vandalism screws and special key.

Water connection from water outlet to Sanitary fittings shall be using Chrome plated copper rigid pipes.

C) Copper Flexible Pipes Water connection from water outlet to sanitary fittings shall be using chrome
plated copper rigid pipes.

14.6 Sanitary Accessories

Sanitary Accessories are combination of Ceramic & stainless steel. The number & location to be
decided during construction with Engineer.

a) Ceramic Fixtures.

(i) SA1 - Shelf for SW1

(ii) SA3- Toilet Roll Holder for SW3, SW4
b) S/S Fixtures

(i) SA4- Liquid Soap dispencer – Surface mounted on wall for SW1 & SW2
(ii) SA5 - Robe Hook - For each toilet
(iii) SA6 - Cast wall bumber behind toilet door
(iv) SA7- Paper towel dispenser with waste receptacle – Medium size
(v) SA-8- Male/ Female door sign symbols.
(vi) SA-9 6 mm thick mirror as per drawing.

14.7 SPECIAL ITEMS

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

Page 220
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI
 VOLUME III
SI- 1 HAND RAIL

75 mm dia mirror finish cast iron pipe painted with epoxy paint railing with 50 mm dia cast iron pipe
upright at every 4th step and change of direction. All change of direction shall be using standard
bends/ elbows only. Stainless steel to be grade 316.

SI- 2 ANGLE GUARD

100 x 100 x 6mm . Angle guards at all external corners as instructed by the Engineer - epoxy
painted.

SI- 3 BARRIERS

Description:

This section contains the description and specifications for Car Barrier system works to be furnished
and installed by the contractor as indicated and as specified herein.

Scope of work:

Provide complete Gate Barrier System including but not necessarily be limited to the components and
equipment as specified in this document. The works under this specification shall include all shop
drawings and submittals as required for the gate barrier system. Further, the works shall include such
items or details as testing, adjusting, identification tags on equipment, operation and maintenance
manuals for operation (4 sets – 1 set original + 3 copies), training for trouble shooting and maintenance
of this system.

System Objectives:

The system shall be integrated with the access control system for entry and exit. The system shall allow
access to the authorized personnel only.

Traffic barriers are required at main entrances and at the locations as shown on the drawings. The
system shall consist of two barriers as shown on the drawing.

The barriers shall be integrated with the card access control system, which will be provided by others.
The Entry and Exit shall be controlled via Card Readers as well as over ride push buttons located in
Guard Room. Containment to be provided to extend the controls to office room. Contractor shall provide
hand held transmitter and receiver for each barrier to be provided as part of the system.

All the barriers shall be integrated with Fire Alarm Panel.

The barrier system shall be interfaced with the fire alarm system in the building to force the vehicle
barrier to open and remain open in case of fire alarm signal is initiated. The barrier system shall not be
closed (to its normal operation) until the fire alarm system is reset.

Products

Technology: The technology shall be a simple drive system with torque motor and a sinusoidal lever
system with high reliability. The drive system should permit fast opening and closing times without
"bouncing" of the boom at the end positions.

In event of power failure, manual opening shall be possible.

Drive:

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

Page 221
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI
 VOLUME III
The drive being the heart of the barrier system should be 240 VAC blockable torque motor. Inductive
limit switches should be used for braking mechanism and the whole unit shall be maintenance free.

Housing:

Galvanized, phosphate-treated sheet steel of 2 mm thickness should be used for housing. The base
frame of housing shall be made from stainless steel section. All metal parts shall be provided with epoxy
coating, which ensures maximum protection against corrosion.

All components inside the barrier housing should be easily accessible via the maintenance hatch and
detachable hood, with a security lock & 2 keys.

The colour shall be RAL 2000 or as per the approval of Engineer.

Barrier Boom: The barrier boom shall be aluminum cylindrical section with safety edge. The section
shall be coated in white plastic (RAL 9010) and laminated with a red reflective film for the boom to be
readily visible at night/ Stop sign shall be provided on the front face of the arm.

Arm rotating shaft to be mounted on twin ball bearings.

Electro mechanical assembly shall comprise the followings device as minimum:

- Asynchronous 3-phase motor.

- Life-lubricated speed reduction gearbox with worm screw.
- Safety friction torque regulated by Ferodo disks.
- Drive device of the crankshaft/ rod type, providing smooth operation with fast
movements, progressive braking and mechanical locking of the arm in both extreme
positions.
Limit switches, activated by adjustable cams are to be provided.

Transmission between motor and gearbox to be by trapezoidal pulleys and v-belt,

Integrated heater to work during low temperature condition shall be provided.

Logic control, operated by 3-push button box (close-stop-open) shall include following items:

- Printed circuit board

- 3-pole changeover contactors
- thermal overload protection
- Fuses
- Control relays
- Dip switches to program additional options
- Motor connection terminal blocks
- Terminal blocks for external connection
- Test switches for opening and closing

Emergency crank with safety circuit breaker for manual operation of barrier in the event of a power
failure shall be provided.

Technical details of barrier:

- Type of arm : Aluminum cylindrical section with safety edge

- Length of arm : from 3000- 5000 mm
- Location of arm : to the left (standard)
- Power supply : 240/ 415 V 3-phase (+6% - 10%)
- Frequency : 50/Hz
- Opening time : Up to 5 sec. Depending on the length of

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

Page 222
External Shaded Area)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, DUBAI
 VOLUME III

the arm

- Motor pulley : from 50 to 120 mm depending on the

length of the arm.

- Trapezoidal V-belt : from 650 x 10 mm to 750 x 10 mm

depending on the length of the arm.

- Balance spring : For arm less than 2500 mm : 1 spring,

diameter of

 wire 4.5 mm.

 For arm from 2510 to 3600 mm: 1 spring, diameter of
wire 5.5 mm.
 For arm greater than 3600 mm: 1 spring. Diameter of
wire 6.5 mm without any arm option.

- Operation temperatures : from –25 Deg. to 70 Deg.

Following items shall be part of the Barrier System

- Adjustable tip support

- Manual opening device in case of power failure
- Arm swing-off device, to tolerate vehicle impact.
- Electromagnetic tip support to improve the mechanical locking of the arm in its closed
position making it impossible to lift it up manually.
- Controls for automatic closure of the barrier in both direction.
- Controls for automatic opening and closing of the barrier for uni-directional passage
(one way traffic)
- Controls for barrier with dual directional traffic where one direction is automatically
opened by means of a detection loop.
- Vehicle presence detector for above logics.
- Flashing light shall be provided on the barrier housing
- Stop sign
- Photocell transmitter & Receiver
- Safety edge for reverse operation in case of impact of the barrier arm with vehicle
bonnet.

The gate arm operation will be as follows:

1. Incoming Vehicles: Will stop at entry card reader post which is adjacent to the entry open loop,
when both the card reader and loop detection system are satisfied, then will entry barrier arm
raise and allow entry. Entry stoplight (which is normally RED in a NO vehicle situation), goes
GREEN. When the vehicle leaves entry open loop the stoplight returns immediately to RED.

2. Until a vehicle leaves entry close/safety loop the barrier arm remain open, entry card reader is
rendered inoperative and entry stoplight remains RED.

3. After the vehicle has passed entry close/safety loop, entry barrier arm closes and the card
reader is operative to receive the next vehicle.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area +Driver Room)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, Page 223
DUBAI
 VOLUME III

4. Outgoing Vehicles: Will stop at exit card reader post, which is adjacent to exit barrier arm, raise
and allow exit. Exit stoplight (which is normally RED in a NO Vehicle situation) goes GREEN.
When the vehicle leaves exit open / safety loop the stoplight returns immediately to RED.

5. Until a vehicle exit close loop the barrier arm remains open, exit card reader is rendered
inoperative and the exit light remains RED.

6. After the vehicle has passed exit closes loop, exit barrier arm closes and the card reader is
operative to receive the next vehicle.

Mode of Operation -Visitors

The visitors will be allowed access from the security room adjacent to the gate.

Manual override switches for the gate barrier shall be installed in the security guard house.

Fire Alarm Condition

In a fire alarm condition, during office working hours a hooter shall sound, the gate arms shall raise and
remain in the fully raised position until manually reset by a push button located in the security room.

The following safety points should be observed with regard to the installation and operation of a barrier.

1. The concrete foundation is to be provided in accordance with Work Document by the builder.
2. A distance of at least 500-mm is to be maintained between the boom tip and nearest building
or wall.
3. For permanent installation, a main switch that disconnects all poles is to be provided by the
builder.
4. Opening and closing operations must be observed! Installation of the operating elements
outside the field of view is not permitted; a visual link must exist between the barrier and the
control elements.
5. During operation, the presence of persons or goods in the movement zone of the boom is not
permitted.

SI -7 SIGNAGE, NAME PLATE & NUMERALS

a. Signage for the public areas shall be using.

Signage for the public sitting areas shall be using anti corrosive satin stainless AISI 316, brushed or
bead blasted, 4mm thickness, size 426 x 118 mm plates.

Concealed wall / door fixation with jigsaw components and dovetail solution on the back of the sign.

Suspended signs to be hung in anti-corrosive satin stainless steel AISI 316 rods and fixed to the sign
with an anti-corrosive satin stainless steel AISI 316 block / bolt. Text in Arabic & English with 70mm
black silk print, for easy readability.

b. Acrylic Name Plate.

Name plate in Acrylic sheet with 5cm high engraved letters for service rooms areas.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area +Driver Room)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, Page 224
DUBAI
 VOLUME III
c. Floor level and prayer hall and Services direction.

Numerals 0-9 and arrows in anti-corrosive satin stainless steel AISI 316, 150 mm high, 12mm
thickness , supplied with two spacers for concealed fixing , suitable for 4 mm screws.

d. Rooms & Floors Function:

Full Signage system to be applied for each room showing function of the room or the person
designation who occupy the room. The same will be carried out with coordination with the client in
order to give each room a function. In addition, four number of Full boards system to be provided,
one to be installed in the main entrance and the second to be installed at the staff entrance lobby the
other two to be installed at the stair/lift lobby using anti corrosive satin stainless AISI 316, brushed or
bead blasted, 4mm thickness of 70x100cm size for each board, the main board which will be located
at the main entrance to be 170x150cm size giving full details of building rooms name and direction.
Building map should be provided in ash wood glazed frame and the map frame to be wall mounted
along with the entrance main board.

e. No smoking sign

4” diameter vinyl sticker signage.

f. Building name sign

printed on precast blocks, fitting within the allocated space (see main elevation drawings) and subject
to client approval

Precast Concrete wheel stopper

Kerbstone is to be fixed as a wheel stopper as shown on the drawings

SI-8 CABINETS FOR PANTRY / KITCHEN

Aluminum frame work shall be constructed from extruded aluminum sections of AA6063 A1 MG SI
Alloy (HE9 Alloy).

1) Hardness –71 to 84 rockwell E

2) Tensile strength as per British standard BS 1474: 1972
3) Section wall thickness –1.3 mm
4) Polyster powder to a minimum coating thickness of 65 microns to comply with BS 6496 –1984.

PANELS:

Panels to be of high pressure solid laminated sheets H.P.L tested to BS 3794 & BS476 of the following
thickness.

(a) Cabinet caracass panels 3.5 mm

(a) Door panels & horizontal shelf 5.5 mm

DOORS:

Door frame should be constructed from round ended Aluminum Sections fitted with round duratex
angles to avoid sharp edges.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area +Driver Room)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, Page 225
DUBAI
 VOLUME III
1) Door corners should be assembled by means of screw jointed cleats
2) No screw should be visible on face or back edges.
3) Doors to be fitted with rubber slamming gaskets.
4) Door frame section should be large enough to meet the requirement of fixing heavy duty hinges
of 35 mm cup diameter.

HINGES.
Hinges to be high quality European made stainless steel with following parameters.

1) 120 degree opening angle.

2) 3 dimensional adjustment.
3) Hinge cup diameter 35mm snap –on
4) Tested to 250000 open & close actions.
5)
DRAWERS.

Runners to be epoxy of high quality European made powder coated metal smooth & silent action load
capacity of 10 Kg.

HANDLES

Stainless steel D shape handles to Engineer choice.

SINKS. Insert type manufactured from stainless steel 304 AISI grade 18/10 chrome nickel composition.

WORK TOP

30 mm thick Granite top over galvanized steel frame work painted epoxy with back splash as shown in
the drawing and accepted by consultant. Rear side of granite to be painted 2 coats of water repellent
paint approved by SIKA and the Granite manufacturer.

SI-9 MAT WELL

Matwell to receive mat of dimension specified in the drawing finished in steel trowel & applied with floor
hardner. Semi open type Mat shall consists of anodized Aluminum rails with Vinyl cushions. The treads
are of durable colourfast 100% virgin Nylon fibre and the mat shall have recessed brass frame work all
around.

SI-11 ACOUSTIC TREATMENT for generator room.

Generator room to be provided with sound attenuators, Acoustic louvers, wall paneling etc, to achieve
acceptable international sound quality for a similar situation. All design & recommendation testing shall
be from a reputed acoustic consultant to the satisfaction of Engineer. Acoustic contractor also to be
approved by Engineer.

SI-12 EXTERNAL MANHOLE

All service manhole required for Electrical & Mechanical services with Ductile Iron, heavy duty double
seal Manhole cover & frame with GRP sealing plate to relevant BS Standard. The size and location
shall be as per the approved drawing and / or Municipality requirement.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area +Driver Room)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, Page 226
DUBAI
 VOLUME III
SI-13 CAR PARKING ACCESSORIES

Rubber wall guard, Corner guard and Precast wheel stopper as per specifications and drawings.

SI-14 EXPOSED PARKING AREA & ROAD MARKING PAINT

SIKA Polyurethane based floor system for exposed parking.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area +Driver Room)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, Page 227
DUBAI
 VOLUME III

14.8 Door Schedule

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

14.9 Doors & windows

WILL BE RELEASED AT FINAL TENDER ANNOUNCEMENT

(TO BE PROVISIONED IN CONTRACTORS ESTIMATION)

Brief specification of the Doors :

a. Timber Doors.

Timber doors are mainly made of 45mm thick maranti wood of laminated shutters cladded shutters.
The width of frame to suit site condition. Rough ground made of 18mm marine ply to be used for all
timber doors. The frame shall have 13mm x 50 mm rebate on either side to facilitate shutter fixing
either at inside or outside. Frame shall have anti bang gasket groove to fix gasket according to site
condition. Maranti wood frames finished in enamel paint spray applied.

Shutters shall be of 45 mm thick consisting of moisture resistant MDF core, hot pressed with Ash Veneer
or 1.5mm thick laminate as specified 12mm thick lipping to run all around as shown in the drawing.

All timber doors are using core supplied from specialist, complying to fire standards. The complete
operational door set shall comply to test in accordance with BS 476 : Part 22 1987 . Methods for the
determination of the fire resistance of non-load bearing elements of construction. Shutters are to be
provided with smoke seal in addition to intumescent strip to achieve smoke control function to comply
building regulations. Smoke seals are to be tested in accordance with BS-467 part 31 section 31.1
Door performance should comply Civil Defence rules & regulation FD 60S or FD 90 S etc.

b. Aluminum Doors.

1. The Aluminum section from approved manufacturers and the section series are 45 mm
wide for hinged door, 105mm wide full umbrella series for sliding window and 125mm.
Wide full umbrella series for sliding doors.
2. All the items must be strengthened, tapped and modified as necessary to receive iron
mongery. All iron mongery shall be of first quality with the sliding slashes fitted with roller
ball bearing type.
3. Aluminum window and door frames shall be as manufactured by an approved
manufacturer. Units shall be kynar coated to approved colour or as advised by Engineer.
Windows and external doors shall be certified for water tightness.
4. Door construction for sandwitch panel door using 16mm thick calcium cilicte board
cladded with 1.5mm thick Aluminum sheet on both sides.
5. Aluminum door located externally to have double glass panels where as internal shall have
single glass panel.
6. Frameless doors usings 10mm thick edge polished, heat strengthened glass panels with
S/S top and bottom rail.
7. Iron mongery , like door hinges closer etc are to be provided as per the ironmongery
schedule.

Finish for door frames and Door Leaf & Windows shall be according to the drawing

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area +Driver Room)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, Page 228
DUBAI
 VOLUME III
c. METAL DOOR:

Hollow metal steel doors and frames to be obtained from a specialist manufacture with a proven record
of at least 15 years and to be approval of the Engineer. Door shall comply with ASTM-152 and shall be
fire rated in accordance with NFPA 80. Every door and frames should be tested and labeled by an
independent testing agency like UL or WH. All doors and frames to be manufactured to SDI and HMMA
/ NAAMM specifications.

Steel Doors Shutters:

Doors shutters shall be a reinforced double skin 45 mm hollow shell construction of 18 guage prime
painted galvanealed steel. The core to be polystyrene with R-value of 6.5 door should not have visible
seam on edges and must have continuous reinforcing channel on door inside. Doors shall be specially
constructed with internal reinforcing members fitted to incorporate and protect hardware inside.

Steel Frames:

Frames shall be 14-gauge prime painted galvanealed steel unit with equal rabbeted of 150 –mm jamb
depth. Frames shall have wall anchors for fixing on to the existing walls. The frames to be grouted after
fixing.

The door to be guaranteed against rust for a period of minimum 10 years from the manufacture itself.

Specification of Hardware:

All hardware used should be suitable to be used on Fire rated steel door and Frames. Fire rated doors
to have UL listed hardware to comply with the NFPA 80 fire- rating requirement. All Hardware should
be of Satin Stainless steel finish.

Hinges:

All hinges to be templated and to comply with ANSI standard. Min size to be 4 ½ x 4 ½ and suitable
for High frequency application.

Locks and Master Keys:

All locks to be security locks as indicated in Iron Mongery Schedule. Locks with 3 sets of construction
keys, master keys, great master keys and great grand master key are the requirement of end user and
these master keys shall be directly shipped from the factory to AC-DELCO facility.

d) THRESHOLD FOR DOORS:

(i) Whereas indicated in the drawing Marble/ Granite threshold shall be provided between wet
and dry area & as well to separate two different floor finishes. The material & colour subject
to Engineer approval.
(ii) Unless indicated otherwise, All Aluminum Doors are to be provided extruded Aluminum
threshold with rubber seal.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area +Driver Room)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, Page 229
DUBAI
 VOLUME III

14.10 Ironmongery

STANDARDS: All hardware for this project shall be as per the BS, DIN or ANSI standards. All fire and
safety codes shall be met as per the relevant fire & safety codes as followed by the local authority
requirements.

SUBMITTALS:

Contractor shall prepare and submit a detailed hardware schedule listing all the doors, size, type,
handing and degree of opening. Indicate the hardware used, finish, quantity, manufacturer and
catalogue number under each hardware set.

Submit the original catalogues, along with appropriate samples conforming to all specified aspects of
the hardware like size, finish, etc.

A key schedule clearly indicating the various levels of master keying to be submitted for the consultants
approvals.

Submit the templates for the door manufacturers and co-ordinate with all the door suppliers to ensure
that the door is prepped in the factories as per the relevant hardware needed for each opening.

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS:

Contractor shall provide instruction manuals, parts lists templates and suggested spare part list along
with a set of the catalogues for the maintenance dept. Furnish 3 sets of wrenches for the door closers,
Allen keys for the handles and any other special tools needed by the maintenance dept.

PRODUCTS: Hinges:

Hinges shall be as type D-Line (Ref# 14.5003.02.002), Phosphor bronze butt hinges in satin stainless
steel, with size 102x45x3mm. Hinges are template drilled supplied with wood and machine screws for
either timber or steel door installation. Satin Stainless steel grade 316. Hinge tested according to BS
class 8 – highest class for stainless steel hinges.

Hinges for Aluminum doors:

Hinges shall be as type Dr. Hans (5822 Hans) Three part hinges for heavy duty door – 36mm. Pivot
point 62.5mm. fixing point in Satin Anodized Aluminum finish, and to be supplied as metal screws as
per the doors schedule.

Door Closers: Door closers shall be type D-Line (Ref# 14.5373.02.005) equipped with covers, in Satin
stainless steel finish. Overhead door closer BC, EN 2-4 with satin stainless steel AISI 316 adjustable
arm/bracket and cover. Body made of die cast Aluminum with hardened rack and pinions. Door closer tested
according to EN 1154, which includes UL, BS and DIN certifications. Delayed action and hold open
features to be provided. Hold open facility is not to be used in fire rated doors. Closers should not be
used on the main lobby of the doors. Install closers on the push side of doors opening to main lobby
areas/corridors (parallel arm type) and pull side on doors opening from the public areas/corridors into
rooms (regular arm type).

Lever Handle on rose and escutcheons for wood/metal doors:

Lever handles on rose shall be type D-Line (Ref# 14.1816.02.016 ) 19mm U-shaped, through fixing and
8x8 spindle, stain stainless steel AISI 316. Roses 4x50 mm with concealed ball bearing system. Rose
and lever handles are screwed together and secured with spindle, door thickness 33-59 mm. Solid
inserts of brass and Aluminum. Bent to a radius which equals the diameter of the tube. Withstand a
500,000 cycle endurance test. Tested according to DS, BS, UL and DIN norms.

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area +Driver Room)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, Page 230
DUBAI
 VOLUME III
Cylindrical escutcheons to be D-Line (Ref: 14.3425.02.215) euro standard with snap-on cover with holes
for M4 machine screws.

Toilet Escutcheons to be D-Line (Ref# 14.3475.02.309) with t/turn and indicator with emergency
release.

Lever Handle (Cranked Offset) on rose for Narrow stile Alum.doors:

Lever Handles with ball bearing (Cranked Offset) on rose for narrow stile doors to be from D-Line
(ref# 14.2016.02.010) and Escutcheon Ref# 14.3437.02.419.

Mortise Locks for Wood and Steel doors:

Mortise Locks to be D-Line (Entrance lock 14.9020.02.600 + 14.9090.02.600)

Bathroom Lock Ref# 14.9022.02.600 + 14.9090.02600

Dead lock Ref# 14.9027.02.600 + 14.9090.02.602.

All locks shall be 235 x 24 x 83 mm with 60mm backset. Heavy duty spring follower. 20mm double
throw bolt and 11mm reversible latch in nickel-plated steel. Square face and strike plate of satin
stainless steel AISI 316. Suitable for euro profile cylinders at 72mm centers and bathroom lock as per
above specification but suitable for toilet indicator and emergency release sets with 8x8 spindle at
78mm centers.

Mortise locks for Alum.doors:

Mortise locks to be D-Line (Ref# 14.9061.02.300 to receive the lever handle and

Lock ref# 14.9067.02.300 dead lock) both lock’s strike plate to be supplied by the

Door supplier. All locks shall be 30 mm backset.

Cylinders:

Cylinders to be with 5 pin, Euro profile type cylinder/cylinder with thumb turn, Cylinder with both side
key and cylinder one side. All cylinders to be supplied complete with 3 keys. The core pins are of special
wear resistant bronze, with sinter steel cam. Master keying to be done in the factory and records
maintained. Access to additional keys to be through the authorized representative of owner only. All
Grand Master and Master keys should be directly mailed to Etisalat by the Manufacturer.

All cylinders should have cut keys (3 keys per cylinder), Grand Master Keys and Master Keys based on
the key schedule approved by the consultant. The system should have expansion of 50% for the further.
A key cabinet to hold all the keys to be provided. Grand Master Keys and Master Keys should be
supplied 3 Nos. each according to the

Number of groups required by Etisalat.

Flush Bolts and sockets (wood/steel/alum. doors):

All double doors to have manual flush bolts type (Ref# 94.156.61 for wood door and Ref# 94.370.61 for
steel/alum. doors the bottom bolt should go into a dust proof strike Type 94.160.61 from Devon Range.

Coordinator:

All rebated style double doors to have a door selector to control the sequential closing of the leaves to
PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+
External Shaded Area +Driver Room)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, Page 231
DUBAI
 VOLUME III
prevent damage. The selectors to be type SF 150.

Sex symbols:

Sex symbols to be from D-Line (Ref# 14.3777.02.019 Female and 14.3777.02.27 Male
Size 175x175 square in holes for 4mm countersunk screws.

Push Plate: (Ref# 14.3701.02.SP):

Push Plate to be from D-Line size 350 x 100mm x 1.5mm thick, radius corners, and countersunk screw
holes complete with fixing. Satin Stainless steel AISI 316.

Kick Plate: (Ref. 94.3776.xx):

Kick Plates to be from D-Line size use Aluminum, satin finish. The length of the kickplates is to be the
door width, less the thickness of the frame stop.

Pull Handle:

Pull Handle to be D-Line 19mm dia x 300 mm long bent to a radius which equals the diameter of the
tube, Satin stainless steel AISI 316. Solid inserts of brass, 8 threaded holes to suit steel bolt AISI 316.
Ref# 14.4212.02.304 and ref# 14.4412.02.301 dia 25mm x 300 mm long“D” shaped pull handle, and
Ref# 14.4632.02.304+14.4634.02.303 – dia 32mm x 300 mm long – Cranked pull handle in stainless
steel, with bolt through, zinc plated, M8 countersunk steel bolts as well as back to back fixing Suitable
for timber or metal or aluminum doors thickness 30 to 55mm thick doors.

Floor Stop:

Dline pedal type floor door stop type D-Line ref# 14.5070.02.002 with hard rubber on stainless steel
base AISI 316, dia 50mm.complete with screw and dowel. Where floor stops cannot be used wall stop
type D-line Ref: 14.5060.02.005 shall be used. In bathroom D-Line coat hook cum buffer, Ref.No.
14.5065.02.006 in satin stainless steel finish will be used.

Weather Seals:

All external doors to have suitable weather seals to protect against outside dust, wind & cold. Doors
should have door seals for the header and jamb, Type Pemko S88D in Dark Bronze. The floor should
have threshold Type Pemko 2005AS in mill finish.

Exit Device:

Exit device to be from D-Line (Single Panic Bolt Ref# 14.5102.02.008 with its external

Locking facility ref# 14.5103.02.002) in Satin stainless steel finish.

Foot Operated Door Holder:

Foot Operated Door Holder to be from M/s. K.W.S. Germany and is required to use only

The external fire door wherever the doors may require to be kept open for loading/unloading purpose.
(Ref. No. KWS 1026- in Silver Anodized finish).

PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom Building + Production Facility Extension+

External Shaded Area +Driver Room)on Plot no. 5330279, DUBAI INDUSTRIAL PARK, Page 232
DUBAI